JP6429406B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Game machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP6429406B2
JP6429406B2 JP2016253260A JP2016253260A JP6429406B2 JP 6429406 B2 JP6429406 B2 JP 6429406B2 JP 2016253260 A JP2016253260 A JP 2016253260A JP 2016253260 A JP2016253260 A JP 2016253260A JP 6429406 B2 JP6429406 B2 JP 6429406B2
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
effect
volume
notification
value
sound
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
JP2016253260A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP2017056268A (en
Inventor
直幸 渡辺
直幸 渡辺
Original Assignee
京楽産業.株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 京楽産業.株式会社 filed Critical 京楽産業.株式会社
Priority to JP2016253260A priority Critical patent/JP6429406B2/en
Publication of JP2017056268A publication Critical patent/JP2017056268A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP6429406B2 publication Critical patent/JP6429406B2/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.
  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (variation display by a plurality of identification information, etc.) is executed based on establishment of a start condition, and a game is played based on the result of the predetermined game Generally, a game value is given to a player.
  In such a gaming machine, a sound output unit (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and an effect sound is output at a predetermined volume from the sound output unit according to the state of the game. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (see Patent Document 1).
JP 2014-233590 A
  However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem that the volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and is output from the sound output unit, but cannot be set to a desired volume. It was.
  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of setting the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention provides a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and a variable effect for informing whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine comprising production sound output means (production control board 130) for outputting production sound from the sound output unit during execution, the first operation unit (changeover switch 22) that can be operated by a game store clerk is operated. Based on the first volume value setting means (effect control board 130) for setting the volume value of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to any one of a plurality of volume values, and a second operable by the player Second volume value setting means (effect control board 130) for setting the volume value set by the first volume value setting means to a predetermined volume value based on an operation of the operation unit (cross key 19); Based on the establishment of the display condition, a predetermined display unit (first The sound volume value notifying means (effect control board 130) for displaying the sound volume value image indicating the current sound volume value on the image display device 70), and the predetermined display unit based on the occurrence of an abnormality to be notified. And a notification means (production control board 130) for displaying a predetermined notification image, and the abnormality to be subjected to the predetermined notification includes a first abnormality and a second abnormality that is more serious than the first abnormality. And the second volume value setting means sets the volume value corresponding to the operation when the second operation unit is operated during display of the volume value image, and the volume value notification means When the volume value is set in view of the volume value image, regardless of whether the whether the volume value is the first volume value setting means set the second volume value setting means has set the display Volume value image showing the newly set volume value In an updatable, when the second operation portion is operated by the second volume value setting means during the display of the volume value image sets the volume value, the sound output an alarm sound in accordance with the volume value is capable of outputting from the parts, when the notification image indicating the occurrence of the second abnormality in the display of the volume value image is displayed, the sound volume value image Ri Do hidden, during the execution of the changing effect Then, when the volume value is set by operating the second operation unit while the volume value image is displayed, the volume of the effect sound changes and the notification sound is not output .
  According to the present invention, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.
It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the perspective view of the game machine of the state which open | released the glass frame. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning ball flow path provided in the back surface side of a game board. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the display area of a 1st image display apparatus and a 2nd image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the perspective view of the back surface side of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table for 1st special symbols, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table for 2nd special symbols. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol determination table for jackpots, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol determination table for jackpots, (c) is the special symbol determination table for losers It is a figure which shows an example. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table for 1st special symbols. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table for 2nd special symbols. It is a figure which shows an example of the prior determination table of determination information. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot game control table, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot game control table. It is a figure which shows an example of a big prize opening / closing control table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state setting table. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the hit determination table for normal symbols, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the stop symbol determination table for normal symbols, (c) is the variation pattern determination for normal symbols It is a figure which shows an example of a table, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the open mode determination table of a 2nd starting port. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol reservation memory area of main RAM, (b) is a figure which shows an example of each memory | storage part of a special symbol reservation memory area, (c) is a normal symbol of main RAM It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding storage area, (d) is a figure which shows an example of each memory | storage part of a normal symbol pending | holding storage area. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initialization process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the general winning opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd start port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the gate detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the prize confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game end process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the small hit game process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the common figure normal electric power control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the auxiliary game process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the abnormality determination process in a main control board. (A) is a figure which shows the main process in a payout control part, (b) is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in a payout control part. It is a figure which shows the abnormality determination process in a payout control part. (A) is a figure which shows the classification of the command transmitted from a main control board to a payout control board, (b) is a figure which shows the classification of the command transmitted from a payout control board to a main control board or an effect control board. is there. It is a figure which shows the classification of the command transmitted to a production | presentation control board from a main control board. It is a figure which shows the classification of the command transmitted to a production | presentation control board from a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting control process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the response | compatibility table showing the response | compatibility at the time of generation | occurrence | production of the event which should be alert | reported. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect process in an effect control part. It is a figure showing the change production start processing in the production control unit. It is a figure which shows the change effect pattern determination process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol pattern determination process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the notice effect determination process 1 in an effect control part. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the decision table 1 of a definite effect, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the decision table 2 of a definite effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination table of a probability change finalization effect. It is a figure which shows the process during change production in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the big hit effect start process in an effect control part. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the determination table of a special game effect pattern, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the determination table of notification timing. It is a figure showing processing during jackpot presentation in the production control unit. It is a figure which shows the information setting process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the 1st operation reception process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the 2nd operation reception process in an effect control part. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a 1st determination table, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd determination table. It is a figure which shows the main process in a liquid-crystal control part. (A) is a figure which shows the command reception interruption process in a liquid crystal control part, (b) is a figure which shows the V blank interruption process in a liquid crystal control part. It is a figure which shows the mode switching process in a liquid-crystal control part. (A) is a figure which shows a changeover switch, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of adjustment mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination table of the notification sound of adjustment mode. It is a figure which shows the modification of the mode switching process in a liquid-crystal control part. (A) is a figure which shows the changeover switch in a modification, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the adjustment mode in a modification. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the determination table of the notification sound of adjustment mode in a modification, (b) is a figure which shows the setting screen of the power saving mode displayed on a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the setting process of the animation pattern in a liquid crystal control part. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting process of the occurrence event in a liquid-crystal control part. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting screen of the occurrence event displayed on a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination table of the alerting | reporting sound of an occurrence event. It is a figure which shows the volume setting process in a liquid-crystal control part. (A) is a figure which shows the guidance image of volume adjustment, (b) is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting image of the volume value for every volume value, (c) is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting sound of the volume for every volume value. is there. It is a figure which shows the change process of the volume in a liquid-crystal control part. (A) is a figure which shows the reset process of the volume value in a liquid crystal control part, (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the reset process of the volume value in a liquid crystal control part. It is a figure which shows the setting process of the brightness | luminance in a liquid-crystal control part. (A) is a figure which shows the guidance image of brightness | luminance adjustment, (b) is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting image of the luminance value for every luminance value. It is a figure which shows the change process of the brightness | luminance in a liquid-crystal control part. (A) is a figure which shows the reset process of the luminance value in a liquid crystal control part, (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the reset process of the luminance value in a liquid crystal control part. It is a figure which shows the control process of the power saving mode in a liquid-crystal control part. It is a figure which shows the example of an output volume by an audio | voice control part. It is a figure which shows the modification of the output volume by an audio | voice control part. It is a figure which shows the main process in a lamp control part. (A) is a figure which shows the command reception interruption process in a lamp control part, (b) is a figure which shows the V blank interruption process in a lamp control part, (c) The timer interruption process in a lamp control part FIG. It is a figure which shows the setting process of the brightness | luminance of LED in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the light emission luminance example in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the setting process of the light emission information of alerting | reporting LED in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the setting process of the light emission information of handle LED in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the setting process of the drive information of the air blower in a lamp control part. It is a timing chart before and after the start of a definite effect. It is a timing chart before and after the end of the final effect. It is a figure which shows the example of production of a definite production. It is a timing chart before and after the start of the probability variation finalizing effect with button operation. It is a timing chart before and after the start of the probability change confirmation effect without button operation. It is a timing chart before and after the end of the probability change confirmation effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of a certain change confirmation production. It is a timing chart before and after the start of a promotion notification production. It is a figure which shows the production example of a promotion notification production. It is a timing chart before and after the start of a continuous notification production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of a continuous notification effect. It is a timing chart which shows the modification regarding a definite production | presentation and a certain change definite production. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the guidance image of volume adjustment, and the guidance image of brightness adjustment. It is a timing chart in case adjustment mode is changed during waiting of a customer waiting production. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the gaming machine when the adjustment mode is changed while waiting for a customer waiting effect. It is a timing chart in case a volume value and adjustment mode are changed during waiting of a customer waiting effect. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the gaming machine when the volume value and the adjustment mode are changed while waiting for a customer waiting effect. It is a timing chart in case a volume value and adjustment mode are changed during waiting of a customer waiting effect. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the gaming machine when the volume value and the adjustment mode are changed while waiting for a customer waiting effect. It is a timing chart in case a customer waiting effect is performed after a volume value is changed during waiting of a customer waiting effect. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a game machine in case a customer waiting effect is performed after a sound volume value is changed during the waiting of a customer waiting effect. It is a timing chart in case a power failure (power interruption) occurs after the volume value is changed during standby for a customer waiting effect. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the game machine when a power failure (power interruption) occurs after the volume value is changed during the standby of the customer waiting effect. It is a timing chart in case adjustment mode is changed during a change production. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the gaming machine when the adjustment mode is changed during the variation effect. It is a timing chart in case a volume value is changed in the adjustment possible period during a fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a game machine in case a volume value is changed in the adjustment possible period during a change production. It is a timing chart in case adjustment mode is changed during the fluctuating effect in which a pseudo | simulation continuous effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the gaming machine when the adjustment mode is changed during the fluctuating effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. It is a timing chart in case a magnetic abnormality and a plate full occur during a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of operation | movement of a game machine when a magnetic abnormality and a plate full occur during a change production. It is a timing chart in case a magnetic abnormality and a plate full occur during a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of operation | movement of a game machine when a magnetic abnormality and a plate full occur during a change production. It is a timing chart in case the notification sound which becomes a jackpot decision is output during a change production. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a game machine in case the notification sound which becomes a jackpot decision is output during a variation production. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process of the production | presentation control part in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the first half of the operation reception process of the production control part in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the second half of the operation reception process of the production control part in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd determination table. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the gaming machine before and after the menu operation. It is a figure which shows the main process of the liquid-crystal control part in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process of the production control part in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the main process of the liquid-crystal control part in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the V blank interruption process of the liquid-crystal control part in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the first half of the volume setting process of the liquid crystal control part in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the second half of the volume setting process of the liquid crystal control part in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the first half of the setting process of the brightness | luminance of the liquid-crystal control part in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the second half of the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal control part in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting process of the liquid crystal control part in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the setting process of the animation pattern of the liquid crystal control part in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation effect process of the liquid-crystal control part in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the V blank interruption process of the liquid-crystal control part in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the first half of the operation reception process of the liquid crystal control part in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the second half of the operation reception process of the liquid crystal control part in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the circuit structure of the presentation control board in 1st-5th embodiment.
(First embodiment)
The first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.
(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 in a state where the glass frame is opened in the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a winning ball flow path provided on the back side of the game board in the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed in the display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) in the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 supported to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 supported to be rotatable with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is formed.
  The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is attached to an island facility of a game store (for example, a nail or a stopper). ) Is fixed through.
  The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the first hinge mechanism portion 6. Has been. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 Maintenance can be performed.
  The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. Yes. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5 a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.
  An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper portion of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (a glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.
  Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 including a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as a ball, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not flowed into the upper tray 11 and have flowed into an overflow ball channel described later, and a game ball A firing operation device 13 capable of performing an operation for firing is provided.
  The audio output device 9 is provided at intervals in two upper portions of the glass frame 4 so as to produce an effect by sound (music, voice) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. It has become. Also, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8 and produce an effect by illumination by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame illumination device 10 includes a notification LED 10a (not shown) that is controlled to be turned on / flashed when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality described later occurs.
  In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage unit 11 a is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the firing operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11 b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.
  In addition, at the center front side portion of the upper tray 11, there are an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. They are arranged side by side.
  The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (see FIG. 2) capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 6) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect. A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 6) having a button driving motor for moving the button 17 in the vertical direction is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.
  The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (see FIG. 2) that can perform a selection operation and the like, and a cross key detection switch 19a that is connected to the cross key 19 and detects an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 6) is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.
  In addition, a lending operation unit 20 capable of performing a lending operation for game balls and a return operation for a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11. When a lending button (not shown) of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining amount stored in a storage medium received by a ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to lend a game ball. When the return button (not shown) of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).
  Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit in the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. Further, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 6) for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower tray 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path. The full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full. While this is being done, game ball payout by a game ball payout device 100 described later is stopped.
  The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects that a player's hand touches the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 6), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 6) composed of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A light emitting device 15c (corresponding to the rendering means of this embodiment) is provided. When it is detected by the touch sensor 15a that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to send out the game balls one by one.
  The light emitting device 15c of the handle is formed in a dome shape that constitutes a front portion of the firing handle 15 and bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member that can transmit light. It is installed. When the LED emits light, it is possible to execute a light emission effect (such as a probability change confirmation effect, a promotion notification effect, a continuous notification effect, and the like) that causes the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. In addition, an air blowing port 15d serving as a blow-out port for wind (air) sent out from an air blowing device 21 described later is provided at the front end of the light emitting device 15c of the handle.
  On the back surface side of the glass frame 4, a blower device 21 (corresponding to rendering means) for sending wind (air) in a predetermined manner is provided at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13. The blower 21 includes a blower (not shown) for sending out wind (air) and a motor (not shown) for operating the blower, and wind (air) sent out by the blower Is sent through the base 14 of the firing operation device 13 and the inside of the light emitting device 15c of the handle toward the player's hand from the air blowing port 15d. By operating this blower device 21, it is possible to execute a blow effect (such as a confirmed effect described later) for sending wind (air) in a predetermined manner toward the hand of the player who is operating the firing handle 15. It has become.
  The air blower 21 is not provided at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13, but is provided around the decorative plate 2b of the outer frame 2 or around the transparent member 8a of the glass frame 4 so that wind (air) is directed toward the player. ) May be sent out. A plurality of blower devices 21 may be provided.
  The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a game ball launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking 4 in the closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.
  The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape having a front opening at a substantial center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3 and can store the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 are located behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.
  The game ball launching device 26 includes a launching member 28 for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 6) for driving the launching member 28, and a launching member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. A launch rail 29 that rises upward and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a launch position that is the lower end of the launch rail 29 are provided. When the game ball delivered by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member 28.
  The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when it is rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.
  At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a 37 is provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball fired by the game ball launching device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down to the outside of the game area (the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).
  Near the center of the game area 5a, a so-called center case is provided with a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the interior, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. In addition, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5 a into the interior of the decoration frame 40 is provided on the side of the decoration frame 40, and the decoration frame 40 is provided below the decoration frame 40 by the warp device 41. A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling the game ball introduced into the interior of the sphere so as to flow down below the decorative frame 40.
  Below the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win (win) are provided at intervals. When the game balls won (entered) are detected by the general prize opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 6), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 5). It is paid out to the upper tray 11 as a ball.
  On both sides of the game area 5a (the left game area and the right game area), there are respectively provided general figure gates 44 (normal figure start areas) through which game balls can pass. When a ball is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 6), a normal symbol winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. The normal symbol winning lottery will be described later.
  A first start port 45 (special drawing start region) through which a game ball can always win (enter) is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42. When a game ball that has won (entered) a ball is detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 6), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are received from the game ball dispensing device 100 (see FIG. 5). It is paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.
  Directly under the first starting opening 45, the game ball is in a closed state (basic form) where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entry) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the fact that a lottery was won for a normal symbol). Is provided with a variable starting portion 46 that can be converted into an open state (special mode) that allows or is easily won.
  The variable starter 46 detects a second start port 47 (special drawing start region) in which a game ball can win (pick up) and a game ball win (win) in the second start port 47. A start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 6), a movable member 48 that converts (variably) the second start port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second start port opening / closing solenoid that converts the movable member 48 to open / close. 48b (see FIG. 6). When the second start port 47 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the second start port 47 is open, the game ball wins ( Is possible or easy.
  When a game ball that has won (entered) the second start port 47 is detected by the second start port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are supplied to the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 5). ) To be paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a big win lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.
  A closed state above the guiding member 37 and downstream of the right-hand general-purpose gate 44 is that it is impossible to win a game ball (win) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the winning of a special symbol jackpot lottery). There is provided a variable winning portion 49 that is converted from the (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (pick-up).
  The variable winning section 49 includes a large winning opening 50 through which game balls can be won (entered), and a large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning (entering) of the game balls in the large winning opening 50 (see FIG. 6), an opening / closing member 51 for converting (variable) the special winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the opening / closing member 51. When the grand prize opening 50 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the big prize opening 50 is in the open state, the game ball is won (winning) ) Is possible or easy.
  Further, when the game balls that have won (entered) the big prize opening 50 are detected by the big prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are obtained from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball.
  On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning port 43, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, and the big winning port 50 are won and the general winning port detecting switch 43a, the first starting port detecting switch 45a, the second A winning ball flow path 52 (see FIG. 3) is provided that receives and collects the game balls detected by the start opening detection switch 47a and the big winning opening detection switch 50a.
  Further, a passage detection switch 52a (see FIGS. 3 and 6) for detecting a game ball flowing down the winning ball flow path 52 after being detected by various detection switches is provided in the downstream portion of the winning ball flow path 52. . The passage detection switch 52a detects again the game ball after being detected by the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, and the big winning opening detecting switch 50a. It is used to determine whether the winning is a proper winning (winning) or an abnormal winning (winning).
  Outside the gaming area 5a, a symbol display device comprising a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61 and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold indicator 63, and a second special symbol hold A hold display device comprising a display 64 and a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 6) for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) to be described later occurs, and will be described later. A right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 6) that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a during the big hit game (special game state) or the short-time game state is provided.
  The first special symbol display 60 is a variable indicator for displaying (notifying) the result of jackpot lottery of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the first start opening 45. The second special symbol display 61 displays (notifies) the result of the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the second start port 47. The normal symbol display unit 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that a game ball wins (wins) a ball on the normal gate 44. It is a vessel.
  The jackpot lottery for the first special symbol is a jackpot determination random value or the like (determination information) obtained when a game ball wins (wins) at the first start opening 45, and the acquired jackpot determination random number value and jackpot This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a “big hit” by comparing the determination value. When the first special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the first special symbol display 60 displays a variation of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Is called. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.
  The jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a jackpot determination random number value (determination information) obtained when a game ball wins (wins) at the second starting port 47, and the jackpot determination random number value and jackpot This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a “big hit” by comparing the determination value. When the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol display 61 displays a variation of the second special symbol, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped. Is called. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.
  The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at a predetermined interval or order in the variable display of each special symbol. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is lit in a mode (a big hit mode, a small hit mode, or a lost mode) indicating the result of each jackpot lottery.
  In the present embodiment, “big hit” means that a big hit game (special game state) is executed in the big special lottery (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the big special lottery (special game determination) of the second special symbol. The state where the rights have been acquired. The “big hit game (special game state)” means a game state in which a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).
  In addition, although the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 50 in each round game are determined in advance, a predetermined number of game balls can be placed in the big prize opening 50 even before reaching the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time. When (for example, nine) wins (wins), one round game is finished. In other words, the “hit game (special game state)” is a game state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win a prize ball. In the present embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special game states) having different degrees of advantage for the player can be generated, which will be described in detail later.
  Whether or not the normal symbol winning lottery is “winning” by obtaining a random number value for hit determination when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44 and comparing the acquired random number value for hit determination with the hit determination value This corresponds to determining whether or not. When the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the normal symbol display unit 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.
  The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at a predetermined interval or order in the normal symbol variation display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is lit in a mode (a winning mode or a lost mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.
  In the present embodiment, “winning” means a state in which a right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a normal symbol winning lottery. The “winning game (auxiliary game)” means a gaming state in which the second start port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.
  Note that the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second start opening 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are determined in advance, but even before reaching the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time, When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) wins (wins), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the “winning game (auxiliary game)” is in a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is easy to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is easily established). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.
  The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the first special symbol jackpot lottery (the first special symbol of the first special symbol) that is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start opening 45 This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memory) for performing the variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. In addition, although a maximum of four first reserved memories are stored, the number may be smaller or larger than four.
  The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot lottery (the second special symbol of the second special symbol is stored when the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47). This is for displaying the number of rights (second hold storage) for performing the variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of the second hold storage. Note that the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, but the number may be smaller or larger than four.
  The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and is a right to perform a lottery drawing (normal symbol variation display) of a normal symbol stored when a game ball wins (passes) the normal symbol gate 44. This is for displaying the number of (general hold storage), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of general hold storage. In addition, although the maximum number of ordinary reserved memories is stored, it may be less than or more than four.
  The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by 7-segment LEDs. For example, if a special symbol jackpot lottery is won, “7” is stopped and “−” is stopped if it is lost. It is recommended to repeat “ Note that before the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol, the previous variable display stop result is displayed by turning on the LED. Therefore, when the variable display starts, the variable display is started by turning off the LED. It becomes easy to grasp that it has started.
  A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the effect space 40a, and in the lower part of the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) is provided, which is composed of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). A movable effect member 73 simulating the above is provided. The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are used as the first display device (first display means) and the second display device (second display means) of this embodiment. Equivalent to.
  The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) display various effects as the game progresses. As the effect display, the customer waiting effect that is executed when the special symbol variation display is not performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a that is performed when the special symbol variation display is performed, and the predictive effect by the character. There are notice announcements. It is also possible to replace the effect symbol with effect identification information.
  The second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is a panel drive constituted by a solenoid, a motor, or the like during execution of variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is possible to perform a movement effect by moving with the device 75 (see FIG. 6).
  Specifically, a standby position (first position) located closer to (below) the end of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and closer to the center (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The movement effect is performed by moving in the vertical direction (up and down) with respect to the effect position (second position) located at. The moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the moving effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.
  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) includes three columns of a variable display area 70A such as a left area, a center area, and a right area, and a current display area. A mode display area 70B indicating the effect mode is formed, and the effect symbols 70a displayed in the respective variable display areas are scrolled in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in the present embodiment), so that the effect symbols 70a are displayed in a variable manner. Is done.
  The effect symbol 70a is composed of symbols indicating numbers from “1” to “8”, for example, and the special symbol variable display executed by the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is performed. In response to (synchronized), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner. That is, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the variation display of the special symbol. In addition to the symbols indicating numerals, symbols indicating alphabets such as “A” to “F” may be provided as the effect symbols 70a.
  In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, small hit mode, big hit mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big hit lottery. The big hit mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same design symbols such as “777” or a regular design such as “357”, and the small hit mode (special result mode). Is a combination of productions with regularity such as “357”, and the loss mode is the other mode. The variation display mode of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls left and right, or one that rotates (autorotates) on the spot.
  Further, during the dynamic display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device in accordance with the result of the jackpot lottery. By displaying on 71 (sub liquid crystal), the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit (special game state) is enhanced.
  As shown in FIG. 4B, an icon display area 71A in which a special figure hold icon (to be described later), the change icon, etc., which will be described later, are displayed on the display unit (effective display area) of the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). And an effect display area 71B in which effect display (display of character images, etc.) related to variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is performed side by side. ing.
  The icon display area 71A includes first hold icon display areas 71C for displaying the number of first hold icons corresponding to the number of first special symbol holds (U1) that is the current number of first hold memories, Second hold icon display area 71D for displaying the number of second hold icons corresponding to the number of second special symbol hold number (U2), which is the number of second hold memories, and a special symbol being executed (effect design 70a) ) And a variation icon display area 71E for displaying the variation icon TH corresponding to (related to) the variation display.
  The first hold icon display area 71C is partitioned in the form of a first display part 71C1, a second display part 71C2, a third display part 71C3, and a fourth display part 71C4 from the side close to the variable icon display area 71E. Each display unit 71C1 to 71C4 displays a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1). That is, the number of first hold icons is increased or decreased in correspondence with the increase or decrease of the first special symbol hold number (U1).
  Specifically, the first display unit 71C1 displays a first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold storage in which the first special symbol variable display is executed first, and the second display unit 71C2 displays 2 The first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed in the third, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the third display portion 71C3. A first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory is displayed, and a first hold icon H14 indicating the first hold memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 71C4. Is done.
  The second hold icon display area 71D is partitioned in the form of a first display section 71D1, a second display section 71D2, a third display section 71D3, and a fourth display section 71D4 from the side close to the variable icon display area 71E. Each display unit 71D1 to 71D4 displays a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2). That is, the number of second reserved icons is increased or decreased in accordance with the increase or decrease of the second special symbol hold number (U2).
  Specifically, the first display unit 71D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 71D2 displays 2 The second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold storage in which the second special symbol variation display is executed is displayed, and the second special symbol variation display is executed third in the third display portion 71D3. A second hold icon H23 indicating the second hold memory is displayed, and the fourth display portion 71D4 displays a second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth. Is done.
  The variable icon display area 71E is formed immediately above the pedestal image D1 for clearly distinguishing from the first hold icon display area and the second hold icon display area, and rides on the pedestal image D1, or The variation icon TH is displayed so as to float.
  Specifically, the first hold icon H11 or the second hold icon display area displayed on the first display portion 71C1 of the first hold icon display area 71C in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special symbol (the effect pattern 70a). When the second hold icon H21 displayed on the first display portion 71D1 of 71D moves (shifts), the variation icon TH is displayed, and the variation at the end of the variation display of the special symbol (the production symbol 70a). The icon TH disappears (erases). Note that the variation icon TH may be erased during the variation display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a).
  The effect display area 71B includes a first special symbol variation display area DZ1 for variably displaying a first special symbol (first specific identification information called a so-called fourth symbol), and a second special symbol (a so-called fourth symbol). A second special symbol variation display area DZ2 for variably displaying the second specific identification information called), and a first reserved number display area SH1 for simply displaying the first special symbol retention number (U1) with arithmetic numbers. A second reserved number display area SH2 for simply displaying the second special symbol reserved number (U2) as an arithmetic number is formed.
  In the first special symbol variation display area DZ1, the first special symbol variation display is started in response to the start of the first special symbol variation display, and the first special symbol variation display area DZ1 is stopped in response to the first special symbol variation display stop. The variable display of symbols is stopped. That is, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in accordance with (synchronized with) the variation display of the first special symbol, and the execution state of the variation display of the first special symbol according to the variation state of the first special symbol. Is notified (suggested) to the player.
  In the second special symbol variation display area DZ2, the second special symbol variation display is started in response to the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol variation display region DZ2 is in response to the stop of the variation display of the second special symbol. The variable display of symbols is stopped. That is, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed corresponding to (synchronized with) the variation display of the second special symbol, and the execution state of the variation display of the second special symbol is performed according to the variation state of the second special symbol. Is notified (suggested) to the player.
  The first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) indicate, for example, a “◯” symbol indicating a big hit mode, a “□” symbol indicating a small hit mode, and a loss mode. It is composed of “x” symbols, etc., and “○” symbol, “□” symbol and “x” symbol are displayed in order during the variable display, and when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, ○ "Stopped display with symbol, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit mode," □ "is displayed with a stop, and when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode, "Stopped display with symbol.
  In the embodiment of the present invention, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) performs the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the first special symbol for variable display of the first special symbol. 1 special symbol variation indicator (4th symbol LED) and 2nd special symbol variation indicator (4th symbol LED) for variably displaying the second special symbol can be visually recognized by the player of the glass frame 4 or the game board 5 It may be arranged at a certain position (for example, the decorative frame 40, etc.), and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed there. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variably displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).
  In the first reserved number display area SH1, arithmetic numbers from 0 to 4 indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) are displayed, and the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is increased or decreased. Corresponding arithmetic numbers are changed.
  In the second reserved number display area SH2, the numbers from 0 to 4 indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2) are displayed, and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is increased or decreased. Corresponding arithmetic numbers are changed. Note that the display mode such as color may be changed so that the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2 can be distinguished.
  The movable effect member 73 emits light by the panel illumination device 74 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.) during execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is possible to perform a light effect, and it is possible to perform a movement effect by moving by a panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 6) constituted by a solenoid, a motor, or the like.
  Specifically, a light emission effect is performed by emitting a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.) with a predetermined light emission color according to the progress state of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. In addition, it is positioned near the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and near the center (lower) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A moving effect is performed by moving (up and down) in the vertical direction between the effect position (second position). In addition, you may comprise so that a light emission effect and a movement effect may be performed by operation of the effect button 17. FIG.
  The back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5 is supplied from a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), island facilities, and the like. A game ball storage unit 101 that stores and supplies game balls to the game ball payout device 100, a main control device 110A that incorporates a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and a payout from the main control board 110 Built-in payout control device 120A including a payout control board 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 according to the control command, and effect control board 130 for controlling the effect according to the effect control command from the main control board 110 Game information (game signal) is output to the outside of the effect control device 130A, the power supply device 160A incorporating the power supply board 160 for supplying the power supply voltage to the various control devices, and the gaming machine. Game information output terminal board 90 and the like of the eye are provided.
  There is also provided an open / close door-type cover member 23 that opens and closes the left and right other sides in the left and right directions around a rotation axis set on the left and right sides so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire production control device 130A from the rear. The effect control device 130A includes a volume of effect sound output from the sound output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various illumination devices (frame illumination device 10, panel illumination device). 74) is provided with a changeover switch 22 for switching the adjustment mode related to the luminance adjustment.
  The changeover switch 22 can be operated by a store clerk by opening the cover member 23, but the player is covered by the cover member 32 on the back side of the gaming machine 1. The operation unit is provided at a position where operation by is impossible or difficult. In addition, the entire structure is covered with the cover member 23 so that the game ball dropped from the island facility does not collide or is erroneously operated when checking the gaming machine. Instead, the upper portion may be simply covered with a member such as a bag in consideration of operability. Further, the bag may be formed by a part of the board box of the effect control device 130A.
  Further, the change-over switch 22 may be provided on the front side of the game board mounting frame or on the back side of the glass frame 4 so that the store clerk of the game shop can operate when the glass frame 4 is opened. May be provided at a position that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by a store clerk and / or a player and is more difficult to operate than the cross key 19, for example, at the top or side of the glass frame 4. .
(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in the embodiment of the present invention.
  The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 is a main control one-chip microcomputer provided with a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program and the like, and a main RAM 110c that is a work area during the arithmetic processing (corresponding to volatile storage means). 110 m, and an input port and an output port for main control. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby controlling the controlled device (various solenoids and various displays). Or a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.
  Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. A command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130.
  The input port of the main control board 110 includes a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, a passage detection switch 52a, A magnetic detection sensor 53a, a radio wave detection sensor 54a, a RAM clear switch 55a, a payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.
  The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second start opening / closing solenoid 48b, a special prize opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, and a first special display. The symbol holding display 63, the second special symbol holding display 64, the normal symbol holding display 65, the round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the game information output terminal board 90, the effect control board 130, etc. are connected. Yes. Via the output port, drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, game information notified from the game information output terminal board to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer), etc. Is output.
  The payout control board 120 is a subordinate control board that controls the payout of the game ball and controls the release of the game ball based on the reception of the payout command from the main control board 110. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launching device 26 to control the release of the game ball.
  The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during the calculation processing, an input port and an output port for payout control, and the like. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area, thereby playing the game ball The payout device 100 is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.
  Connected to the input port of the payout control unit 121 are an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101, and the like. The payout motor 100 b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121.
  When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and the payout ball detection switch 100a performs the control. When the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control for paying out the game balls is terminated.
  The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like (not shown). The touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and the ball feed solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122.
  When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 by a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b are allowed to be energized and fired. When it is detected by the detection signal from the volume 15b that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is set so that the firing intensity according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is obtained. The game ball is fired by driving 28b.
  The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft, and the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A by rotating the rotating shaft. . Since the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, the game ball is fired for 1 minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.
  The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls an effect related to the game (performed on the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during the arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main Liquid crystal display), second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., display control unit 140, frame lighting device 10, handle light emitting device 15c, button drive device 17b, and blower device 21 A lamp control unit 150 for controlling the panel lighting device 74, the panel driving device 75, and the like, and an input port and an output port for effect control (subordinate control means, display control means, image display means, effect Equivalent to execution means).
  The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, performs the processing related to the presentation while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, and receives the command received from the main control board 110. In response to detection signals (input signals) from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects ( Output data and commands).
  An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect corresponding to the detection signal is performed.
  Upon receiving a command from the effect control unit 130m, the display control unit 140 performs control to display a predetermined image on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the audio output device 9 is controlled to output predetermined audio or sound.
  The display control unit 140 includes an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, a liquid crystal control unit 141 that includes an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area during the arithmetic processing, and a VDP (Video Display) as an image processor. A VRAM 147 having an image control unit 145 including a processor, a CGROM 146 storing image data and the like, and a frame buffer provided in the image control unit 145 for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. And an audio control unit 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 storing audio data and the like, an input / output port to which the audio output device 9, the changeover switch 22 and the like are connected.
  The overall CPU 142 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the display control program stored in the overall ROM 143, and performs computation processing related to the presentation while using the overall RAM 144 as a work area, thereby receiving the presentation control unit 130m. In response to a production instruction command or the like, the control (data or command output or the like) for causing the image control unit 145 or the audio control unit 148 to execute various productions, or the volume of sound or sound output from the audio output device 9 ( Control for changing the sound volume value) and control for changing the brightness (luminance value) of the image display device and various lamps / LEDs.
  The general ROM 143 is configured by a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands, and an animation of a production pattern. Anime patterns and animation scene information are stored.
  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. In addition, various information such as a duty ratio, which is a luminance parameter of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is included.
  The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various image data are stored, and commands (display list, drawing command, etc.) from the liquid crystal control unit 141 (overall CPU 142) and the CGROM 146 are stored. Based on the image data, drawing data that is a source of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) is generated. The image data includes images (frames) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect symbol image, a background image constituting the background of the effect symbol, and a character This is material data representing individual images such as images and serif images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.
  The CGROM 146 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like. The CGROM 146 compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) or the like including a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read out in units of image data by the image controller 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.
  Further, the CGROM 146 stores palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed. The CGROM 146 may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.
  The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the liquid crystal control unit 141 (the overall CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Has a frame buffer area corresponding to.
  The frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a “drawing frame buffer” and a “display frame buffer” each time drawing is started.
  Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) converts the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 into the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on an instruction (display list) from the liquid crystal control unit 141 (overall CPU 142). The drawing data is read out from the “display frame buffer” in the frame buffer area, and a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and Various images are displayed by outputting to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).
  Note that an operation clock is supplied from the crystal oscillator to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 are divided by dividing the operation clock. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with (sub liquid crystal) is generated and output to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 seconds = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be 60 fps (1/60 seconds = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.
  Further, a general-purpose board 72 that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs it between the image controller 145 and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Is connected. The general-purpose substrate 72 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) that display image data. Absorbs the difference in resolution between connecting a 19 inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) and a 17 inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) .
  The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on the various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image. Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE) and the like from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display on the display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).
  The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp / drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.
  The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the lamp / drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs calculation processing related to the effect while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. Control for causing a controlled device such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform a predetermined performance is performed (data and commands are output) in accordance with the received instruction command.
  The input / output port of the lamp control unit is connected to the frame illumination device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, the blower device 21, and the panel illumination device 74, and the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). Based on the various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the lighting device 10, the lighting device 15 for the frame, the light emitting device 15 c for the handle, and the lighting control for various LEDs of the panel lighting device 74, etc. An operation effect (the above-described movement effect) is performed by performing drive control of a drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the button drive device 17b, the blower device 21, and the panel drive device 75.
  The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operation power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and the main power supply is used for the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, It is supplied to an effect control board 130 and various electronic components (corresponding to power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not a power interruption (power failure) has occurred, and outputs a power interruption detection signal 162 to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power interruption (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure).
  In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state for supplying main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch (corresponding to the state switching means) is provided so that it can be operated by a store clerk of the game store. When the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started. Even if the power switch is OFF, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.
  The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1 and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, the main CPU 110a whose power interruption detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power interruption detection signal is at a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stop state.
  The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized. When a power interruption (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the game control state is restored to the state before the power cut (power failure) after recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.
(Description of gaming state)
Next, the gaming state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are “low probability gaming state” and “high probability gaming state” as the states related to the special symbol jackpot lottery, and “non-short-time gaming state” as the state relating to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47. And “short-time gaming state”. The states related to the jackpot lottery (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) and the states relating to the movable member 48 (non-short-time gaming state, short-time gaming state) can be associated with each other or can be made independent. . That means
(1) In the case of “low probability gaming state” and “short-time gaming state” (first specific gaming state),
(2) In the case of “low probability gaming state” and “non-temporary gaming state” (normal gaming state),
(3) In the case of “high probability gaming state” and “time saving gaming state” (second specific gaming state),
(4) It is possible to provide a “high probability gaming state” and a “non-temporary gaming state” (third specific gaming state).
Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is a “low probability gaming state” and is set to a “non-short-time gaming state”. Will be referred to as the “normal gaming state”.
  In the present embodiment, the “low probability gaming state” means that the winning probability of jackpot in the jackpot lottery of special symbols performed on the condition that a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 For example, it means a gaming state set as low as 1/2. On the other hand, the “high probability gaming state” refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared to the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set to be, for example, 1 / 59.8. . Therefore, in the “high probability gaming state”, it is easier to win a jackpot than in the “low probability gaming state”. Note that the low probability gaming state is changed to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game described later is finished.
  In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability gaming state is referred to as “probability jackpot”. The jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called “ordinary jackpot”.
  In the present embodiment, “non-short-time gaming state” means the average variation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. Is a game state that is set longer than the “short-time game state” and that the opening time of the second start port 47 when winning in the win is easily set. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed, and the normal symbol display unit 62 displays a variation of the normal symbol. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. If the lottery result is a win, the second start port 47 is controlled to be opened for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the normal symbol stop display.
  On the other hand, the “short-time gaming state” means that the average variation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the ordinary gate 44 is used. A gaming state that is set shorter than the “non-short-time gaming state” and is set to be longer than the “non-short-time gaming state”, for example, the opening time of the second start port 47 when winning in the win is 2.5 seconds, for example. Say. Further, in the “non-short-time gaming state”, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery is set to be low, for example, 1/128, and in the “short-time gaming state”, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example, 127. / 128 is set high. Therefore, in the “short-time gaming state”, when the game ball passes through the normal gate 44 than in the “non-short-time gaming state”, the second start port 47 is more easily controlled to the open mode. Thus, in the “short-time gaming state”, the player can advantageously advance the game without consuming the game ball.
  In the embodiment, the “short time gaming state” is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second start opening 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than the “non-short time gaming state”. Has been. However, the “short-time gaming state” may be set so that only one of the normal symbol variation time, the opening time of the second start opening 47, and the normal symbol lottery winning probability is advantageous. Further, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be, for example, 0/128.
  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.
(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a jackpot determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to generate a jackpot. Specifically, FIG. 7A shows a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol referred to in a jackpot determination (lottery) executed based on a winning (winning) of a game ball to the first start opening 45. FIG. 7B is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol which is referred to in the jackpot determination (jackpot lottery) executed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. is there. The big hit probability is the same in the tables of FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B, but no big hit occurs in the table of FIG. 7B.
  As shown in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b), the jackpot determination table includes a probability game state and when a game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45 or the second start port 47. The acquired jackpot determination random number value (determination information) is associated with the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery).
  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 7A or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 7B, and the current probability gaming state is acquired. Based on the jackpot determination random number value, it is determined whether the jackpot is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lost”.
  For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 7A, in the low probability gaming state, the two jackpot determination random numbers “7” and “8” are “jackpot”. In the high probability gaming state, ten jackpot determination random numbers from “7” to “16” are determined to be “jackpot”. In the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state, the four jackpot determination random numbers “50”, “100”, “150”, and “200” are determined as “small hits”.
  In the low probability gaming state, the jackpot determination random number other than “7”, “8”, “50”, “100”, “150”, “200” is determined as “lost”, and the high probability When in the gaming state, the jackpot determination random numbers other than “7” to “16”, “50”, “100”, “150”, and “200” are determined to be “lost”. It should be noted that “0” must be set to “lost” because there is a possibility that the jackpot will be hit by combining the initialization of the random number for jackpot determination due to intentional power interruption and the so-called hanging board. Yes.
  Therefore, since the random number range of the jackpot determination random number value is 0 to 598, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/299, and it is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability gaming state. Probability increases by a factor of 5 to 1 / 59.8. In addition, the probability determined to be a big hit is not limited to five times, and may be set to an arbitrary value such as three times or ten times.
(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determination table that is referred to when a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery) is determined. Specifically, FIG. 8A is a special symbol determination table for jackpots that is referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined that the jackpot (winning), FIG. Is a special symbol determination table for small hits that is referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined that it is a small winning (winning), FIG. 8 (c) is determined to be lost (winning) It is a special symbol determination table for losing which is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is done.
  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), in the special symbol determination table for jackpots, the type of start opening (type of special symbol display) that the game ball has won (entered), the first start opening 45 or the first 2 A special symbol determination random number value (determination information) acquired when a game ball wins (wins) at the start opening 47, a special symbol type (type), and a special symbol type (type) The stop special symbol data is associated with an effect symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the special symbol.
  Special symbols A and B associated with the first starting port 45 are special symbols that generate a 16-round probability variable jackpot game, and special symbols C to E are special symbols that generate a 13-round probability variable jackpot game. The special symbol F is a special symbol that generates a 13-round normal jackpot game, and the special symbol G is a special symbol that generates a probabilistic jackpot of 2 rounds.
  The special symbols a to d associated with the second starting port 47 are special symbols that generate a 16-round probability variation jackpot game, and the jackpot special symbol e is a special symbol that generates a 16-round normal jackpot. It has become.
  In addition, after the probability variation big hit game generated by the special symbols A to E, G, and a to d ends, the second specific gaming state (so-called probability variation gaming state) in which the number of short-time games and the number of high-probability games are set to 10,000 times. ), And after the end of the normal jackpot game generated by the special symbols G and e, the first specific game state (so-called time-reduced game state) in which the number of time reductions is set to 100 and the high probability game number is set to 0. ).
  As shown in FIG. 8 (b), the special symbol determination table for small hits includes the type of start opening (type of special symbol display) that the game ball has won (entered) and the first start opening 45. Random value for determining a special symbol obtained when a game ball wins (enters), a special symbol type (type), stop special symbol data indicating the special symbol type, and information indicating the special symbol type As shown, the effect designating command transmitted to the effect control board 130 is associated.
  The special symbols H and I associated with the first start opening 45 are special symbols for generating a small hit game in which the number of rounds is not set but the opening / closing mode of the big winning special symbol G and the big winning opening 50 is the same. It has become. Unlike the big hit game, the game state is not changed before and after the small hit game.
  As shown in FIG. 8 (c), in the special symbol determination table for losing, the type of the starting port (special symbol display type) that the game ball has won (entered), the first starting port 45 or the first symbol 2 Random value for determining a special symbol acquired when a game ball is won (entered) at the starting port 47, a special symbol type (class), stop special symbol data indicating the special symbol type, and a special symbol An effect designating command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the event is associated.
  The special symbol J associated with the first start port 45 and the special symbol j associated with the second start port 47 are special symbols that do not generate either a big hit game or a small hit game. In the embodiment of the present invention, one special lose symbol is associated with each of the first start port 45 and the second start port 47, but a plurality of special lose symbols may be associated with each other.
  The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8, determines the special symbol type (stop special symbol data) based on the type of the start port, the special symbol determination random number, and the like. Based on the symbol type (stop special symbol data), an effect symbol designation command is determined as information indicating the special symbol type.
  Here, the effect designating command is composed of 2-byte data, and 1-byte MODE data for identifying the control command classification and 1-byte DATA indicating the contents of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. The same applies to a variation pattern designation command described later.
  Note that the type of jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game end are determined according to the type of special symbol (stop symbol data), but only the type of jackpot game may be determined. Only the game state after the end of the jackpot game may be determined.
(Variation pattern determination table for special symbols)
9 and 10 are diagrams showing a variation pattern determination table for a special symbol which is referred to when special symbol variation display is performed. Specifically, FIG. 9 shows a variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol that is referred to when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first start opening 45. FIG. 10 is a variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol that is referred to when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. .
  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the variation pattern determination table for special symbols includes a determination result of jackpot determination (lottery), a special symbol type (stop symbol data), a first start port 45 or a second symbol. The reach determination random value (determination information) acquired when the game ball wins (enters) the start opening 47, the first special symbol hold number (U1) that is the current number of the first hold memory, or the current Acquired when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 and the number of reserved balls indicating the second special symbol holding number (U2), which is the number of the second reserved memory. Special symbol variation pattern determination random number value (determination information), special symbol variation pattern (number), special symbol variation time, and information indicating the special symbol variation pattern type are transmitted to the effect control board 130. Corresponding to fluctuation pattern designation command It has been.
  Therefore, it can be said that the “special symbol variation pattern” can specify at least the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery) and the special symbol variation time. In addition, when the jackpot determination (lottery) determination result is lost, the reach determination random number value is referred to. However, in the case of a big hit, the reach is generated except in special cases, so the reach determination random number value is referred to. It is configured not to. In addition, the random number range for reach determination and the random number value for determining the special figure variation pattern are set to 100 (0 to 99).
  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for the special symbol shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, when the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol increases, the variation pattern 1 ( The fluctuation pattern 2 (shortening fluctuation: fluctuation time 3 seconds) is more easily determined than the normal fluctuation: fluctuation time 12 seconds. Further, in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, when the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol increases, the variation pattern 4 (normal variation: variation time 10 seconds) than the variation pattern 3 (normal reach: variation time 20 seconds). ) Is easily determined.
  Although the maximum number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) for a special symbol may be stored as “4”, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved balls for the special symbol. Therefore, “4” is not set as the number of reserved balls.
  The main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table for special symbols shown in FIG. 9 or FIG. 10, and determines the result of jackpot determination (lottery), special symbol type (stop symbol data), reach determination random value, special symbol The special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation time are determined based on the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) and the special diagram variation pattern determination random number. Then, based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, a special symbol variation pattern designation command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  Here, the special pattern variation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the contents (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is “E3H”, the variation pattern designation command for the special symbol of the first special symbol display 60 corresponding to the winning of the game ball at the first start opening 45 is shown. "E4H" indicates a variation pattern designation command for a special symbol on the second special symbol display 61 corresponding to the winning of a game ball at the second starting port 47.
  In addition, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the effect content related to the change display of the effect symbol 70a is determined based on the change pattern (variation pattern designation command) of the special symbol. In the rightmost column of the special pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the content of the effect such as the effect symbol 70a (variation effect pattern) is described as a reference.
  Here, as the production contents, “normal fluctuation” and “shortening fluctuation” mean that a plurality of production symbols 70a fluctuate at high speed and stop without reaching, The shortening variation differs from the shortening variation in that the shortening variation is completed in a shorter variation time than the normal variation.
  In addition, “reach” is a variation mode that gives a player a sense of expectation of jackpot, such that a part of the combination of effect symbols 70a that informs the jackpot is temporarily stopped and other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. Means. For example, when a combination of a three-digit effect symbol 70a of “777” is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot (a jackpot result mode), two effect symbols 70a are “ 7 "means that the temporary stop is performed, and the remaining effect symbol 70a is changing in the central region.
  Note that the “temporary stop” means that the effect design 70a is slightly shaken or the effect design 70a is deformed to a small extent, so that it appears to the player as if the effect design 70a is stopped (completely stopped). Not).
  In addition, “normal reach” means a reach with low expectation of jackpot where two effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the left region and right region, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the central region. In the present embodiment, it is possible not to make a big hit by “normal reach” but to make a big hit by “normal reach”.
  “SP reach” means a super reach with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than a normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which the effect symbol 70a in the central area that is not temporarily stopped changes specially or a special character is displayed.
“SPSP reach” means a special reach that is performed after super reach and has a higher expectation of jackpot than super reach.
In addition, the “full rotation reach” means a mode in which the combination of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is all in a low speed state, and in the present embodiment, only when winning in the jackpot lottery. Means reach to be performed.
  The variation pattern determination tables for special symbols shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 are referred to regardless of the gaming state. However, a variation pattern determination table having different variation pattern selection modes for each of the plurality of gaming states is provided. The variation pattern determination table to be referred to may be changed according to the gaming state at that time.
(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 11 shows the determination information (result of the special symbol variation display) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 before the special symbol variation display is performed. It is a figure which shows the prior determination table referred when making a prior determination.
  As shown in FIG. 11, the pre-determination table includes the type of start port, the determination result of jackpot determination (lottery), the type of special symbol (stop symbol data), the first start port 45 or the second start port. The random number for reach determination (determination information) acquired when a game ball enters 47, and the special figure fluctuation acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 A random number value for pattern determination (determination information) is associated with a start opening winning designation command indicating a planned variation pattern (number).
  Here, the jackpot determination random number acquired at the time of winning (winning) a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “lost”. It is possible to determine in advance, and it is possible to determine in advance the type of special game and the presence or absence of transition to a high-probability game state by using a special symbol determining random number.
  Furthermore, because the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random number value can determine the contents of the production (whether the reach has occurred, the type of reach), etc. in advance, the start winning information (start opening winning designation command) In (DATA), it is possible to determine information on the type of jackpot and the contents of the effect (planned variation pattern).
  The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 11, based on the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value. Is determined. Then, based on the determined start winning information, a start opening winning designation command for notifying the result of jackpot determination, the type of jackpot, the planned variation pattern, etc. is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  The start opening prize designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is “E6H”, a start port winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 45 is shown, and when the MODE data is “E7H”, the second start is performed. A start opening winning designation command corresponding to the winning of a game ball in the opening 47 is shown.
  The prior determination table shown in FIG. 11 is similar to the variation pattern determination table for special symbols shown in FIGS. 9 and 10. However, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 11 is used when a game ball is won (entered) in the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, whereas the special symbol variation shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 is used. The pattern determination table is different in that it is used at the start of special symbol fluctuation. Further, it is different whether or not “the number of reserved balls” is referred to.
  For this reason, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 11, the type of jackpot and the type of variation pattern can be determined, but the type of start port is “first start port” and the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery) is If it is “losing” and the reach determination random number value is “0 to 89”, the type of the starting port is “second starting port” and the determination result of the big hit determination (lottery) is “losing” and the reach When the determination random number value is “0 to 97”, the planned variation pattern is the variation pattern 1 to 4, but whether the planned variation pattern is “normal variation”, “shortened variation”, or “normal reach”. Indistinguishable.
  Note that the special symbol advance determination table shown in FIG. 11 is referred to regardless of the gaming state at that time, but a prior determination table having a different variation pattern selection mode is provided for each of the plurality of gaming states. You may make it change the prior determination table referred according to a game state.
(Game control table)
FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a jackpot game control table for determining the progress of the jackpot game (special game state) when the jackpot winning is determined as a result of the jackpot determination (lottery). (B) is a figure which shows the small hit game control table for determining the progress of a small hit game (special game state), when it becomes a big win winning as a determination result of big hit determination (lottery).
  12 (a) and 12 (b), the jackpot game control table and the jackpot game control table include a stop symbol data corresponding to a special symbol, an opening time of a special game state, and a big prize opening. The numbers of the special winning opening / closing control table for determining 50 open / close modes are associated with the ending time of the special game state.
  When the main CPU 110a generates a jackpot game, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 12 (a), and determines the opening time, the big prize opening / closing control table, and the ending time based on the stop symbol data. Become. Since the number of rounds in the jackpot game is set (determined) by determining the type of the big prize opening / closing table, the rightmost column in FIG. The effect contents during the game, the type of the jackpot game, the effect state after the jackpot game, and the like are supplementarily described.
  Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the small hit game control table shown in FIG. 12 (b) when generating the small hit game, and based on the stop symbol data, determines the opening time, the big prize opening / closing control table, and the ending time. Will be determined. In the rightmost column of FIG. 12B, the effect state after the small hit game is supplementarily described.
(Big prize opening / closing control table)
FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a big prize opening / closing control table that is referred to when a special game state (a big win game or a small win game) occurs. As shown in FIG. 13, the special prize opening / closing control table includes a table number (TBL.No), a round number indicating the number of rounds, and a special operation number indicating the number of times the special prize opening 50 is opened during one round. (K), the opening time of the special winning opening 50, and the closing time (interval time) for closing the special winning opening 50 are associated with each opening of the special winning opening 50.
  The main CPU 110a specifies the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the special winning opening 50 with reference to the special winning opening / closing control table shown in FIG. 13, and the first to twelfth special winning opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 01). To 12), the first to twelfth jackpot games are executed, and the small hit game is executed based on the thirteenth prize winning opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 13).
  According to the first grand prize opening opening / closing table (TBL.No = 01), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the gaming area is 29 per round from 1 to 13 rounds. The first big hit game is executed, which is released to 5 seconds and from 14 to 16 rounds to 0.18 seconds per round. In addition, although it shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, since the opening time of the big prize opening 50 is extremely short from the 14th round to the 16th round, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, so the first jackpot game is It can be said that this is a 13-round probabilistic jackpot game.
  According to the second big prize opening opening / closing table (TBL.No = 02), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the big prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is 29 per round from 1 round to 7 rounds. The second jackpot game is executed, which is released until 5 seconds and from 8 to 16 rounds until 0.18 seconds per round. In addition, although it shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, since the opening time of the big prize opening 50 is extremely short from the 8th round to the 16th round, it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, It can be said that it is a 7-round probable big hit game.
  The first jackpot game and the second jackpot game have the same open / close mode of the seven round jackpot 50, so it is difficult to grasp which jackpot game is halfway. . Therefore, when the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game is generated, which jackpot game is not notified, the type of jackpot game during the closing period (time) of the big winning opening 50 between the seventh round and the eighth round For example, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) executes a promotion effect (rank-up effect) for directing whether or not the player is promoted to a jackpot game advantageous to the player.
  In the promotion effect executed during the first jackpot game (promotion effect during the round), it is finally notified that the game is a jackpot game of 13 rounds, proceeds after the 8th round, and is executed during the second jackpot game. In the promotion effect to be performed, a notification indicating that the game is finally a big hit game of 7 rounds is performed, and the process proceeds to 8 rounds and after. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion effect is enhanced. A specific example of the promotion effect will be described later.
  According to the third big prize opening opening / closing table (TBL.No = 03), the opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the big winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is changed from 29.degree. A third jackpot game is executed that opens up to 5 seconds. It should be noted that after the jackpot game is over, the game proceeds to the probability variation game state, and it is easy to obtain a prize ball because the opening time of the big winning opening is long from the first round to the thirteenth round. It can be said that it is a 13-round probable big hit game.
  According to the fourth grand prize opening opening / closing table (TBL.No = 04), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the gaming area is 29 per round from 1 round to 8 rounds. A fourth big hit game is executed in which the game is released until 5 seconds, and from 9 to 13 rounds, it is released up to 0.18 seconds per round. In addition, although it shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short from the ninth round to the thirteenth round, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball. It can be said that it is an eight-round probable big hit game.
  According to the fifth grand prize opening opening / closing table (TBL.No = 05), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is 29 per round from 1 round to 4 rounds. A fifth big hit game is executed in which the game is released until 5 seconds and is opened up to 0.18 seconds per round from 5 to 13 rounds. In addition, although it shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short from the fifth round to the thirteenth round, it is difficult to acquire a prize ball. It can be said that it is a 4 round probable big hit game.
  In addition, the third jackpot game, the fourth jackpot game, and the fifth jackpot game have the same opening mode of the big winning opening 50 up to four rounds, so it is difficult to grasp which jackpot game is halfway. It is like that. In addition, since the third jackpot game and the fourth jackpot game have the same opening mode of the big winning opening 50 up to eight rounds, it is difficult to grasp which jackpot game is halfway. .
  Therefore, when the third jackpot game, the fourth jackpot game and the fifth jackpot game are generated, which jackpot game is not notified, the third jackpot game and the fourth jackpot game are between the fourth round and the fifth round. During the closing period of the grand prize opening and the closing period of the big winning opening between the 8th and 9th rounds, and during the closing period of the big winning opening between the 4th and 5th rounds in the fifth jackpot game, For example, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) executes a continuation effect (rank-up effect) for effecting whether or not an acquirable round game continues.
  In the continuation effect executed during the third jackpot game, a notification indicating that the round game in which the winning ball can be obtained at both times is continued is performed, and the process proceeds to the next round and is executed during the fourth jackpot game. In the continuation effect, a notification is made that the round game in which the first prize ball can be acquired will be continued and the next round will proceed, but the second round game in which the prize ball can be acquired ends. In the continuation effect executed during the fifth big hit game, a notification indicating that the round game capable of acquiring a prize ball is completed is performed and the next and subsequent rounds are performed. Proceed to By doing in this way, the player's expectation with respect to a continuous production is raised. A specific example of the continuation effect will be described later.
  According to the sixth grand prize opening opening / closing table (TBL.No = 06), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is 29 per round from 1 round to 4 rounds. A sixth big hit game is executed in which the game is released until 5 seconds and is opened up to 0.18 seconds per round from 5 to 13 rounds. In addition, after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to a normal game state, and from the fifth round to the thirteenth round, the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball. It can be said that it is a four-round regular jackpot game.
  According to the seventh grand prize opening opening / closing table (TBL.No = 07), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is set to 0. 0 per round from one round to two rounds. A seventh jackpot game that is released until 18 seconds is executed. In addition, after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to the probability variation gaming state. However, from the first round to the second round, since the opening time of the big prize opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the seventh jackpot game is It can be said that the game is essentially a suddenly promising big hit game with zero rounds.
  According to the eighth grand prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 08), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is changed from 29.degree. The 8th big hit game that is released until 5 seconds is executed. In addition, after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to the probability variation gaming state, and it is easy to acquire a prize ball because the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is long from the first round to the 16th round. It can be said that it is a 16-round probable big hit game.
  According to the ninth grand prize opening opening / closing table (TBL.No = 09), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is changed from 29.degree. The ninth big hit game is executed in which the game is opened for 5 seconds and is opened up to 0.18 seconds per round from the 14th round to the 16th round. In addition, although it shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short from the 14th round to the 16th round, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball. It can be said that this is a 13-round probabilistic jackpot game.
  According to the tenth grand prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 10), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is changed from 29.degree. A ninth jackpot game is executed in which the game is opened up to 5 seconds and from 9 rounds to 16 rounds, it is opened up to 0.18 seconds per round. In addition, although it shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short from the 9th round to the 16th round, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball. It can be said that it is an eight-round probable big hit game.
  According to the eleventh prize winning opening / closing table (TBL.No = 11), the opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is changed from 29.degree. An eleventh jackpot game is executed in which the game is released for 5 seconds and is opened for 0.18 seconds per round from 5 to 16 rounds. In addition, although it shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball from the 5th round to the 16th round, It can be said that it is a 4 round probable big hit game.
  According to the twelfth prize winning opening / closing table (TBL.No = 12), the opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is changed from 29.degree. A twelfth jackpot game is executed in which the game is released for 5 seconds and is opened for 0.18 seconds per round from 5 to 16 rounds. It should be noted that after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the normal floating game state, and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball because the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short from the fifth round to the sixteenth round. Therefore, it can be said that it is a four-round normal jackpot game.
  According to the thirteenth prize winning opening / closing table (TBL.No = 13), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the big winning prize opening 50 on the right side of the gaming area twice for 0.18 seconds. Is executed. Although the gaming state does not change before and after the small hit game, the open state of the big winning opening 50 is the same as that of the seventh big hit game, so it can be said that the small hit game simulates a two round jackpot game. .
  In addition, since the opening mode of the big winning opening 50 is the same in the seventh big hit game and the small hit game, it is difficult to grasp which one has occurred. Therefore, after the seventh big hit game and the small hit game are finished, a probability variation latent effect that expects to be in a probability fluctuation state is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) for a predetermined period (a predetermined number of fluctuation displays). Until the end lottery is won, until the end lottery is won, a predetermined number of variable displays are executed, and then the end lottery is won, etc.). By doing in this way, the player's expectation that it may have shifted to the probability variation state is raised.
  Here, in the first jackpot game to the twelfth jackpot game described above, when a specified number (for example, nine) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, the opening time has not elapsed. Even so, the grand prize opening 50 is closed and the game of one round is finished. In addition, in the small hit game, when a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the second opening time of the big winning opening 50 elapses, the opening time has not passed. Also, the big prize opening 50 is closed and the small hit game is ended.
(Game state setting table)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a game state setting table for setting (determining) the game state after the end of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 14, in the game state setting table, the type of start opening that triggered the execution of the variable display that generated the jackpot game, the stop symbol data of the special symbol, the short-time game state, and the number of short-time games (J), the probability game state, and the high probability game count (X) are associated with each other.
  The main CPU 110a refers to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 14, and at the end of the jackpot, based on the type of start opening and the stop symbol data of the special symbol, the short-time gaming state, the number of short-time games (J), the probability gaming state, and the high The probability game number (X) is determined. Note that when the low probability game state is determined as the probability game state, the high probability game count (X) is not determined.
  The game state setting table shown in FIG. 14 in the present embodiment is characterized in that the number of short-time games (J) and the number of high-probability games (X) in the case of stop symbol data 10-13 and the case of stop symbol data 20-22. And are not set infinitely, but are set at 10,000 times. However, in the high-probability gaming state, the probability of winning a jackpot is very high before 10,000 jackpot determinations (lottery) are performed, so the short-time gaming state and the high until the jackpot determination (lottery) is determined to be a jackpot in practice. It can be said that the probability game state continues.
(Normal hit judgment table for symbols)
FIG. 15A is a normal symbol hit determination table that is referred to in the hit determination (lottery) executed based on the passage (incoming ball) of the game ball to the normal gate 44. As shown in FIG. 15A, the hit determination table includes presence / absence of a short-time gaming state, a hit determination random number value acquired when a game ball passes through the general gate 44, and a hit determination random number value. These determination results are associated with each other.
  For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 15 (a), when it is in the non-short game state, it is determined that one hit determination random number value of “127” is win, and when it is in the short time game state, “1” ”To“ 127 ”, 127 hit determination random number values are determined to be hits. Therefore, the probability of being determined to be winning in the non-short game state is 1/128, and the probability of being determined to be winning in the time-saving gaming state is 127/128.
(Stop symbol determination table for normal symbols)
FIG. 15B is a normal symbol stop symbol determination table for determining a normal symbol stop symbol corresponding to the determination result of the winning determination (lottery). As shown in FIG. 15 (b), the stop symbol determination table includes the presence / absence of a short-time gaming state, a hit determination result indicating the result of a win determination (lottery), and when the game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 44. The winning symbol determination value for determining the acquired normal symbol determination random value, the normal symbol type (classification) that is the determination result, the stopped normal symbol data indicating the normal symbol type, and the normal symbol type As the information to be shown, a common figure designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 is associated.
  The normal symbol 0 is a normal symbol of losing that does not generate an auxiliary game that opens the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 in a predetermined manner, and the normal symbols 1 to 3 are the movable member 48 of the second start port 47. Is a normal symbol for generating an auxiliary game that opens the game in a predetermined manner, and the normal symbols 1 to 3 are set so that the opening manner of the second start port 47 is different.
(Normal pattern change pattern determination table)
FIG. 15C is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for a normal symbol that is referred to when a variation display of a normal symbol is performed. As shown in FIG. 15 (c), the variation pattern determination table for normal symbols includes a gaming state, a determination result of a win determination (lottery), a random number for determining a normal variation pattern, and a variation time of a normal symbol. Are associated with a normal pattern variation designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the variation pattern of the normal symbol.
  Therefore, it can be said that at least the determination result of the hit determination (lottery) and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol can be specified. In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15C, the normal symbol variation time is set to be shorter in the short-time game state than in the non-short-time game state. In the state, the second start port 47 is opened with a short span. Note that the normal symbol variation time may be the same in the non-short game state and the short-time game state.
(Second starting port opening mode determination table)
FIG. 15D is a diagram showing an opening mode determination table for the second starting port that is referred to when an auxiliary game occurs and the second starting port 47 is opened. As shown in FIG. 15 (d), in the opening mode determination table of the second starting port, the stop normal data, the maximum number of times of opening the second starting port 47, the opening time of the winning game (auxiliary game), The first opening time and closing time of the second start port 47 are associated with the second opening time and closing time.
  The stop symbol data 01 (ordinary symbol 1) converts the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 into an open state only once (0.2 seconds) (performs short open of the second start port 47). It is a normal symbol that generates a game, and the stop symbol data 02 (normal symbol 2) converts the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 into an open state twice (0.2 seconds and 3 seconds). It is a normal symbol that generates the second auxiliary game (performs the long opening of the second starting port 47), and the stop symbol data 03 (normal symbol 3) causes the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 to move twice. It is a normal symbol that generates a third auxiliary game that is converted to an open state (long opening of the second start port) over (2.5 seconds and 2.5 seconds).
(Various storage areas)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 16A shows a special symbol holding storage area in which various information is stored when a game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45 and / or the second start port 47. FIG. 16B is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit in the special symbol storage area, and FIG. 16C shows various information when the game ball passes through the general gate 44. Is a normal symbol holding storage area, and FIG. 16D is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area.
  As shown in FIG. 16A, the special symbol reserved storage area is divided into a first special symbol reserved storage area, a second special symbol reserved storage area, and a special symbol relevant storage area. The reserved storage unit and the second special symbol reserved storage area are divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the special symbol related storage area is configured by the 0th storage unit.
  The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol storage area are the first display section 71C1 and the second display section 71C2 of the first reservation icon display area 71C. , Corresponding to the third display unit 71C3 and the fourth display unit 71C4, respectively. Further, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol storage area are the first display section 71D1, the second display section 71D2, and the second display section 71D2. This corresponds to the third display unit 71D3 and the fourth display unit 71D4, respectively. Further, the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area corresponds to the variation icon display area 71E.
  As shown in FIG. 16B, each storage unit stores a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value, and a special symbol determination random number storage for storing a special symbol determination random value. The area is divided into a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value and a special figure variation pattern determining random number storage area for storing a special figure variation pattern determining random value.
  Then, when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start opening 45, a special figure determination is made to the storage unit with the smallest number among the storage units in which no random number is stored in the first special symbol storage area. Information (a jackpot determination random value, a special symbol determination random value, a reach determination random value, a special symbol variation pattern determination random value) is stored. In addition, when a game ball enters the second start port 47, the special figure determination information (in the second special symbol holding storage area, the storage unit with the smallest number among the storage units in which no random number is stored) A jackpot determination random number value, a special symbol determination random value, a reach determination random value, and a special symbol variation pattern determination random value) are stored.
  The 0th storage part of the special symbol storage area is stored in the first storage part of the storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area that satisfies the start condition of the variable symbol display. By shifting the stored special figure determination information, the special figure determination information related to the fluctuation display of the current special symbol is stored.
  As shown in FIG. 16C, the normal symbol holding storage area is divided from the 0th storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and as shown in FIG. A random number storage area for hit determination for storing numerical values, a random number storage area for normal symbol determination for storing random numbers for determining normal symbols, and a normal pattern change for storing random numbers for determining normal pattern variation patterns It is divided into a random number storage area for pattern determination.
  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart.
(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 110.
  When a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.
  First, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process described later in step S10. In this process, the main CPU 110a reads a startup program from the main ROM 110b in response to power-on and initializes a flag stored in the main RAM 110c. The details will be described later.
  In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs processing for updating the reach determination random value and the special symbol determination random value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S30, the initial value for jackpot determination An initial value random value update process is performed to update the random value, the initial value random value for determining the special symbol, the initial value random value for determining the hit, and the initial value random value for determining the normal symbol.
  Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S40. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power interruption detection signal is input from the power interruption detection circuit of the power supply substrate 160. If the power interruption detection signal is not input (step S40: No), the process proceeds to step S20. If the power interruption detection signal is input (step S40: Yes), the process proceeds to step S41.
  In step S41, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting the timer interrupt, and in step S42, the main CPU 110a notifies the payout control board 120 that the power-off process has been started. Process to send.
  Subsequently, in step S43, the main CPU 110a performs a process of receiving an unpaid-out payout number designation command transmitted from the payout control board 120 that has received the power-off notification command. The unpaid-out payout number designation command is a command indicating the remaining payout number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c of the payout control board 120 when a power-off notification command is received.
  In step S44, the main CPU 110a saves (stores) the remaining payout number specified by the unpaid out payout number designation command received from the payout control board 120 in the payout counter stored in the main RAM 110c, and outputs the output in step S45. Processing to clear the port, processing to calculate the checksum of the main RAM 110c and store it in a predetermined storage area in step S46, processing to turn on the backup flag to be referred to at the time of recovery from power failure in step S47 In step S48, a process for prohibiting the RAM access is performed, and the process waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.
(Initialization of main control board)
The initialization process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing initialization processing in the main control board.
  In step S10-1, the main CPU 110a waits for 1000 ms so that activation of the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 is completed earlier, and permits access to the main RAM 110c in step S10-2. .
  Next, in step S10-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 55a is ON. If the RAM clear switch 55a is not turned on (S10-3: No), the process proceeds to step S10-4, and if the RAM clear switch 55a is turned on (S10-3: Yes). Then, the process proceeds to step S10-11.
  In step S10-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the backup flag stored in the main RAM 110c is ON. If the backup flag is ON (S10-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-5. If the backup flag is not ON (S10-4: No), the process proceeds to step S10-11.
  In step S10-5, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c. In step S10-6, the main CPU 110a compares the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c with the calculated checksum to determine whether the checksum is normal. Judgment is made. If the checksum is normal (S10-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-7. If the checksum is not normal (S10-6: No), the control state before power-off is normally restored. The processing moves to step S10-11 because it cannot be restored.
  In step S10-7, the main CPU 110a clears the backup flag and checksum stored in the main RAM 110c. In step S10-8, the main CPU 110a performs setting processing for the main RAM 110c when power is restored. By performing this setting process, the game progress state (control state) is restored (recovered) to the state before power-off, so the game can be resumed from the state before power-off (in the control state return means) Equivalent).
  In step S10-9, the main CPU 110a performs a process of transmitting a power recovery designation command. Specifically, in step S10-8, the restored current gaming state is referred to, and a power restoration designation command corresponding to the current gaming state (a power restoration designation command for waiting for a customer, which will be described later, for special figure changing). Any one of a power recovery designation command, a jackpot / medium power restoration designation command, and a jackpot / medium power restoration designation command) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Thereby, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current game state.
  In step S10-10, the main CPU 110a performs processing for transmitting a unique information signal. Specifically, a manufacturer code for identifying the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 as a unique information signal, a model code for identifying the model of the gaming machine 1, and a predetermined storage unit of the main control one-chip microcomputer 110m are stored. The 39-byte unique information including the unique ID is output as serial data from the game information output terminal board 90 for 3 seconds.
  In step S10-11, the main CPU 110a clears the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the stack area. In step S10-12, the main CPU 110a performs setting processing for the main RAM 110c when the power is turned on. By performing this setting process, the progress state (control state) of the game is initialized, so that it is possible to play a game from the state when the gaming machine 1 is shipped.
  In step S10-13, the main CPU 110a performs processing for transmitting a power-on designation command. Specifically, a power-on designation command indicating that the main RAM 110c has been cleared (initialized) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp that the game progress state (control state) has been initialized.
  In step S10-14, the main CPU 110a performs processing for transmitting a unique information signal. Specifically, a manufacturer code for identifying the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 as a unique information signal, a model code for identifying the model of the gaming machine 1, and a predetermined storage unit of the main control one-chip microcomputer 110m are stored. The 39-byte unique information including the unique ID is output as serial data from the game information output terminal board 90 for 3 seconds.
  Note that different unique information signals may be transmitted in step S10-10 and step S10-14. In that case, at least one of a manufacturer code, a model code, and a unique ID is transmitted in step S10-10. In step S10-14, the manufacturer code, model code, and unique ID may all be transmitted.
  Subsequently, the main CPU 110a refers to the payout counter stored in the main RAM 110c in step S10-15, and in step S10-16, issues an initial payout number designation command corresponding to the remaining payout number specified by the payout counter. Processing to transmit to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 can grasp (specify) the remaining payout number of game balls that have been paid out at the time of power interruption, and can appropriately pay out the remaining payout number from the game ball payout device 100. Become.
  The main CPU 110a performs CTC (counter timer circuit) activation processing in step S10-17, performs random number circuit activation processing in step S10-18, and permits an interrupt in step S10-19. When this process ends, the current initialization process ends.
(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110. A clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110, thereby executing a timer interrupt process described below.
  First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, a special game timer counter such as a special symbol time counter update process, a special electric accessory release time, etc. Time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as update processing of the normal symbol time counter, update processing of the opening / closing time of the movable member 48, and the like. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a start port open timer counter, or a start port close timer counter is performed.
  In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the special symbol variation pattern determination random value, the hit determination random number value, the normal symbol determination random number value, the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number. Perform a specific random number update process to update the numerical value. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round. The initial random number value to be set is set as a new circulation initial value, and the random value is newly updated.
  In step S130, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot determination initial value random value, the special symbol determination initial value random value, the hit determination initial value random value, and the normal symbol determination initial value random value in step S130. Perform initial value random number value update processing.
  In step S200, the main CPU 110a performs various operations such as a general winning port detecting switch 43a, a large winning port detecting switch 50a, a first starting port detecting switch 45a, a second starting port detecting switch 47a, a gate detecting switch 44a, and a passage detecting switch 52a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch, and when there is an input, input control processing for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol memory determination (such as jackpot determination), special symbol display control, special winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51) opening / closing control, gaming state control, etc. Process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol normal power control process for performing a normal symbol memory determination (such as a hit determination), a normal symbol display control, an opening / closing control of the second start port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. Details will be described later.
  Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or each of the prize ball counters (three prize balls). A payout control process for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 is performed with reference to a counter, 10 prize ball counters, and 15 prize ball counters). Thereby, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.
  In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and designates an error designation command for magnetic abnormality or an error designation for radio wave abnormality. An abnormality determination process for preparing to send a command to the effect control board 130 is performed, details of which will be described later.
  In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, start port opening / closing data output to the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b, and large winning port opening / closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening / closing data, special symbol display data to be output to the special symbol displays 60 and 61, normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display 62, special symbol hold display data to be output to the special symbol hold indicators 63 and 64, Data creation processing for creating data such as normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65 is performed.
  In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data, the start opening / closing data, the big prize opening / closing data generated in step S700, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol data, Display output processing for outputting signals such as symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data, etc., payout command transmission processing for sending a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, An output control process is executed to execute an effect command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 or the effect control board 130.
  The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the payout control board 120 will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, and the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 are described with reference to FIGS. 44 will be described later.
  In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.
(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described using FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.
  In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43, and predetermined data is set. . Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. In this special winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the special winning opening 50, and predetermined data is set. . Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first start port detection switch input process. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45, and a predetermined value is determined. Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port detection switch input process. In this second start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 47, Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the normal gate 44, and predetermined data is set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation process. In this winning confirmation process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the passage detection switch 52a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning ball flow path 52, and predetermined data is set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current input control process ends.
(General winning award detection switch input processing on the main control board)
The general winning opening detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a general winning opening detection switch input process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S210-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the general winning a prize opening detection switch 43a is input. When the detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 43a is input (S210-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S210-2, and when the detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 43a is not input ( In S210-1: No), the current general winning opening detection signal input process is terminated.
  In step S210-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating 10 winning balls to the 10 winning ball counters used for winning balls. In step S210-3, the main CPU 110a displays a winning opening. “1” is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of winning game balls (entered) and updated (D ← D + 1), and the current general winning opening detection signal input processing is terminated.
(Main control board large winning opening detection switch input processing)
The big winning opening detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening detection switch input process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S220-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the special winning opening detection switch 50a has been input. When the detection signal from the special winning opening detection switch 50a is input (S220-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S220-2, and the detection signal from the special winning opening detection switch 50a is not input. In (S220-1: No), the current big winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S220-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating the data indicating 15 prize balls to the 15 prize ball counters used for prize balls, and in step S220-3, the main CPU 110a displays the prize opening. “1” is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of winning game balls (entered) and updated (D ← D + 1).
  In step S220-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current game progress is in the special game state (big hit game, small hit game). If it is in the special gaming state (S220-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S220-10. If it is not in the special gaming state (S220-4: No), the process proceeds to step S220-5. Proceed.
  In step S220-5, the main CPU 110a performs a fraud determination counter (E) indicating the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winning period. ) Is updated by adding “1” (E ← E + 1), and it is determined in step S220-6 whether or not the counter (E) for fraud determination is greater than the specified number (10) (error determination). Equivalent to means). If it is greater than the specified number (10) (S220-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S220-7. If the specified number (10) or less (S220-6: No), this time. The large winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S220-7, the main CPU 110a sets an error designation command for illegal winning in the effect transmission data storage area as an illegal winning (winning) in which a game ball wins (wins) outside the winning possible period has occurred. set. As a result, the error designation command for illegal prize is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for illegal prize performs an illegal prize error notification to be described later. Informs that this has occurred.
  In step S220-8, the main CPU 110a sets external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal indicating that an illegal winning (winning) has occurred in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and an external device can grasp (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.
  In step S220-9, the main CPU 110a clears the fraud determination counter (E) to 0 and ends the current winning prize detection switch input process. In this way, by clearing the value of the fraud determination counter (E) to 0, even if the next big winning opening detection switch input process is executed, an illegal winning error designation command or illegal winning will be immediately performed. No signal is transmitted.
  In step S220-10, the main CPU 110a sets “1” to the winning prize winning ball counter (C) indicating the number of gaming balls that have won (entered) the winning winning opening 50 during the special gaming state (big win game). The addition and update (C ← C + 1) are performed, and the current prize winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.
(Input processing for the first start port detection switch on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input (step S230-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S230-2, and the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input. If this is the case (step S230-1: No), the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counters used for prize balls. “1” is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of winning game balls (entered) and updated (D ← D + 1).
  In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol hold count (U1), which is the number of the first hold storage stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, is less than 4. . When the number of first special symbol reservation (U1) is less than 4 (step S230-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S230-5, and the number of first special symbol reservation (U1) is not less than 4 In (Step S230-4: No), the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding “1” to the first special symbol hold number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1). In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot determination random number value. Acquire and sequentially search for vacant storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol holding storage area, and store the acquired jackpot determination random number value in the vacant storage unit.
  In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a obtains a special symbol determination random number value, searches for an empty storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and stores the free memory. The random number value for determining the special symbol acquired is stored in the section, and in step S230-8, the random value for determining the reach and the random number value for determining the special pattern variation pattern are acquired, and the first memory in the first special symbol holding storage area is stored. The storage units that are vacant in order are searched, and the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for determining the special figure variation pattern are stored in the vacant storage unit.
  As described above, the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area includes the first jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, the special symbol variation pattern determination random value, and the like. On-hold storage (determination information) is stored (corresponding to determination information acquisition means and determination information storage means).
  In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process. In the first pre-determination process, referring to the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 11, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, the special pattern variation pattern determination random value, etc. acquired this time Based on the determination information, the effect control board 130 is notified of the newly stored determination result of the first reserved memory (determination information) before the special symbol variation display based on the first reserved memory is performed. First start winning information is determined.
  In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets a first start opening prize designation command corresponding to the first start prize information determined in the first pre-determination process in step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area. .
  Thereby, the first start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start opening prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start opening prize designation command receives the first start prize. Analyzing the mouth winning designation command, and starting a special symbol corresponding to the first start mouth winning designation command from the start of the variable display, a predetermined notice effect over one or more variable displays executed before that The pre-reading notice effect such as the continuous notice effect for executing the change and the hold change notice effect for changing the display mode of the corresponding hold icon to the special display mode can be executed. The pre-reading notice effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10, the movable effect member 73, and the panel illumination device 74.
  In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol hold number (U1), which is the number of the first reserved memory stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, and updates it in step S230-5. The first special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.
(Second control port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The second start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a second start port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input. When the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is input (step S240-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-2, and the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is not input. If this is the case (step S240-1: No), the current second start port detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counters used for the prize balls, and in step S240-3, the main CPU 110a displays the prize opening. “1” is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of winning game balls (winning) and updated (D ← D + 1).
  In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an auxiliary game (winning state) is in progress. If it is in the auxiliary game (step S240-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-10. If it is not in the auxiliary game (winning state) (step S240-4: No), the process proceeds to step S240-5. Move processing.
  In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a performs a fraud determination counter (E) indicating the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winning period. ) Is updated by adding “1” (E ← E + 1).
  In step S240-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the fraud determination counter (E) is greater than the specified number (10) (corresponding to an error determination unit). If the number is greater than the specified number (10) (step S240-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-7. If the number is less than the specified number (10) (step S240-6: No), The process moves to step S240-11.
  In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a sets an illegal winning error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area as an illegal winning (winning) in which a game ball wins (wins) outside the winning possible period has occurred. set. An error designation command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 notifies the fraud winning error by notifying the fraud winning error.
  In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a sets external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal indicating that an illegal winning (winning) has occurred in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and an external device can grasp (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.
  In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the fraud determination counter (E) to zero. In this way, by clearing the value of the fraud determination counter (E) to 0, even if the second start port detection switch input process is executed next, an illegal winning error designation command or fraud No winning signal is sent.
  In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets a winning ball counter (L) for the second starting port indicating the number of gaming balls that won (entered) the second starting port 47 during the auxiliary game (winning game). 1 ”is added and updated (L ← L + 1).
  In step S240-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol hold number (U2), which is the number of the second reserved memory stored in the second special symbol hold storage area, is less than 4. . If the second special symbol hold count (U2) is less than 4 (step S240-11: Yes), the process moves to step S240-12, and the second special symbol hold count (U2) is not less than 4. In (step S240-11: No), the current second start port detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S240-12, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating by adding “1” to the second special symbol holding number (U2) (U2 ← U2 + 1). In step S240-13, the main CPU 110a obtains the jackpot determination random number value. Acquire and sequentially search for the vacant storage units from the first storage unit in the second special symbol holding storage area, and store the acquired jackpot determination random value in the vacant storage unit.
  In step S240-14, the main CPU 110a acquires a special symbol determination random number value, searches for a free storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol hold storage area, and stores the free storage. The random number for special symbol determination acquired in the section is stored.
  In step S240-15, the main CPU 110a obtains a reach determination random number value and a special figure variation pattern determination random number value, and stores storage units that are vacant in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area. The search is performed, and the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random number value are stored in an empty storage unit.
  As described above, the predetermined storage section of the second special symbol holding storage area includes the second jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, the special symbol variation pattern determination random value, and the like. On-hold storage (determination information) is stored (corresponding to determination information acquisition means and determination information storage means).
  In step S240-16, the main CPU 110a performs a second preliminary determination process. In the second pre-determination process, referring to the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 11, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, the special figure variation pattern determination random number value, etc. acquired this time Based on the second hold memory (determination information) determination result newly stored in the presentation control board 130 before the change display of the special symbol based on the second hold memory is performed 2 Start start winning information is determined.
  In step S240-17, the main CPU 110a sets a second start opening prize designation command corresponding to the second start prize information determined in the second preliminary determination process in step S240-16 in the effect transmission data storage area. .
  Thus, the second start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the second start opening prize specifying command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the second start opening prize specifying command receives the second start winning prize command. Analyzing the mouth winning designation command and performing a predetermined notice effect over one or a plurality of varying displays executed before the special symbol corresponding to the second start mouth winning designation command is started. The pre-reading notice effect such as the continuous notice effect for executing the change and the hold change notice effect for changing the display mode of the corresponding hold icon to the special display mode can be executed. The pre-reading notice effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10, the movable effect member 73, and the panel illumination device 74.
  In step S240-18, the main CPU 110a refers to the second special symbol holding number (U2), which is the number of the second reserved memory stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area, and has been updated in step S240-12. The second special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the second special symbol hold count (U2) is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the current second start port detection switch input process is terminated.
(Gate detection switch input processing on the main control board)
The gate detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the gate detection switch input process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S250-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input. When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input (step S250-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-2, and when the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is not input (step S250- 1: No), the current gate detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S250-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol reserved memory number (G), which is the number of the normal symbol reserved memories stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area, is less than four. When the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is less than 4 (step S250-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-3, and when the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is not less than 4 (step S250- 2: No), the current gate detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S250-3, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding “1” to the normal symbol holding number (G) and updating (G ← G + 1). In step S250-4, the main CPU 110a obtains a random number value for hit determination. The vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area, and the acquired random number value for hit determination is stored in the vacant storage unit.
  In step S250-5, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number for determining a normal symbol, searches for a free storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area, and stores the free storage unit in the free storage unit. The acquired normal symbol determination random number value is stored, and in step S250-6, the normal pattern variation pattern determination random value is acquired, and the storage units that are vacant in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol hold storage area are stored. Searching is performed, and the acquired random number value for determining the normal pattern variation pattern is stored in a free storage unit.
  In step S250-6, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for determining a normal pattern variation pattern, searches for a free storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area, and is free. The random number value for determining the normal variation pattern obtained is stored in the storage unit.
  As described above, in the predetermined storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area, the universal symbol holding memory including the random number value for hit determination, the random value for determining the normal symbol, the random value for determining the normal pattern variation pattern, and the like is stored. (Corresponding to the common figure determination information acquisition means and the common figure determination information storage means)
  In step S250-7, the main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol hold count (G1), which is the number of the normal symbol hold storage in the normal symbol hold storage area, and updates the normal symbol hold count updated in step S250-3. A normal symbol memory designation command corresponding to (G1) is set in the transmission data storage area for presentation.
  In step S250-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal input from the gate detection switch 44a is due to the passing of the game ball to the right general gate 44 provided in the right area of the game area 5a. To do. If it is due to the passing of the game ball to the right general gate 44 (step S250-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-9, and the game ball passes to the right general gate 44. If not (step S250-8: No), the current gate detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S250-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state). If the current gaming state is in the non-short-time gaming state (step S250-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-10, and if the current gaming state is not in the non-short-time gaming state (step S250-9). : No), the current gate detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S250-10, the main CPU 110a makes a right-hand hit in which the game ball is being fired in the right area of the game area 5a even though the game ball is in a game state where the game ball should be fired in the left area of the game area 5a. Assuming that an error has occurred, a right-handed error designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, a right-handed error designation command can be transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 fires a game ball from the right area of the game area 5a to the left area of the game area 5a. An error notification (right-handed warning) of a right-handed error for prompting (warning) can be executed. When this process ends, the current gate detection switch input process ends.
(Prize confirmation processing of main control board)
The winning confirmation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a winning confirmation process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the passage detection switch 52a has been input. When the detection signal from the passage detection switch 52a is input (S260-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S260-2, and when the detection signal from the passage detection switch 52a is not input (S260-1: No) moves the process to step S260-3.
  In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a subtracts and updates (D ← D-1) by subtracting “1” from the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls won (entered) in the winning opening. In S260-3, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning ball counter (D) is larger than the upper limit value (20) (corresponding to error determination means). When the number is larger than the upper limit value (20) (S260-3: Yes), the number of game balls won in the winning opening is excessive (error) than the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path 52. If it is determined that there is an upper limit (20) or less (S260-3: No), the process proceeds to step S260-6.
  In step S260-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the winning ball counter (D) is smaller than the lower limit (−10) (corresponding to an error determination unit). When the number is less than the lower limit (−10) (S260-4: Yes), the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path 52 is more than the number of gaming balls won in the winning opening (error). If it is equal to or lower than the lower limit (−10) (S260-4: No), the current winning confirmation process is terminated.
  In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a wins the winning ball so that it is determined again as an error when the winning ball counter (D) is decremented by “1”, not when the winning check process is executed next. The counter (D) is updated by adding “1” (D ← D + 1), and the process proceeds to step S260-7.
  In step S260-6, the main CPU 110a wins the winning ball so that it is determined again as an error when the winning ball counter (D) is incremented by "1", not when the winning check process is executed next. "1" is subtracted from the counter (D) and updated (D ← D-1), and the process proceeds to step S260-7.
  In step S260-7, the main CPU 110a generates an abnormal win (pitch) in which the number of game balls won in various winning openings deviates from (does not match) the number of game balls discharged from the win ball channel 52. As a result, an error designation command for abnormal winning is set in the transmission data storage area for presentation. As a result, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for abnormal winning notifies the fact that an abnormal winning has occurred by performing error notification of an abnormal winning to be described later.
  In step S260-8, the main CPU 110a sets external information data (output data) for outputting an abnormal winning signal indicating that an abnormal winning (scoring) has occurred. Thereby, an abnormal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it is possible to grasp (specify) that an abnormal winning has occurred in an external device. When this process ends, the current winning confirmation process ends.
  In the present embodiment, the amount of deviation (width) in the positive direction between the upper limit value, which is one of the determination values for determining the occurrence of an abnormal winning, and the initial value “0” of the winning ball counter is determined by the other determination. It is set larger than the amount of deviation (width) in the negative direction between the lower limit value that is the value and the initial value “0” of the winning ball counter. That is, the amount of deviation in the minus direction is smaller. As a result, the time lag corresponding to the game balls that have won the various winning openings flow down the winning ball flow path 52 is absorbed to reduce erroneous determination of abnormal winning due to excessive winning balls, and the structure around the passage detection switch 52a. It is possible to quickly detect the occurrence of an abnormal winning due to a shortage of winning balls consisting of the above problems.
  Further, the lower limit, which is the other determination value, than the deviation amount (width) in the positive direction between the upper limit value, which is one determination value for determining the occurrence of an abnormal winning, and the initial value “0” of the winning ball counter. The amount of deviation (width) in the negative direction between the value and the initial value “0” of the winning ball counter may be set to a larger value, or both may be set to the same value.
(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
With reference to FIG. 27, the special figure special power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.
  First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electricity processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302, and special figure special electric treatment data = 0 if special figure special electric treatment data = 0. The process moves to the symbol memory determination process (step S310). If the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, the process moves to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S320), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the special symbol stop process. The process moves to (Step S330), and if the special figure special power processing data = 3, the process moves to the big hit game process (Step S340), and if the special figure special electric treatment data = 4, the big bonus game end process (Step S350). If the special figure special process data = 5, the process moves to the small hit game process (step S360).
  This “special drawing special electricity processing data” is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electricity control processing as will be described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. .
(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol memory determination process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. Here, when the special symbol variation display is not being performed (special symbol time counter = 0) (step S310-1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-2, and the special symbol variation display is being performed (special symbol). If (time counter> 0) (step S310-1: Yes), the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated.
  In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol hold count (U2), which is the number of the second hold storage stored in the second special symbol hold storage area, is 1 or more. When it is determined that the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more (step S310-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-3, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If not (step S310-2: No), the process proceeds to step S310-4.
  In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts “1” from the second special symbol reservation number (U2) and updates (U2 ← U2-1).
  In step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol hold number (U1), which is the number of the first reserved memory stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, is 1 or more. When it is determined that the number of first special symbol reservation (U1) is 1 or more (step S310-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-5, and the number of first special symbol reservation (U1) is 1 or more. If not (step S310-4: No), the process proceeds to step S318-1.
  In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts “1” from the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and updates (U1 ← U1-1).
  In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the number of special symbol reservations (U1 or U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or S310-5. . Specifically, each data stored in the fourth storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage section.
  The data stored in the first storage section is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage section), and the data already stored in the determination storage area (0th storage section) (used for the previous variation display). Jackpot determination random number value, special symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, and special symbol variation pattern determination random value) are deleted from the special symbol storage area.
  In this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-6, the second special symbol reserved storage area is shifted (digested) with priority over the first special symbol reserved storage area. 45 or the second special symbol reservation storage area may be shifted (digested) in the order in which the game balls are won in the 45 or the second start opening 47, or the first special symbol reservation storage area May be shifted (digested) with priority over the second special symbol reserved storage area.
  In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a issues a special symbol storage designation command based on the first special symbol hold count or the second special symbol hold count (U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. The determined special symbol memory designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for presentation.
  In step S311, the main CPU 110a, based on the data (random hit determination random number value, special symbol determination random value) stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol holding storage area in step S310-6. Determine whether or not to win a jackpot, determine special symbols and stop symbol data corresponding to the determination result, and set a symbol design command corresponding to the stop symbol data in the transmission data storage area for the effect Processing is executed (corresponding to special game determination means). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S312, the main CPU 110a determines the special symbol based on the data (reach determination random value, special diagram variation pattern determination random value) written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol holding storage area. A special figure variation pattern determination process for determining the variation pattern is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S313, the main CPU 110a confirms the gaming state at the start of change, sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S314, determines in step S312 above. The variation time (counter value) of the special symbol based on the variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of S110.
  In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets variation display data for causing the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to perform special symbol variation display (LED blinking) in a predetermined processing area. . As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing region, the data for turning on / off the LED is appropriately created in the data creation process in step S700, and the created data (signal) is output in step S800. As a result of the output in the control process, the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 starts the variable symbol display.
  In step S316, the main CPU 110a sets “00H” to a determination flag for waiting for a customer for determining whether or not the special symbol is not variably displayed. In step S317, the special CPU “1” is set in the special electric processing data, preparation is made to move the processing to the special symbol variation processing described above, and the current special symbol memory determination processing is terminated.
  In step S318-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting determination flag is “01H”. When the determination flag for waiting for a customer is not “01H” (step S318-1: No), the process proceeds to step S318-2, and when the determination flag for waiting for a customer is “01H” (step S318-1). : Yes), the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated.
  In step S318-2, the main CPU 110a sets “01H” to a determination flag for waiting for a customer for determining whether or not the state of waiting for a customer for which special symbol variation display has not been performed. 3, the customer waiting command indicating the customer waiting state is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated. Thereby, the customer waiting command can be transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the customer waiting effect described later can be executed by the effect control board 130 that has received the customer waiting command.
(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The big hit determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process in the main control board 110.
  In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot determination process is performed by the first holding storage based on the game ball entering the first start port 45. If the main CPU 110a determines that it is the first start port (step S311-1: Yes), it moves the process to step S311-2 and determines that it is not the first start port (is the second start port). In the case (step S311-1: No), the process proceeds to step S311-3.
  In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a selects the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. On the other hand, the main CPU 110a selects the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 7 in step S311-3.
  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 110a compares the current jackpot determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the probable gaming state and special symbol storage area with the selected jackpot determination table. Then, it is determined whether it is “big hit”, “small win”, or “losing”.
  In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot has been won. If the main CPU 110a determines that the jackpot has been won (step S311-5: Yes), in step S311-6, the special symbol determination table for jackpot shown in FIG. 8 is selected, and the process proceeds to step S311-10. Move.
  If the main CPU 110a determines that the jackpot is not won (step S311-5: No), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot is won in step S311-7. If the main CPU 110a determines that the small hit is won (step S311-7: Yes), in step S311-8, the special symbol determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 8 is selected, and step S311-10 is performed. Move processing to.
  If the main CPU 110a determines that the winning combination is not won (step S311-7: No), in step S311-9, the special symbol determination table for loss shown in FIG. 8 is selected, and step S311- The processing is transferred to 10.
  In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a determines the type of the start port for which the jackpot determination (lottery) has been performed, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the zeroth storage unit of the special symbol storage area, The special symbol type table (stop symbol data) is determined by collating with the selected special symbol determination table.
  Note that the determined special symbol (stop symbol data) is used to determine whether or not it is a big hit in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 32, as will be described later, and in the jackpot game process of FIG. It is also used to determine the operating mode, and is also used to determine the gaming state after the jackpot end in the jackpot game end process of FIG.
In step S3111-11, the main CPU 110a sets stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-10 in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area. In step S311-12, the main CPU 110a executes step S311-8. The effect designating command corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in the above is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the current special figure variation pattern determination process is terminated. As a result, the effect designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
(Special map variation pattern determination process for the main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.
  In step S312-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special figure variation pattern determination process is performed based on a game ball entering the first start port 45. When determining that the main CPU 110a is the first start port (step S312-1: Yes), in step S312-2, the main CPU 110a selects the variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. The processing is moved to S312-4.
  When the main CPU 110a determines that it is not the first start port (is the second start port) (step S312-1: No), it selects the variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. The process moves to step S312-4.
  In step S312-4, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot determination (lottery) determination result, the type of special symbol (stop symbol data), and the reach determination disturbance stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined by comparing the numerical value and the random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern, the current number of reserved balls, and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table.
  In step S312-5, the main CPU 110a sets a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312-4 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of step S110.
  In step S312-6, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312-4 in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
(Special design variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.
  In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S312-5 has elapsed (whether or not the special symbol time counter = 0). If the main CPU 110a determines that the variation time has elapsed (step S320-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S320-2 and determines that the variation time has not elapsed (step S320-1: No) terminates the special symbol variation process this time.
  In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops the special symbol variation display. Specifically, stop special figure data for stopping and displaying the special symbol determined in step S311-10 on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 is set in a predetermined processing area. . Thereby, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, and the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery) is notified to the player.
  In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol confirmation command in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 125) in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of step S110.
  In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets “2” in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 32, and ends the special symbol variation processing of this time.
(Special design stop processing for main control board)
The special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process in the main control board 110.
  In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (whether or not the special symbol time counter = 0). When the main CPU 110a determines that the symbol stop time has elapsed (step S330-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves to step S330-2 and determines that the symbol stop time has not elapsed (step S330-). 1: No), this special symbol stop process is terminated.
  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is set (ON) in the time-saving game flag storage area. When the short time game flag is set (step S330-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-3, and when the short time game flag is not set (step S330-2: No). In step S330-6, the process proceeds to step S330-6.
  In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a updates (J ← J-1) by subtracting “1” from the time reduction number (J) stored in the time reduction number (J) storage area, and in step S330-4. Then, it is determined whether or not the new short time count (J) is “0”. When the main CPU 110a determines that the number of time reductions (J) is “0” (step S330-4: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-5, and the time reduction number (J) is not “0”. When it determines (step S330-4: No), a process is moved to step S330-6.
  In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a clears (turns off) the time-short game flag set in the time-short game flag storage area. As a result, the short-time gaming state ends and the non-short-time gaming state shifts.
  In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high probability game flag is set (ON) in the high probability game flag storage area. When the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area (step S330-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-7 and stores the high probability in the high probability game flag storage area. If the game flag is not set (step S330-6: No), the process proceeds to step S330-10.
  In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a updates (X ← X-1) by subtracting “1” from the high probability game count (X) stored in the high probability game count (X) storage area. In S330-8, it is determined whether or not the new high probability game number (X) is “0”. When the main CPU 110a determines that the high probability game count (X) is “0” (step S330-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-9, and the high probability game count (X) is “ If it is determined that it is not “0” (step S330-8: No), the process proceeds to step S330-10.
  In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a clears (OFF) the high probability game flag set in the high probability game flag storage area. As a result, the high-probability gaming state ends, and a transition is made to the low-probability gaming state.
  In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a confirms the current gaming state, and sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol that has been stopped is a special bonus symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop special figure data stored in the stop special figure data storage area is a jackpot special symbol (stop special figure data = 10 to 16, 20 to 24). If the main CPU 110a determines that it is a special jackpot symbol (step S330-11: Yes), it moves the process to step S330-12, and if it determines that it is not a special jackpot symbol (S330-12: No). The process proceeds to step S330-15.
  In step S330-12, the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special figure special electric processing data and prepares to move the processing to the jackpot gaming process shown in FIG. 33. In step S330-13, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state and the number of time reductions. . Specifically, the data stored in the high probability game flag storage area, the high probability game count (X) storage area, the short time game flag storage area, and the short time count (J) storage area is cleared.
  In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a selects the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 12 to start the jackpot game.
  In step S330-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol that has been stopped is a special bonus symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop special figure data stored in the stop special figure data storage area is of a small hit special symbol (stop special figure data = 17, 18). When the main CPU 110a determines that the symbol is a small bonus special symbol (step S330-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-16, and when the main CPU 110a determines that the symbol is not a small bonus special symbol (step S330-15: No). ) Moves the process to step S330-21.
  In step S330-16, the main CPU 110a sets 5 in the special figure special electric processing data and prepares to move the process to the small hit game process shown in FIG. 35. In step S330-17, the main CPU 110a starts the small hit game. The small hit game control table shown in FIG. 12 is selected.
  In step S330-18, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time in the special game timer counter based on the selected game control table and the special symbol stop symbol data. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of step S110.
  In step S330-19, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of stop symbol data (big hit, small hit) in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S330-20, the main CPU 110a sets a special prize opening / closing control table. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 12 (a) or the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 12 (b), the big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No) corresponding to the stop symbol data. Set. When this process is finished, the current special symbol stop process is finished.
  In step S330-21, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electricity processing data to 0, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.
(Big hit game processing of main control board)
The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game process in the main control board 110.
  In step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the round game number (R) storage area. If the main CPU 110a determines that it is currently opening (step S340-1: Yes), it moves the process to step S340-2, and if it determines that it is not currently opening (step S340-1: No). Moves the process to step S340-6.
  In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in step S330-18 has elapsed. If the main CPU 110a determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S340-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S340-3, and determines that the opening time has not elapsed (step S340-2: No) ends the current jackpot game process.
  In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, “1” is added to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area to update (R ← R + 1). Here, since no round game has been performed yet, “1” is stored in the round game count (R) storage area.
  In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a big prize opening process. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the special winning opening 50 has not been opened yet, “1” is stored in the number-of-openings (K) storage area.
  Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50, energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-20, the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Set to the game timer counter.
  In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Accordingly, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Here, since it is the first round of the jackpot game, a round designation command for the first opening is set. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.
  In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening 50 is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the big prize opening 50 is open (step S340-6: Yes), the process moves to step S340-7, and when the main CPU 110a determines that the big prize opening 50 is not open ( In step S340-6: No), the process proceeds to step S340-9.
  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for ending the opening of the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the winning prize winning ball counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or the opening time at the current opening number (K) has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0) Is applicable. When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition is satisfied (step S340-7: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S340-8, and determines that the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S340-). 7: No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.
  In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a performs an interval (large winning opening closing) process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid 51b to clear the open / close member 51 of the special prize opening 50 to the closed state is cleared. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the special winning opening 50 is closed. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-20, the closing time of the special winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Set to the game timer counter. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.
  In the interval (big prize opening closing) process of step S340-8, an interval designation command corresponding to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area is stored in the effect transmission data storage area. The interval designation command may be set and transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently in the interval (large winning opening closed). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. If the main CPU 110a determines that the interval (the big prize opening is closed) (step S340-9: Yes), the process moves to step S340-10 and determines that the interval (the big prize opening is not closed). In the case (step S340-9: No), the processing is moved to step S340-19.
  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the special winning opening 50 has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter has reached “0”. When the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time has ended (step S340-10: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S340-11, and determines that the closing time has not ended (step S340-10: No) ends the current jackpot game process.
  In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning opening winning ball counter (C) has reached a specified number (9) or the number of times of opening (K) has reached the maximum number of times of opening. If the main CPU 110a determines that the current round has ended (step S340-11: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves to step S340-13 and determines that the current round has not ended (step S340-). 11: No), the process proceeds to step S340-12.
  In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50, energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-20, the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Set to the game timer counter. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.
  In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area has reached the maximum round game number of the current jackpot game. If it is determined that the final round is finished (step S340-13: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-17. If it is determined that the final round is not finished (step S340-13: No), The process moves to step S340-14.
  In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a performs round data setting processing. Specifically, “0” is set in the number-of-releases (K) storage area and the winning prize-winning ball number counter (C) storage area, and the number of round games (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area. ) Is updated by adding “1” (R ← R + 1).
  In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50, energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-20, the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Set to the game timer counter.
  In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Accordingly, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.
  In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a performs an ending transition process. Specifically, “0” is set in the number-of-openings (K) storage area, the big prize opening winning ball counter (C) storage area, and the round game number (R) storage area to clear the values of the respective storage areas. . Further, based on the jackpot game control table and the stop symbol data, the ending time is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of step S110.
  In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets a jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the jackpot ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.
  In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently ending. When the ending is in progress (step S340-19: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S340-20, and when it is not ending (step S340-19: No), the main CPU 110a performs this jackpot game processing. finish.
  In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the ending time has elapsed (step S340-20: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-21 and determines that the ending time has not elapsed (step S340-20: No). ), The current jackpot game process is terminated.
  In step S340-21, the main CPU 110a sets 4 to the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the jackpot game end process shown in FIG. 34, and ends the current jackpot game process.
(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game end process in the main control board 110.
  In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a acquires the stop symbol data set in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area, and selects the game state setting table shown in FIG.
  In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs a high probability game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 14, when the stop symbol data sets a high probability game flag, the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, When the stop symbol data does not set the high probability game flag, the high probability game flag is not set in the high probability game flag storage area or the high probability game flag storage area is cleared. For example, if the stop symbol data is “10”, the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, and if the stop symbol data is “16”, the high probability game flag is not set.
  In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing. Specifically, referring to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 14, when the stop symbol data sets a high probability gaming number, the remaining variation number (X) storage area of the high probability gaming state is predetermined. Set the number of times. For example, if the stop symbol data is “10”, 10000 is set in the remaining variation count (X) storage area of the high probability gaming state, and if the stop symbol data is “16”, the remaining variation of the high probability gaming state. Number of times (X) Nothing is set in the storage area or 0 is set.
  In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 14, when the stop symbol data sets the short-time game flag (for example, when the stop symbol data is “10”), the short-time game flag When the short-time game flag is set in the storage area and the stop symbol data does not set the short-time game flag (for example, when the stop symbol data is “14”), the short-time game flag is set in the short-time game flag storage region. Do not set or clear the short-time game flag storage area.
  In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a performs time-saving game number setting processing. Specifically, referring to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 14, if the stop symbol data sets the number of short-time games, the predetermined number of times is stored in the remaining variation number (J) storage area of the short-time gaming state. Set. For example, if the stop symbol data is “10”, the remaining change count (J) of the short-time gaming state is set to 10000, and if the stop symbol data is “23”, the remaining change count of the short-time gaming state ( J) Set 10 in the storage area.
  In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a refers to the high-probability gaming flag storage area and the short-time gaming flag storage area, confirms the gaming state, and sends a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state to the effect transmission data storage area. Set to. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets “0” in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG. 28, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.
(Main control board small hit game processing)
The small hit game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the small hit game process in the main control board.
  In step S360-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening. If the main CPU 110a determines that it is currently opening (step S360-1: Yes), it moves the process to step S360-2, and if it determines that it is not currently opening (step S360-1: No). Moves the process to step S360-5.
  In step S360-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in step S330-18 has elapsed. If the main CPU 110a determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S360-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S360-3, and determines that the opening time has not elapsed (step S360-2: No) ends the current jackpot game process.
  In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the special winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 13) set in step S330-20 is selected.
  In step S360-4, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the special winning opening 50 has not been opened yet, “1” is stored in the number-of-openings (K) storage area.
  Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50, energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. Further, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-20, the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is set in the special game timer counter based on the number of times of opening (K). When this process ends, the current small hit game process ends.
  In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening 50 is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the special winning opening 50 is open (step S360-5: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S360-6 and determines that the special winning opening 50 is not open ( In step S360-5: No), the process proceeds to step S360-8.
  In step S360-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for ending opening of the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the winning prize winning ball counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or the opening time at the current opening number (K) has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0) Is applicable. When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition is satisfied (step S360-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S360-7 and determines that the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S360-). 6: No), the current small hit game process is terminated.
  In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a performs an interval (big prize opening closing) process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid 51b to clear the open / close member 51 of the special prize opening 50 to the closed state is cleared. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the special winning opening 50 is closed. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-20, the closing time of the special winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Set to the game timer counter. When this process ends, the current small hit game process ends.
  In step S360-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently in the interval (closed big prize opening). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. If the main CPU 110a determines that the interval (the big prize opening is closed) (step S360-8: Yes), the process moves to step S360-9 and determines that the interval (the big prize opening is not closed). In the case (step S360-8: No), the processing is moved to step S360-14.
  In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the special winning opening 50 has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter has reached “0”. When the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time has ended (step S360-9: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S360-10, and determines that the closing time has not ended (step S360-9: In No), the current small hit game process is terminated.
  In step S360-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small hit end condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning opening winning ball counter (C) has reached a specified number (9) or the number of times of opening (K) has reached the maximum number of times of opening. When the main CPU 110a determines that the small hitting end condition is satisfied (step S360-10: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S360-12 and determines that the small hitting end condition is not satisfied (step S360-12). In S360-10: No), the process proceeds to step S360-11.
  In step S360-11, the main CPU 110a performs a special prize opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50, energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-20, based on the current number of opening (K), the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is set in the special game timer counter. When this process ends, the current small hit game process ends.
  In step S360-12, the main CPU 110a performs an ending transition process. Specifically, “0” is set in the number-of-openings (K) storage area and the big winning opening winning ball counter (C) storage area to clear the values in the respective storage areas. Further, the ending time is set in the special game timer counter based on the small hit game control table and the stop symbol data. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of step S110.
  In step S360-13, the main CPU 110a sets a small hitting ending designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the ending designation command for small hits is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process ends, the current small hit game process ends.
  In step S360-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently ending. When the ending is in progress (step S360-14: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S360-15, and when it is not ending (step S360-14: No), the main CPU 110a performs this jackpot game processing. finish.
  In step S360-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If the main CPU 110a determines that the ending time has elapsed (step S360-15: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S360-16 and determines that the ending time has not elapsed (step S360-15: No). ) Ends the current small hit game process.
  In step S360-16, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG. 28, and ends the current small hit game processing.
(Main figure normal power control processing of main control board)
The ordinary power control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a general power control process in the main control board 110.
  In step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the general-purpose normal power processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the general-purpose normal power processing data loaded in step S402, and if the general-purpose normal power processing data = 0, the normal symbol. The process is shifted to the variation process (step S410), and if the ordinary power transmission process data = 1, the process is shifted to the auxiliary game process (step S420).
  This “Putsu-Fuji Electric Power Processing Data” will be set as necessary in each sub-routine control processing subroutine as will be described later, so that the sub-routines necessary for the game will be processed appropriately. become.
  In the normal symbol variation process in step S410, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process, a normal symbol determination process for determining a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, a normal symbol variation pattern determination process for determining a variation time of the normal symbol, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In the auxiliary game process of step S420, the main CPU 110a performs a process of controlling the auxiliary game (winning game). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
(Normal design variation processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.
  In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation display is being performed. If the main CPU 110a determines that the normal symbol fluctuation display is in progress (normal symbol time counter> 0) (step S410-1: Yes), the process moves to step S410-15, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is in progress. If not (step S410-1: No), the process proceeds to step S410-2.
  In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol hold count (G1) storage area storing the general symbol hold count is 1 or more. If the main CPU 110a determines that the value of the normal symbol hold count (G1) storage area is 1 or more (step S410-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S410-3, and the normal symbol hold count (G1) ) If it is determined that the value of the storage area is not 1 or more (step S410-2: No), the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.
  In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the normal symbol hold count (G1) storage area and updates (G ← G-1).
  In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the data stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the normal symbol holding number (G1) storage area subtracted in step S410-2. Specifically, each data stored in the fourth storage unit from the first storage unit in the normal symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit.
  The data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit) and is already stored in the determination storage area (the random number value for hit determination used in the previous variation display). , Random numbers for determining normal symbols, random values for determining normal pattern variation patterns) are deleted from the normal symbol holding storage area. Also, a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the normal symbol hold count (G1) stored in the normal symbol hold count (G1) storage area is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the normal symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S410-5, the main CPU 110a selects a normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 15, and performs a hit determination process in step S410-6. Specifically, the current short-time gaming state and the random number value for winning determination stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area are collated with the normal symbol hit determining table selected in step S410-5. Judgment of whether or not to win (normal symbol winning lottery).
  In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a selects the stop symbol determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 15, and performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-8. Specifically, the current short-time gaming state, the result of the hit determination in step S410-6, the normal symbol determining random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area, and step S410-7 The normal symbol type (stop symbol data) is determined by comparing with the stop symbol determination table for the normal symbol selected in the above, and is set in the normal symbol stop symbol storage area.
  In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a identifies the common figure designation command based on the stop symbol data of the normal symbol determined in step S410-8, and sets the identified common figure designation command in the transmission data storage area for production. To do. As a result, the common map designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a selects a normal pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15, and performs a normal variation pattern determination process in step S410-11. Specifically, the current short time gaming state, the result of the hit determination in step S410-6, the random number value for determining the normal pattern variation pattern stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area, and step S410 The variation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol is determined by collating with the variation pattern determination table for the normal symbol selected in −10.
  In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a identifies a common map variation designation command corresponding to the variation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol determined in step S410-11, and uses the identified regular map variation designation command for production. Set in the transmission data storage area. As a result, the common map change designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S410-13, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol variation time determined in step S410-11 in the normal symbol time counter. The normal symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.
  In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol fluctuation display data on the normal symbol display 62, and starts normal symbol fluctuation display. The normal symbol fluctuation display data includes information such as the normal symbol winning lottery result, the normal stop symbol data, and the normal symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern).
  In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol time counter set in step S410-13 is “0”. When the main CPU 110a determines that the normal symbol variation time has ended (step S410-15: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S410-16 and determines that the normal symbol variation time has not ended. In (Step S410-15: No), the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.
  In step S410-16, the main CPU 110a stops the normal symbol variation display so that the stop symbol corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol data is obtained. Specifically, if the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a hit stop symbol, the stop symbol is stopped on the normal symbol display 62, and if the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a stop stop symbol, the normal symbol indicator is displayed. Stop display of the loss stop symbol at 62.
  In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thus, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a hit stop symbol. When the main CPU 110a is a winning stop symbol (step S410-18: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S410-19, and when it is not a winning stop symbol (step S410-18: No), the current normal symbol. The variation process is terminated.
  In step S410-19, the main CPU 110a sets “1” to the ordinary power transmission process data in order to shift the process to the auxiliary game process shown in FIG. 38, and in step S410-20, the first CPU shown in FIG. 2. Select the opening mode determination table for the starting port.
  In step S410-21, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the release mode determination table selected in step S410-20 and the normal symbol stop symbol data. The auxiliary game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of step S110.
  In step S410-22, the main CPU 110a uses an opening designating command for winning according to the stop symbol data of the normal symbol based on the opening manner determination table for the second start port selected in step S410-20. Set in the transmission data storage area. Thereby, the winning opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process ends, the current normal symbol variation process ends.
(Auxiliary game processing of main control board)
The auxiliary game process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing auxiliary game processing in the main control board 110.
  In step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening. If the main CPU 110a determines that it is currently opening (step S420-1: Yes), it moves the process to step S420-2, and if it determines that it is not currently opening (step S420-1: No). Moves the process to step S420-5.
  In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in step S410-21 has elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S420-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S420-3 and determines that the opening time has not elapsed (step S420-2: In No), the current auxiliary game process is terminated.
  In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game start processing. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of release (S) stored in the number of times of release (S) storage area to update (S ← S + 1). Here, since the second start port has not been opened yet, “1” is stored in the number-of-openings (S) storage area.
  In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port opening process. Specifically, energization data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b to set the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 is set. Thereby, the movable member 48 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second start port 47 is opened. Further, with reference to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port shown in FIG. 15, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of opening times (S).
  In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second start port is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second start opening / closing solenoid 48b is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the second start port 47 is open (step S420-5: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S420-6 and determines that the second start port 47 is not open. In the case (step S420-5: No), the processing is moved to step S420-8.
  In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second start port opening end condition is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the winning ball counter (L) for the second starting port has reached the specified number (10) or the opening time at the current opening number (S) has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter = 0). When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition is satisfied (step S420-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S420-7 and determines that the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S420-). 6: No), the current auxiliary game process is terminated.
  In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port closing process. Specifically, energization data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b to clear the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 to the closed state is cleared. Thereby, the movable member 48 is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the second start port 47 is closed. Further, with reference to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port shown in FIG. 15, the closing time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of opening times (S). When this process ends, the current auxiliary game process ends.
  In step S420-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently in the interval (closed). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second start opening / closing solenoid 48b is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that it is during the interval (closed) (step S420-8: Yes), it moves the process to step S420-9 and determines that it is not during the interval (closed) (step S420-8). : No), the current auxiliary game process is terminated.
  In step S420-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the second start port has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter is not “0”. If the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the second start port has elapsed (step S420-9: Yes), the process moves to step S420-10, and the closing time of the second start port has not elapsed. Is determined (step S420-9: No), the current auxiliary game process is terminated.
  In step S420-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final opening has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times of release (S) stored in the number of times of release (S) storage area has reached the maximum number of times of release of the current auxiliary game. When the final opening has been completed (step S420-10: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S420-13, and when the final opening has not been completed (step S420-10: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S420-11.
  In step S420-11, the main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game progress processing. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of release (S) stored in the number of times of release (S) storage area to update (S ← S + 1).
  In step S420-12, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port opening process. Specifically, energization data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b to set the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 is set. Thereby, the movable member 48 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second start port 47 is opened. Further, with reference to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port shown in FIG. 15, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of opening times (S). When this process ends, the current auxiliary game process ends.
  In step S420-13, the main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game termination processing. Specifically, “0” is set in the number of times of opening the second start opening (S) storage area and the winning ball counter (L) storage area for the second start opening to clear the values in the respective storage areas.
  In step S420-14, the main CPU 110a sets a winning ending designation command corresponding to the current auxiliary game in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the winning ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S420-15, the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the normal-use normal power processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the normal symbol variation processing shown in FIG. When this process ends, the current auxiliary game process ends.
(Main control board abnormality judgment processing)
The abnormality determination process for the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an abnormality determination process for the main control board 110.
  First, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 53a is input in step S600-1. When the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 53a is input (S600-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S600-2, and when the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 53a is not input (S600-1). : No), the process proceeds to step S600-6.
  In step S600-2, the main CPU 110a adds “1” to the magnetic detection counter (M) for measuring the time (number of times) in which magnetism exceeding a predetermined magnetic force is continuously detected and updates it ( M ← M + 1).
  In step S600-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the magnetic detection counter (M) is greater than the specified value (50) (corresponding to an error determination means). When the value of the magnetic detection counter (M) is larger than the specified value (50) (S600-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S600-4, and the magnetic detection counter (M) is set to the specified value. (50) In the following cases (S600-3: No), the process proceeds to step S600-7. Note that the abnormality determination process is a process executed within the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms, and therefore, when the magnetic detection counter (M) reaches a specified value, a magnetism exceeding a predetermined magnetic force. Is detected continuously for 0.2 seconds.
  In step S600-4, the main CPU 110a sets an error designation command for magnetic abnormality in the effect transmission data storage area, assuming that a magnetic abnormality in which magnetism exceeding a predetermined magnetic force is continuously detected has occurred. Accordingly, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error specification command for magnetic abnormality notifies that a magnetic abnormality has occurred by performing a magnetic abnormality error notification described later.
  In step S600-5, the main CPU 110a sets external information data (output data) for outputting an abnormality signal indicating the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality. Thereby, an abnormal signal indicating the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and an external device can grasp (specify) that the magnetic abnormality has occurred.
  In step S600-6, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the magnetic detection counter (M) for measuring the time during which the magnetism exceeding the predetermined magnetic force is continuously detected to zero. Thus, by clearing the value of the magnetic detection counter (M) to 0, even if the abnormality determination process is executed next, an error designation command for magnetic abnormality or occurrence of magnetic abnormality is immediately indicated. An abnormal signal is never transmitted.
  In step S600-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the radio wave detection sensor 54a has been input. When the detection signal from the radio wave detection sensor 54a is input (S600-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step S600-8, and when the detection signal from the radio wave detection sensor 54a is not input (S600-). 7: No), the process proceeds to step S600-12.
  In step S600-8, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the radio wave detection counter (N) for measuring the time (number of times) at which radio waves of a predetermined frequency have been continuously detected, and updates (N ← N + 1).
  In step S600-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the radio wave detection counter (N) is greater than the specified value (50) (corresponding to an error determination means). When the value of the radio wave detection counter (N) is larger than the specified value (50) (S600-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S600-10, and the value of the radio wave detection counter (N) is If it is equal to or less than the specified value (50) (S600-9: No), the current abnormality determination process is terminated.
  Since the abnormality determination process is a process executed within the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms, when the radio wave detection counter (N) reaches a specified value, radio waves with a predetermined frequency are generated. It is detected continuously for 0.2 seconds.
  In step S600-10, the main CPU 110a sets an error designation command for radio wave abnormality in the effect transmission data storage area, assuming that a radio wave abnormality in which a radio wave of a predetermined frequency is continuously detected has occurred. As a result, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for radio wave abnormality notifies the fact that the radio wave abnormality has occurred by performing error notification of the radio wave abnormality described later.
  In step S600-11, the main CPU 110a sets external information data (output data) for outputting an abnormal signal indicating the occurrence of radio wave abnormality. Thereby, an abnormal signal indicating the occurrence of radio wave abnormality is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it is possible to grasp (identify) that the radio wave abnormality has occurred in an external device.
  In step S600-12, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the radio wave detection counter (N) for measuring the time during which radio waves of a predetermined frequency are continuously detected, and performs this abnormality determination process. finish. In this way, by clearing the value of the radio wave detection counter (N) to 0, even if the abnormality determination process is executed next, an error designation command for radio wave abnormality or the occurrence of a radio wave abnormality is immediately indicated. An abnormal signal is never transmitted.
(Main process of payout control unit)
The main process of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control unit 121.
  First, the payout CPU 121a performs an initialization process in step H10. Specifically, the storage contents of the payout RAM 121c and the stack area are cleared, and the payout RAM 121c is set when the power is turned on.
  In step H20, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not a power-off notification command has been received. If a power-off notification command has been received (H20: Yes), the process proceeds to step H21. If a power-off notification command has not been received (H20: No), step H20 is repeated.
  The payout CPU 121a prohibits interruption in step H21, loads the unpaid number from the payout counter stored in the payout counter storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H22, and corresponds to the loaded unpaid number in step H23. A command transmission process at the time of power-off for transmitting to the main control board 110 an unpaid-out payout number designation command is performed.
  As a result, the main control board 110 can grasp (specify) the remaining payout number (unpaid number) of game balls that have been paid out when the power is cut off (power failure), and the remaining payout number when the power is turned on (restored). A corresponding initial payout number designation command can be transmitted to the payout control board 120.
  In step H24, the payout CPU 121a performs processing for clearing the output port. In step H25, the payout CPU 121a prohibits the RAM access and waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.
(Timer interrupt processing of the payout controller)
The timer interrupt process of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the payout control unit 121. A clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the payout control board 120, whereby the timer interruption process described below is executed.
  First, in step H100, the payout CPU 121a performs a process of saving information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step H200, performs a command analysis process for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the payout RAM 121c. .
  When the payout control unit 121 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) for storing the received command in the reception buffer is performed, and as a result, the command in step H200 is executed. Analysis processing can be performed.
  In step H300, the payout CPU 121a performs various timer counters such as update processing of a payout timer counter such as a driving time of the payout motor 100b of the game ball payout device 100 and an interval time provided after paying out one unit (15) game balls. A time control process for updating is performed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a timer counter for driving time and a timer counter for interval time is performed.
  In step H400, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the opening detection switch 31a, the payout ball detection switch 100a, the full detection switch 32a, and the ball detection switch 101a. Input control processing such as setting predetermined data is performed.
  In step H500, the payout CPU 121a controls the prize ball for paying out from the game ball payout device 100 game balls corresponding to the initial payout number designation command and the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110. Process.
  In step H600, the payout CPU 121a pays out from the game ball payout device 100 as a unit of a number of game balls corresponding to 100 yen while performing ball loan communication with a ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the game machine 1. A ball lending control process is performed to issue the ball. This ball lending control process is performed based on the operation of the lending button of the lending operation unit 20.
  In step H700, the payout CPU 121a detects an event (abnormality) such as opening of the frame, fullness of the lower tray 12 and a payout abnormality based on input signals from the open detection switch 31a, the full detection switch 32a, the ball detection switch 101a, and the like. An abnormality determination process is performed for determining occurrence and preparing for transmitting an error specification command for opening a frame, an error specification command for full abnormality, an error specification command for payout abnormality, and the like to the main control board 110. This abnormality determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step H800, the payout CPU 121a performs data creation processing for creating data such as external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90 and drive data output to the payout motor 100b.
  In step H900, the payout CPU 121a sends a command set in the main control transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c and a port output process for outputting signals such as external information data and drive data created in the above H800 to the main control board. The main control command transmission process to be transmitted to 110 and the output control process to perform the effect command transmission process to transmit the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c to the effect control board 130 are performed. The command transmission to the effect control board 130 may be such that the corresponding command is sent from the payout control board 120 to the main control board 110 and sent from the main control board 110 to (via) the effect control board. Good.
  In step H1000, the payout CPU 121a returns the information saved in step H100 to the register of the payout CPU 121a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.
(Abnormality judgment processing of payout control unit)
The abnormality determination process of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an abnormality determination process in the payout control unit 121.
  First, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the detection signal from the open detection switch 31a has been switched from OFF to ON in Step H700-1. When the detection signal of the open detection switch is switched from OFF to ON (H700-1: Yes), the process proceeds to Step H700-2, and when the detection signal of the open detection switch is not switched from OFF to ON (H700). -1: No), the process proceeds to Step H700-3.
  In step H700-2, the payout CPU 121a sets a frame opening error designation command indicating that the glass frame 4 is in the open state in the effect transmission data storage area. Thus, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the frame opening error designation command performs processing for performing frame opening error notification to notify that the frame opening has occurred.
  In step H700-3, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the detection signal from the opening detection switch 31a has been switched from ON to OFF. If the detection signal of the open detection switch has been switched from ON to OFF (H700-3: Yes), the process proceeds to Step H700-4, and if the detection signal of the open detection switch has not been switched from ON to OFF (H700). −3: No), the process proceeds to Step H700-5.
  In step H700-4, the payout CPU 121a sets a frame opening error release designation command indicating that the glass frame 4 is in the closed state in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error release designation command for opening the frame performs a process for ending the error notification for opening the frame.
  In step S700-5, the payout CPU 121a determines whether the detection signal from the full detection switch 32a has been switched from OFF to ON. When the detection signal from the full detection switch 32a is switched from OFF to ON (H700-5: Yes), the process proceeds to Step H700-6, and the detection signal from the full detection switch 32a is switched from OFF to ON. If not (H700-5: No), the process proceeds to Step H700-7.
  In step H700-6, the payout CPU 121a sets a full error specification command indicating that the lower tray 12 is filled with game balls in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error specification command for full abnormality notifies the fact that the tray 12 is full of game balls by performing processing for starting the error notification of the full plate. .
  In step H700-7, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the detection signal from the full detection switch 32a has been switched from ON to OFF. When the detection signal from the full detection switch 32a is switched from ON to OFF (H700-7: Yes), the process proceeds to Step H700-8, and the detection signal from the full detection switch 32a is switched from ON to OFF. If not (H700-7: No), the process proceeds to Step H700-9.
  In step H700-8, the payout CPU 121a sets an error release designation command for full abnormality indicating that the fullness of the tray 12 has been eliminated in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error release designation command for the full abnormality performs a process for terminating the error notification of the full dish.
  In step H700-9, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the detection signal from the ball presence detection switch 101a is switched from ON to OFF. When the detection signal from the ball detection switch 101a is switched from ON to OFF (H700-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step H700-10, and the detection signal from the ball detection switch 101a is switched from ON to OFF. If it has not been switched (H700-9: No), the process proceeds to step H700-11.
  In step H700-10, the payout CPU 121a sets a payout abnormality error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area indicating that the game balls stored in the game ball storage unit 101 are insufficient. Thereby, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for payout abnormality performs processing for starting the error notice of the payout abnormality and notifies that a payout abnormality has occurred.
  In step H700-11, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the detection signal from the ball presence detection switch 101a is switched from OFF to ON. When the detection signal from the ball detection switch 101a is switched from OFF to ON (H700-11: Yes), the process proceeds to Step H700-12, and the detection signal from the ball detection switch 101a is switched from OFF to ON. If it is not switched (H700-11: No), the current abnormality determination process is terminated.
  In step H700-12, the payout CPU 121a sets an error release designation command for payout abnormality indicating that the shortage of game balls stored in the game ball storage unit 101 has been resolved in the effect transmission data storage area. This abnormality determination process ends. As a result, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error cancellation designation command for the payout abnormality performs a process for terminating the error notification of the payout abnormality.
(Explanation of commands related to payout control board)
The types of commands transmitted between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42A is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the payout control board 120, and FIG. 42B is a diagram illustrating the main control board 110 or the effect control board 130 from the payout control board 120. It is a figure which shows the classification of the command transmitted to.
  The “initial payout number designation command” is a command for instructing the payout control board 120 of the remaining payout number of the game ball that was interrupted when the power interruption (power failure) occurs, and “MODE” is “FAH”. “DATA” information is set in accordance with the remaining payout amount.
  The initial payout number designation command is an initial payout number designation command corresponding to the remaining payout number of game balls that were paid out when the power was turned off when the gaming machine 1 was turned on (restored). Sent to. Specifically, in step S10-16, an initial payout number designation command corresponding to the value of the payout counter referenced in step S10-15 is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the output of step S800. It is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the control process.
  The “checkout command” is a command for the main control board 110 to check the payout state of the payout control board 120, “MODE” is set as “FBH”, and “DATA” is set as “00H”. Has been.
  This payout state confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 when the main control board 110 attempts to pay out the game ball to the payout control board 120. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the payout control process in step S500, and is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the output control process in step S800.
  The “payout number designation command” is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out by the main control board 110 to the payout control board 120. “MODE” is set as “FBH”, and is matched with the number of payouts. "DATA" information is set.
  This payout number designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 when a payout number request designation command is received from the payout control board 120 as a result of transmitting the above-described payout state confirmation command. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the payout control process in step S500, and is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the output control process in step S800.
  The “power-off notification command” is a command for the main control board 110 to notify the payout control board 120 of the occurrence of power-off (power failure), “MODE” is set to “FCH”, and “DATA” is “00H” is set.
  This power-off notification command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 when the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of power-off (power failure). Specifically, it is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in step S42.
  The “payout state notification command” is a command for the payout control board 120 to notify the main control board 110 that a game ball can be paid out, “MODE” is set to “FDH”, and “DATA "Is set to" 00H ".
  The payout state notification command is transmitted to the main control board 110 when the power is turned on, when the payout of the winning ball or the rental ball is completed, when returning from the error, or the like. Specifically, it is transmitted to the main control board 110 in the initialization process in step H10, and is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in the prize ball control process in step H500 and the ball rental control process in step H600. In the output control process of step H900, it is transmitted to the main control board 110.
  The “payout number request command” is a command for requesting the main control board 110 to notify the number of game balls to be paid out. “MODE” is set as “FDH” and “DATA” is set as “01H”. Has been.
  The payout number request command is transmitted to the main control board 110 when a payout state confirmation command is received from the main control board 110. Specifically, in the command analysis process of step H200, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c when the receipt of the payout state confirmation command is confirmed, and in the output control process of step H900, the main control board 110 is set. Will be sent.
  The “unpaid-out payout number designation command” is a command for notifying the main control board 110 of the value of the payout counter (unpaid number) stored in the payout counter storage area of the payout RAM 121c at the time of power interruption (power failure). Yes, “MODE” is set as “FEH”, and “DATA” is set according to the value of the payout counter.
  With respect to this unpaid out number designation command, when a power-off notification command is received from the main control board 110, an unpaid out number designation command corresponding to the value of the payout counter is transmitted to the main control board 110. Specifically, an unpaid-out payout number designation command corresponding to the unpaid-out number (remaining payout number) loaded in step H22 is transmitted to the main control board 110 in step H23.
  The “frame opening error designation command” is a command for notifying the effect control board 130 that the opening of the glass frame 4 has been detected, “MODE” is set to “FFH”, and “DATA” is set to “ 00H ".
  This frame opening error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the opening detection switch 31a detects the opening of the glass frame 4. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H700-2, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step H900.
  “Error specification command for full abnormality” is a command for notifying the production control board 130 that the tray 12 is full of game balls, “MODE” is set to “FFH”, and “DATA "Is set to" 01H ".
  This full error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. Specifically, in step H700-6, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step H900.
  The “error specifying command for payout abnormality” is a command for notifying the effect control board 130 that the game balls (payout waiting balls) stored in the game ball storage unit 101 are insufficient. "Is set to" FFH ", and" DATA "is set to" 02H ".
  This error designation command for payout abnormality is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when it is detected by the ball presence detection switch 101a that the game balls (payout waiting balls) stored in the game ball storage unit 101 are insufficient. Is done. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H700-10, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step H900.
  The “error release designation command for opening the frame” is a command for notifying the effect control board 130 that the closing of the glass frame 4 has been detected, “MODE” is set to “FFH”, and “DATA” is set. “05H” is set.
  This error release designation command for opening the frame is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the opening detection switch 31a detects the closing of the glass frame 4. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H700-4, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step H900.
  The “error release designation command for full abnormality” is a command for notifying the effect control board 130 that the tray 12 is full, “MODE” is set to “FFH”, and “DATA” is “06H” is set.
  This error canceling designation command for the full abnormality is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when it is detected by the full detection switch 32a that the lower tray 12 is full. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H700-8, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step H900.
  The “error release designation command for payout abnormality” is a command for notifying the effect control board 130 that the shortage of game balls (payout waiting balls) stored in the game ball storage unit 101 has been resolved. “MODE” is set to “FFH”, and “DATA” is set to “07H”.
  This error release designation command for payout abnormality is sent to the effect control board 130 when it is detected by the ball detection switch 101a that the shortage of game balls (payout waiting balls) stored in the game ball storage unit 101 has been resolved. Sent. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H700-12, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step H900.
(Description of commands related to production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. 43 and 44 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.
  The “first special symbol storage designation command” indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the first special symbol storage number (U1) storage area, “MODE” is set to “E0H”, and the number of reserved storages DATA information is set according to the above.
  The first special symbol storage designation command is used to store the post-increase / decrease in step S230-11 or step S310-7 when the value stored in the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area increases or decreases. The first special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the number is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  The “second special symbol memory designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area, “MODE” is set to “E0H”, and the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to the above.
  The second special symbol storage designation command is used to store the increased or decreased reserved memory in step S240-18 or step S310-7 when the value stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area increases or decreases. The second special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the number is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol memory designation command” and the “second special symbol memory designation command” may be collectively referred to as a “special symbol memory designation command”.
  The “designation designating command” indicates the type (type) of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. “MODE” is set to “E1H” for the first special symbol, and “MODE” for the second special symbol. "Is set as" E2H ", and DATA information is set according to the type of special symbol. In addition, since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of jackpot and the gaming state after the jackpot ends, it can be said that the directing design designation command indicates the type of jackpot or the gaming state after the jackpot ends .
  As for the effect designating command, when various kinds of special symbols are determined and the variation display of the special symbols is started, the effect designating command corresponding to the special design is transmitted to the effect RAM transmission data in the main RAM 110c in step S311-12. It is set in the storage area and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  The “variation pattern designation command for the first special symbol” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 60, “MODE” is set to “E3H”, DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.
  The first special symbol variation pattern designation command is used when the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 60 is started, in step S312-6, the first special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern. The design variation pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  The “variable pattern designation command for the second special symbol” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the second special symbol display 61, and “MODE” is set to “E4H” DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.
  This second special symbol variation pattern designation command is used when the special symbol variation display on the second special symbol display 61 is started, in step S312-6, the second special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol. The design variation pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  In the present embodiment, the “variation pattern designation command for the first special symbol” and the “variation pattern designation command for the second special symbol” may be collectively referred to as a “variation pattern designation command”.
  The “special symbol confirmation command” indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, “MODE” is set to “E5H”, and “DATA” is set to “00H”.
  This special symbol confirmation command is used when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61. In step S320-3, the special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect RAM transmission data in the main RAM 110c. It is set in the storage area and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
The “normal symbol confirmation command” indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, “MODE” is set to “E5H”, and “DATA” is set to “01H”.
When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, the normal symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect RAM transmission data in the main RAM 110c in step S410-17. It is set in the storage area and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  The “start opening prize designation command” is information for notifying the effect control board 130 in advance of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery). If it is based on winning a game ball to the first starting opening 45, “MODE” "E6H" is set, and if it is based on winning a game ball to the second starting port 47, "MODE" is set with "E7H", and DATA information is set according to various winning information Yes.
  This start opening prize designation command is the same as the start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start winning information in step S230-10 or S240-17 when a game ball wins the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  “Opening command for jackpot” indicates that various jackpot games (special game state) start, “MODE” is set to “E8H”, and DATA information according to the type of jackpot game Is set.
  As for the jackpot opening designation command, when various jackpot games are started, the jackpot opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S330-19. Then, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  The “round designation command” indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, “MODE” is set as “E9H”, and DATA information is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game.
  As for this round designation command, when the round game of the jackpot game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the above step S340-5 or step S340-16. In the output control process of step S800, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  The “big jacking ending designation command” indicates that various jackpot games have ended, “MODE” is set as “EAH”, and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot game. .
  As for the jackpot ending designation command, when various jackpot games are finished, the jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340-18. Then, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  The “specifying opening command for small hits” indicates that various types of small hit games (special game state) are started, “MODE” is set as “EBH”, and matches the type of small hit game. DATA information is set.
  This small hitting opening designation command indicates that when various small hit games start, the small hitting opening designation command corresponding to the type of small hit game is the transmission data for production in the main RAM 110c in step S330-19. It is set in the storage area and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  “Small end ending designation command” indicates that various types of small hit games have ended, “MODE” is set as “EBH”, and DATA information is set according to the type of small hit game Has been.
  This small hitting ending designation command is stored in the transmission data for production in the main RAM 110c when the various small hitting games are ended, in step S360-13 the small hitting ending designation command corresponding to the type of small hitting game is stored. It is set in the area and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  The “ordinary symbol memory designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the ordinary symbol hold count (G1) storage area, “MODE” is set as “ECH”, and DATA is set in accordance with the hold memory count. Information is set.
  This normal symbol storage designation command corresponds to the reserved memory number after the increase / decrease in step S250-7 or step S410-4 when the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G1) storage area increases or decreases. The normal symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  The “common symbol designation command” indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, “MODE” is set to “EDH”, and DATA information is set according to the normal symbol type. Is set.
  When the normal symbol designation command is determined, and the normal symbol variation display is started, the universal symbol designation command corresponding to the ordinary symbol is transmitted in the main RAM 110c in the above-described step S410-9. It is set in the storage area and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  The “ordinary pattern change designation command” indicates the change time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62, “MODE” is set to “EEH”, and DATA information according to the change time of various normal symbols. Is set.
  When the normal symbol variation display is started, the normal symbol variation designation command is stored in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S410-12. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  The “opening designation command for winning” indicates that various auxiliary games start, “MODE” is set as “EFH”, and DATA information is set according to the type of the auxiliary game. .
  The winning opening designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S410-22 when the auxiliary game is started, in accordance with the type of auxiliary game. In the output control process of step S800, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  The “winning ending designation command” indicates that various auxiliary games have ended, “MODE” is set as “EFH”, and DATA information is set according to the type of the auxiliary game. .
  The winning ending designation command is used when the various auxiliary games are finished, and in step S420-14, the winning ending designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game is stored in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  The “gaming state designation command” indicates whether or not it is a short-time gaming state or a high-probability gaming state, and “MODE” is set as “F0H”. DATA "is set.
  This game state designation command is executed at the above step S313, step S330-10, and step S350-6 at the start of the special symbol change, at the end of the special symbol change (at the start of the jackpot game) and at the end of the jackpot. A game state designation command corresponding to the state is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
  The “power-on designation command” and the “power-recovery designation command” indicate whether or not the power-on to the gaming machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, and “MODE” is “F1H”. When the main RAM 110c is initialized, “DATA” is set to “00H”, and when the main RAM 110c is not initialized, “DATA” is set to “01H to 04H”.
  The power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command correspond to the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command corresponding to the presence / absence of initialization of the main RAM 110c and the gaming state in step S10 when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  The “customer wait command” indicates that the customer wait state in which special symbols are not displayed is changed. “MODE” is set to “F1H” and DATA is set to “05H”. .
  This customer waiting command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the above step S318-3 when the customer waiting state in which the special symbol variation display is not performed, and in the output control processing in step S800. It is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  The “error designation command” indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, “MODE” is set as “F2H”, and “DATA” information is set according to the type of error.
  This error designation command is used when the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or radio wave abnormality is determined in the abnormality determination process in step S600, or when the occurrence of an abnormal winning is determined in the winning confirmation process in step S260. When the occurrence of an illegal prize is determined in the winning opening detection switch input process or the second start opening detection switch input process in step S240, or when the occurrence of a right-handed error is determined in the gate detection switch input process in step S250 The error designation command corresponding to the type of error is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.
(Main process of production control unit)
The main process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the main process of the effect control unit 130m.
  When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.
  In step E10, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting the timer interrupt, and performs an initialization process in step E20. In this processing, the sub CPU 130a reads a main processing program from the sub ROM 130b in response to power-on, initializes a flag and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c, and performs processing such as initial setting.
  In step E30, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission for permitting the timer interrupt, and in step E40, performs sub-random number update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.
(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interruption process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 130m. A clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130m, thereby executing a timer interrupt process described below.
  In step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area, and in step E120, performs a timer update process. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.
  In step E130, the sub CPU 130a performs input control processing. In this input control process, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs a process of setting predetermined data when there is an input. .
  In step E150, the sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. In this command analysis process, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not various commands are transmitted from the main control board 110, and when the various commands are transmitted, the received commands are received in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Process to store in.
  In step E200, the sub CPU 130a performs notification control processing. In this notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and performs various events (power-on, power-up recovery, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, frame opening, dish full, dispensing abnormality, Right-handed error etc.) is determined whether or not a command indicating the occurrence or end of the command is received, and if it is received, processing for starting the notification of the event corresponding to the command is performed, or the occurrence event is notified Or perform processing to end. The notification control process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E350, the sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process. In this gaming state update process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a gaming state designation command is received, and when it is received, the game stored in the sub RAM 130c. Process to update the status.
  In step E400, the sub CPU 130a performs a hold information update process. In this hold information update process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a special symbol memory designation command or a normal symbol memory designation command has been received. The number of first special symbol hold, the number of second special symbol hold, the number of normal symbol hold, etc. stored in the RAM 130c are updated, or the number of the first special symbol hold, the second special symbol hold, the normal symbol hold after the update. A process of setting an icon display command corresponding to the number in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed.
  In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs prefetch effect processing. In this pre-reading effect process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a start opening winning designation command is received. Process for executing a pre-reading notice effect that predicts (suggests) that a jackpot (game) or a jackpot (game) may occur before the symbol display (variation effect) starts I do.
  Specifically, a predetermined notice effect (display of a notice image, over one or a plurality of change displays executed before the start of the change display (variation effect) of the special symbol corresponding to the start opening prize designation command is started. Continuous notice effect that changes the background image, etc., hold change notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command to a special mode different from the normal mode, during jackpot game (during a specific round game) , During ending, etc.) processing for executing a jackpot notice or the like for performing a predetermined notice effect (display of a notice image, change of background image, etc.) is performed.
  In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a first effect process. In the first effect process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to produce an effect symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol confirmation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round designation command. , Determine whether or not a jackpot ending designation command, a small hitting opening designation command, a small hitting ending designation command, and the like, and if it is received, execute an effect corresponding to the received command Process to do. The first effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs a second effect process. In the second effect process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and determines a common figure designation command, a common figure variation designation command, a normal symbol confirmation command, a winning opening designation command, and a winning ending designation command. Is received, and if it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.
  In step E850, the sub CPU 130a performs information setting processing. In this information setting process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an adjustment mode notification command is received from the display control unit 140. A process of setting information on whether the brightness adjustment is possible or not in the sub-RAM 130c is performed. The information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E860, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting process. In this customer waiting process, the sub CPU 130a promotes playing a game to the player when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without executing the special symbol variation display (variation effect). Process to execute a waiting-to-stand effect for making an appeal of the machine). The customer waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E870, the sub CPU 130a performs a first operation reception process. In the first operation reception process, the sub CPU 130a adjusts the volume of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the sound output device 9 when the player operates the cross key 19 (input reception unit). The process which receives operation for performing is performed. The first operation reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E880, the sub CPU 130a performs a second operation reception process. In the second operation reception process, the sub CPU 130a operates the back of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) by the operation of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) by the player. A process of receiving an operation for adjusting the luminance (also referred to as illuminance, brightness, light amount) of the lamp (LED) of the light (LED), the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 is performed. The second operation reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E900, the sub CPU 130a performs output control processing. In this output control process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data or transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display control unit 140 or the lamp control unit 150. Do.
  In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.
(Notification control processing of production control unit)
The notification control process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a notification control process in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E210, the sub CPU 130a performs a power-on notification control process. In this power-on notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received. A notification start command for turning on the power is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.
  Further, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a notification time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the notification start command for turning on the power is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. A notification end command for input is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. With these processes, a power-on notification start command and a power-on notification end command are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the occurrence of power-on is generated using the image display device and the audio output device 9. A power-on notification for notification is executed.
  In step E220, the sub CPU 130a performs power supply restoration notification control processing. In this power recovery notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a power recovery designation command has been received. A notification start command for power restoration is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.
  Further, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a notification time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the notification start command for power restoration is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. A notification end command for restoration is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. Through these processes, a notification start command for power recovery and a notification end command for power recovery are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the occurrence of power recovery using the image display device and the audio output device 9 is performed. A power restoration notification for notification is executed.
  In step E230, the sub CPU 130a performs an illegal winning notification control process. In the unauthorized winning notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error winning command for unauthorized winning is received. As a result, a notification start command for illegal winning is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.
  In addition, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a notification time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since setting the notification start command for unauthorized winning in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. An award notification end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. By these processes, a notification start command for illegal winning and a notification end command for illegal winning are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the audio output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is turned on. An illegal prize error notification is used to notify the occurrence of an illegal prize.
  In step E240, the sub CPU 130a performs an abnormal winning notification control process. In the abnormal winning notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error winning command for abnormal winning is received, and when it is received, the abnormal winning occurs. As a result, an abnormal winning notification start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.
  Further, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a notification time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the notification start command for abnormal winning is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. An award notification end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. With these processes, an abnormal winning notification start command and an abnormal winning notification end command are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the audio output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is turned on. An abnormal winning error notification is used to notify the occurrence of an abnormal winning.
  In step E250, the sub CPU 130a performs a magnetic abnormality notification control process. In this magnetic abnormality notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error designation command for magnetic abnormality has been received. As a result, a notification start command for magnetic abnormality is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.
  Further, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a notification time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the notification start command for magnetic abnormality is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. An abnormal notification end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. Through these processes, a notification start command for magnetic abnormality and a notification end command for magnetic abnormality are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the audio output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is turned on. The error notification of the magnetic abnormality for informing the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality is executed.
  In step E260, the sub CPU 130a performs a radio wave abnormality notification control process. In this radio wave abnormality notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error designation command for radio wave abnormality has been received. As a result, a radio wave abnormality notification start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.
  Further, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a notification time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the notification start command for radio wave abnormality has been set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. An abnormal notification end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. Through these processes, a radio wave abnormality notification start command and a radio wave abnormality notification end command are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the audio output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is turned on. The error notification of the radio wave abnormality is used to notify the occurrence of the radio wave abnormality.
  In step E270, the sub CPU 130a performs a frame opening notification control process. In this frame release notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error designation command for frame release has been received. As a result, a frame opening notification start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.
  In addition, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error release designation command for frame release has been received. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. Through these processes, a frame opening notification start command and a frame opening notification end command are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the audio output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is turned on. An error notification of frame opening is used to notify the occurrence of frame opening.
  In step E280, the sub CPU 130a performs a payout abnormality notification control process. In this payout abnormality notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error designation command for payout abnormality has been received. If it has been received, a payout abnormality has occurred. As a result, a notice start command for payout abnormality is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.
  Further, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a payout abnormality error cancellation designation command has been received. The notification end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Through these processes, a payout abnormality notification start command and a payout abnormality notification end command are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the audio output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is turned on. The error notification of the payout abnormality is performed to notify the occurrence of the payout abnormality by using it.
  In step E290, the sub CPU 130a performs a full abnormality notification control process. In this full abnormality notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error specification command for full abnormality has been received, and if it has been received, a full abnormality has occurred. As a result, a notification start command for full abnormality is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.
  Further, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error canceling designation command for full error has been received. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result of these processes, a notification start command for full abnormality and a notification end command for full abnormality are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the audio output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is turned on. The error notification of the full abnormality is performed to notify the occurrence of the full abnormality.
  In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs a right-handed error notification control process. In this right-handed error notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a right-handed error designation command has been received. As a result, a right start error notification start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.
  The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a notification time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the notification start command for right-handed error was set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. An error notification end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. Through these processes, a right-start error notification start command and a right-hand error notification end command are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the audio output device 9, and the notification LED 10a. Error notification of a right-handed error is performed to notify the occurrence of a right-handed error using one of them. When this process ends, the current notification control process ends.
(Correspondence table)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a correspondence table showing correspondence at the time of occurrence of an event to be notified. As shown in FIG. 48, the correspondence table includes a type of the generated event, a notification start condition for starting notification of the generated event, and a transmission command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m when the notification start condition is satisfied. A notification end condition for ending the notification of the generated event, a transmission command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m when the notification end condition is satisfied, a priority between the events, and a notification of each generated event. A remark indicating the type of volume to be referred to when performing is associated.
  The priority order of each event is set so as to decrease in the order of power-on, power recovery, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, frame opening, payout abnormality, dish full, and right-handed error. In this embodiment, power-on, power-on recovery, illegal prizes, abnormal prizes, magnetic abnormalities, and radio wave abnormalities are positioned as important events with a high degree of alertness (which may threaten the security of gaming machines). , Opening a frame, abnormal payout, full dish, and right-handed error as normal events that are less vigilant (important) or less likely to compromise the security of the gaming machine than important events Yes.
  Note that the positions of important events and normal events are set in advance. For example, frame opening or payout abnormality may be positioned as an important event, or the effect button 17 or the cross key The position of each event may be arbitrarily set and changed on the game store side by an operation of the input receiving unit such as 19.
  Further, the types of volume set in the remarks column will be described. “Fixed volume value” means a volume output depending on (corresponding to) a fixed volume value (“6”) described later. The “variable volume value” means a volume output depending on (corresponding to) a volume value (“0” to “5”) described later. In other words, the sound output device 9 outputs the notification sound of the occurrence event at a volume (value) where the fixed volume value is larger than the variable volume value.
(First effect processing of the effect control unit)
The first effect process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a first effect process in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E610, the sub CPU 130a loads the value of the effect process data, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded effect process data, and if the effect process data = 0, the sub CPU 130a performs the change effect start process (step E620). If the effect process data = 1, the process moves to the changing effect processing (step E640). If the effect process data = 2, the process moves to the change effect end process (step E660), and the effect process data = 3. If so, the process is shifted to the jackpot effect start process (step E680). If the effect process data = 4, the process shifts to the mid-hit effect process (step E700). The process is shifted to step E720), and if the effect process data = 6, the small hit effect process (step E740) is performed. The transfer.
  Since this “effect processing data” is set as necessary in each subroutine of the first effect processing as will be described later, the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed.
(Variation production start processing of production control unit)
The variation effect start process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the fluctuating effect start process in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E621, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an effect symbol designation command has been received. If it is determined that it has not been received (step E621: No). If the process proceeds to step E623 and it is determined that the process is received (step E621: Yes), the received effect designating command is stored (moved) in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E622.
  In step E623, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a special symbol variation pattern designation command has been received, and determines that it has not been received (step E623: No). If it is determined that the present variation effect start processing has been completed and received (step E623: Yes), the received variation pattern designation command for the special symbol is transmitted to a predetermined RAM 130c in step E624. Store (move) in the storage area.
  In step E625, the sub CPU 130a refers to the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the two commands of the effect symbol designation command and the special symbol variation pattern designation command have been normally received, and determines that the command has been normally received. In the case (step E625: Yes), the process is transferred to step E626. When it is determined that the reception is not normal (step E625: No), the process is transferred to step E632.
  In step E626, the sub CPU 130a performs variable effect pattern determination processing. In this variation effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 130a determines a variation effect pattern when the effect symbol 70a is variably displayed based on a variation symbol designation command for a special symbol stored in the variation effect command storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Process to do. The variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E627, the sub CPU 130a performs a symbol pattern determination process. In this symbol pattern determination process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process for determining a symbol pattern when the effect symbol 70a is variably displayed based on the effect symbol designation command stored in the variable effect command storage area of the sub RAM 130c. . The symbol pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E628, the sub CPU 130a performs a notice effect determination process 1. In the notice effect determination process 1, the sub CPU 130a definitely notifies (notifies) that it will be a jackpot based on a design symbol designation command, a variable effect pattern, etc. A process of determining whether or not to execute a single notification effect (corresponding to a notification effect) such as a certain change confirmation effect to be performed or determining a type (effect mode) of the one notification effect to be performed is performed. The notice effect determination process 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E629, the sub CPU 130a performs the notice effect determination process 2. In this notice effect determination process 2, the sub CPU 130a decides whether or not to execute a notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of being a big hit based on a variation effect pattern, a design pattern, etc. The process which determines the production | generation aspect (type) of is performed.
  In step E630, the sub CPU 130a performs the notice effect determination process 3. In the notice effect determination process 3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the roulette effect for notifying the progress and result (expected degree of big hit, etc.) of the variable effect pattern, and the roulette effect to be executed. A process of determining a production mode (type) is performed.
  In step E631, the sub CPU 130a sets “1” in the effect process data, prepares to move the process to the above-described process of varying effect, and ends the present variation effect start process.
  In step E632, the sub CPU 130a clears the effect symbol designation command and / or the special symbol variation pattern designation command stored in the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, when the effect symbol designating command and the special symbol variation pattern designation command are not normally received, the effect symbol 70a cannot be appropriately displayed (variable effect), so the effect symbol designation The command and the special pattern variation pattern designation command are erased as a set so that the present variation effect is not executed. When this process ends, the current variation effect start process ends.
(Change control pattern determination process of effect control unit)
The variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the variation effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E626-1, the sub CPU 130a checks the special pattern variation pattern designation command stored in the variation effect command storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E626-2, the variation effect pattern determination random value. In step E626-3, the current effect mode stored in the effect mode information storage area of the sub RAM 130c is confirmed.
  In step E626-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode B for the normal gaming state. If the effect mode B is not (step E626-4: No), the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect effect mode B is step E626-4. 52, the variation effect pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 52 is selected. When the effect mode B is selected (step E626-4: Yes), the change effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 53 is shown in step E626-6. 2 is selected. The variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.
  In step E626-7, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variation effect pattern determination table, determines the variation effect pattern based on the variation effect pattern designation command and the variation effect pattern determination random value, and in step E626-8. The determined variation effect pattern is stored in the variation effect pattern storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.
  In step E626-9, the sub CPU 130a sets a variation effect pattern command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the variable effect pattern command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900.
  In step E626-10, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect time corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the variable effect time timer, and in step E626-11, the variable effect data (effect contents) corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern. The presence / absence of the operation effect, the start time of the operation effect, the presence / absence of the promotion effect, the start time of the promotion effect, etc.) are set, and the present variation effect pattern determination process is terminated.
(Variation production pattern determination table)
52 and 53 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table referred to when a variation effect pattern is determined. FIG. 52 is a variation effect pattern determination table 1 that is referred to when changing the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a in the effect mode A and the effect mode C. FIG. 53 shows the special symbol and the effect symbol in the effect mode B. It is the fluctuation production pattern determination table 2 referred when performing the fluctuation display of 70a.
  The variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 correspond to the variation pattern designation command, the selection rate based on the random effect pattern determination random number acquired in step E626-2, and the special symbol variation display. As a reference, the contents of the effects corresponding to the change pattern designation command and the contents of the effects of fluctuation (corresponding to the effects of the fluctuation effect) are described for reference. ing.
  Here, the “reach roll” of the variation production content is a reach production production that dictates whether or not a reach is formed. Specifically, it is the same in the left and right fluctuation display areas. Holds the normal design effect that makes it appear whether or not the production design 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped) or the production design 70a stopped in the left or right variation display area in the previous variation display without varying the display. Then, after the next variation display is started, the symbol hold effect that produces the effect that the same design symbol 70a as the symbol held is stopped (temporarily stopped), the temporary stop and re-variation of the effect symbol are 1 Examples include a pseudo-continuous effect that is repeated once or a plurality of times, a stage effect that is repeated once or a plurality of times so as to step up and / or step down a predetermined effect display stage.
  The “reach effect” of the change effect content is a state where the same effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display regions, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed at high speed and / or in the central variable display region. Or the effect which carries out a variable display (scroll) at low speed.
  The “SP reach” is an effect that has a higher expectation of jackpot than the reach effect as described above, and a special variable display is performed on the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area that is not temporarily stopped. An effect that displays a special character.
“SP reach A” is a reach effect set so that the expectation of jackpot is the lowest among SP reach A to C.
“SP reach B” is a reach production set such that the expectation of jackpot is higher than SP reach A and the expectation of jackpot is lower than SP reach C.
“SP reach C” is a reach effect set so that the expectation of jackpot is the highest among SP reach A to C.
  The “SPSP reach” is an effect that is performed after the SP reach as described above and has a higher jackpot expectation than the SP reach. As a result of the SP reach, the effect design 70a of the central variable display area temporarily stopped as a result. Is re-variable, and then the special symbol is displayed on the effect symbol 70a in the central variation display area which has been re-variable thereafter, or a special character is displayed. In this embodiment, only one type of SPSP reach is set, but a plurality of types may be set so that the degree of expectation of jackpot is different.
  Further, the “operation effect” of the variable effect content is the effect button 17 during an effective period (effective time) in which the effect button 17 (effect button detection switch 17a) is valid for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds). This refers to an effect that is executed when an operation is detected.
  Specifically, based on the operation of the effect button 17, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays an effect image suggesting a degree of expectation that is a big hit. An effect of operating the effect and / or the movable effect member 73 in a predetermined manner is executed. In the present embodiment, even when the operation of the effect button 17 is not detected during the effective period, the same effect as when the operation of the effect button 17 is detected is executed.
“Operation effect A” is an operation effect that is set so that the effect button 17 does not perform an upward popping operation during the effective period of the effect button 17.
“Operation effect B” is an operation effect that is set so that the effect button 17 performs an upward popping operation during the effective period of the effect button 17.
The pop-up operation of the effect button 17 may be executed over the effective period from the occurrence of the effective period, or may be executed when the effective period occurs.
  The “promotional effect” is an effect (re-lottery effect) that asks whether or not the type of jackpot game is promoted, and specifically, a combination of the temporarily stopped performance symbols 70a (a jackpot result mode). It is a rebirth effect that encourages whether or not a jackpot game with low value for the player is promoted to a jackpot game that is advantageous (high value) for the player. If it is not promoted, the jackpot game with low value for the player The combination of effect symbols 70a (a jackpot result mode) for generating a game is stopped and displayed, and in the case of promotion, the combination of effect symbols 70a (a jackpot result mode) for generating a jackpot game having a high value for the player is stopped and displayed.
“Promotion effect A” is a promotion effect in which the result of whether or not the type of jackpot game is promoted without the effective period of the effect button 17 being generated is derived.
In the “promotional effect B”, an effective period (for example, 1.5 seconds) of the effect button 17 occurs, and whether or not the type of jackpot game is promoted according to the operation timing of the effect button 17 or the end timing of the effective period. This is a promotion effect that derives the result.
“Promotion effect C” suggests that the jackpot type will be promoted after deriving a result indicating (notifying) that the type of jackpot game will not be promoted without the effective period of the effect button 17 being generated (notification) This is a promotion effect that derives the result.
  In addition, “cut-in” refers to a cut-in effect that displays an effect image suggesting a degree of expectation that is a big hit on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Say. It should be noted that the cut-in effect of the present embodiment is set to be executed immediately before the result of whether or not a big win is derived (predetermined time).
  As a feature of the variation effect pattern determination table of the present embodiment, in the variation effect pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 52, the operation effects A to C and the promotion effect B using the effect button 17 are executed, whereas FIG. In the variation effect pattern determination table 2 shown in FIG. 4, the operation effects A to C and the promotion effect B using the effect button 17 are not executed. By doing in this way, when the player operates the effect button 17 and selects the effect mode B, the change effect pattern is determined from the change effect pattern determination table 2, so that the special symbol and the change of the effect symbol 70a are changed. It is possible to meet the demands of the player who feels that the operation of the effect button 17 being displayed is troublesome or embarrassed.
(Design pattern determination process of production control unit)
The design pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a symbol pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E627-1, the sub CPU 130a checks the effect designating command stored in the variable effect command storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E627-2, it is stored in the variable effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 130c. In step E627-3, a random number value for symbol pattern determination is acquired, and in step E627-4, a symbol pattern determination table shown in FIG. 55 is selected. The symbol pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E627-5, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected symbol pattern determination table, determines a symbol pattern (scenario) based on the effect symbol designation command and the symbol pattern determination random value, and in step E627-6. The determined symbol pattern is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 130c.
  In step E627-7, the sub CPU 130a sets a symbol pattern command corresponding to the determined symbol pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, it is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900.
  In step E627-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined symbol pattern has a promotion effect during the round, and if there is no promotion effect during the round (step E627-8: No), When the symbol pattern determination process is completed and there is a promotion effect during the round (step E627-8: Yes), the promotion effect flag during the round is set at step E627-9, and the current symbol pattern determination process is performed. finish.
  The promotion effect during the round is a promotion effect (rank-up effect) that is executed during the jackpot game, from a disadvantageous (low value) jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player (high value) to a jackpot game. This is an effect that asks whether or not to be promoted. For example, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is used.
(Design pattern determination table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a symbol pattern determination table that is referred to when a symbol pattern is determined.
  As shown in FIG. 55, the symbol pattern determination table includes an effect symbol designation command, a variation effect pattern type, a selection rate based on a random number value for symbol pattern determination, a symbol pattern (scenario) type, and a promotion during the round. The presence / absence of a production is associated, and a symbol stop example corresponding to the symbol pattern is described as a reference.
  The design pattern includes a pattern pattern corresponding to a variation effect pattern that does not include a promotion effect (a symbol that does not include “→” in the column of the symbol stop example), and a pattern pattern that corresponds to a variation effect pattern that includes a promotion effect (a symbol). In the stop example column, “→” is set), and combinations of effect symbols 70a that are stopped and displayed in the process of variable display are set for each symbol pattern.
  The symbol stop example will be specifically described. For example, in the case of “2, 2 ± 1, 2”, the effect symbol 70a of “2” is stopped and displayed in the left and right fluctuation display areas, and the center is displayed. This means that the ± 2 effect symbol 70a of “2”, that is, the effect symbol 70a of “1” or “3” is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display area.
  In addition, as in the pattern pattern 2, “2, 2 ± 1, 2” “4, 4 ± 1, 4” “6, 6 ± 1, 6” “8, 8 ± 1, 8” If a plurality of combinations of effect symbols 70a are described without sandwiching “→”, it means that any combination of effect symbols 70a is selected. Note that “→” means re-variation executed in the promotion effect.
  In the case of “3, 3, 3” → “7, 7, 7”, stop display (temporary display is performed with “3” effect symbols 70 a aligned in the left, center, and right variation display areas. It means that it will change again after being stopped), and as a result, it will be stopped (temporarily stopped or fully stopped) with the “7” effect symbols 70a aligned in the left, center and right change display areas. Yes.
  As a first feature of the symbol pattern determination table of the present embodiment, when a loss occurs as a result of the occurrence of reach in the variation display (variation effect), the number is even than the symbol pattern in which the reach due to the odd number of representation symbols occurs. One of the points is that it is easier to select a symbol pattern in which reach by the effect symbol occurs.
  In addition, as a second feature of the symbol pattern determination table according to the present embodiment, a symbol pattern in which a reach due to an effect symbol of “7” occurs is more easily selected in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss. There are some points.
  In addition, as a third feature of the symbol pattern determination table of the present embodiment, a jackpot game advantageous to the player (high value) (substantially 16 rounds of 16 rounds probable jackpot game, substantially 13Rs of 16 rounds probable change) When the jackpot game is generated, a symbol pattern in which the combination of the effect symbols 70a of “7, 7, 7” is stopped is selected, but when a jackpot game with a lower value is generated, , “7, 7, 7” combination of effect symbols 70a is not stopped and displayed.
(Preliminary effect determination processing 1 of the effect control unit)
The notice effect determination process 1 of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the notice effect determination process 1 in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E628-1, the sub CPU 130a confirms the effect designating command stored in the change effect command storage area of the sub RAM 130c and the change effect pattern stored in the change effect pattern storage area. In E628-2, a random number for determining a definite effect is acquired.
  In step E628-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state. If it is not the short-time gaming state (step E628-3: No), When the finalized effect determination table 1 shown in FIG. 57 (a) is selected and the game is in the short-time gaming state (step E628-3: Yes), in step E628-5, the finalized effect determination shown in FIG. 57 (b) is determined. Select table 2. The determination table for the confirmed effect will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E628-6, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected finalized effect determination table, and determines the finalized effect pattern based on the generated design designation command, the variable effect pattern, and the finalized effect random number. In addition, the pattern of a definite effect is an execution aspect of the definite effect (equivalent to a notification effect) which announces (notifies) decisively that it is a big hit.
  In step E628-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final effect pattern is a final effect execution pattern for executing the final effect, and if it is not the final effect pattern for executing the final effect (step E628). -7: No), the process moves to step E628-9, and in the case of a confirmed effect pattern for executing the confirmed effect (step E628-7: Yes), the confirmed effect determined in step E628-8. A pattern command of a definite effect corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the pattern command of the definite effect is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900.
  In step E628-9, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random number value for determining the probability change confirmed effect, and in step E628-10, selects the probability change confirmed effect determination table shown in FIG. The decision table for the probability variation confirmed effect will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E628-11, the sub CPU 130a refers to the determination table of the selected probability variation effect, and determines the probability variation effect pattern based on the effect designating command, the variation effect pattern, and the random number for determining the probability variation effect. To do. In addition, the pattern of the probability change effect is an execution mode of the probability change effect (corresponding to the notification effect) for definitive notification (notification) that the probability change jackpot is reached.
  In step E628-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined probability change effect pattern is a probability change confirmation effect execution pattern for executing the probability change effect effect, and the probability change effect effect pattern for executing the probability change effect effect is determined. If it is not (step E628-12: No), the current notice effect determination processing 1 is terminated, and if it is a pattern of the probability change confirmed effect for executing the probability change confirmed effect (step E628-12: Yes), step In E628-13, a pattern command for the probability change effect corresponding to the determined probability change effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current notice effect determination processing 1 ends. As a result, the pattern command of the probability change effect is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900.
(Decision production decision table)
FIG. 57 (a) is a diagram showing the determined effect determination table 1 that is referred to when determining the determined effect pattern in the non-short game state, and FIG. 57 (b) is in the time-short game state. It is a figure which shows the determination table 2 of the fixed effect referred when determining a fixed effect pattern.
  As shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), in the finalized effect determination table, the execution rate of the finalized effect and the finalized effect of the finalized effect designating command, the variable effect pattern, and the random number for determining the finalized effect are displayed. The execution location selection rate is associated.
  The execution location of the confirmed effect is the first frame of the change start, which is the timing at which the first frame image is displayed when the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) starts changing display of the effect symbol 70a. When the reach effect is started on the one image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first frame at the start of reach, which is the timing when the first frame image is displayed, and the SP reach on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The first frame of the SP reach start, which is the timing at which the first frame image is displayed when the effect is started, and the first frame when the SPSP reach effect is started on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The first frame of SPSP reach start, which is the timing at which the image is displayed, is set.
  The confirmed effect pattern 0 is a confirmed effect pattern in which the confirmed effect is not executed, and the confirmed effect pattern 1 is a confirmed effect pattern in which the confirmed effect is executed in the first frame of the fluctuation start. 2 is a confirmed effect pattern in which the confirmed effect is executed in the first frame of the reach start, and a confirmed effect pattern 3 is a pattern of the confirmed effect in which the confirmed effect is executed in the first frame of the SP reach start. The confirmed effect pattern 4 is a confirmed effect pattern in which the confirmed effect is executed in the first frame of the SPSP reach start.
  Here, when execution of the finalized effect is determined, the air blower 21 is activated at the determined execution timing (execution location), and wind (air) is directed toward the player's hand from the air outlet 15d of the firing handle 15. ) Is transmitted, a definite effect (fan effect) is executed. An example of the confirmed effect will be described later.
  As a first feature of the determination table for the confirmed effect according to the present embodiment, it is preferable to refer to the determination table 2 for the confirmed effect rather than to determine the pattern for the confirmed effect with reference to the decision table 1 for the confirmed effect. The point is set so that the execution rate of the confirmed effect is higher when the pattern is determined.
  By doing so, the definite effect is executed with a higher probability in the short-time game state (probability variation game state) than in the normal game state, and the game while maintaining the rarity of the definite effect in the normal game state It is possible to improve the interest of the short game state when it is desired to proceed with crispness. Note that the execution probabilities of the confirmed effects may be set to be the same in the normal gaming state and the short-time gaming state, or may be in the opposite relationship.
  As a second feature of the finalized effect determination table of the present embodiment, the finalized effect is determined with reference to the finalized effect determination table 2 rather than when the finalized effect pattern is determined with reference to the finalized effect determination table 1. In the case where the pattern is determined, the fixed effect is set so that it is easier to execute at the earlier stage (stage) of the variable display (variable effect).
  In this way, in the normal gaming state, the confirmed effect is easily executed at a time when the variable display is late, and in the short-time gaming state (probability variable gaming state), the confirmed effect is easily executed at an early time of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of delay in the short-time gaming state (probability varying gaming state) while pulling the player's expectation for the jackpot game in the normal gaming state until the time when the variation display is late. In addition, the execution time of the definite effect may be set similarly in the normal game state and the short-time game state, or may be set so as to have an opposite relationship.
(Decision table for certain change confirmation production)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a decision table for a probability variation confirmed effect that is referred to when a probability variation confirmed effect pattern is determined.
  As shown in FIG. 58, the decision table of the certainty-change confirmation effect includes the execution rate of the certainty-change confirmation effect and the selection rate of the execution place of the certainty-change confirmation effect based on the production symbol designation command, the fluctuation effect pattern, and the random number for determining the certainty confirmation effect. Are associated with each other.
  The execution location of the certainty change confirmation effect is the first frame at the start of variation, which is the timing at which the first frame image is displayed when the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) starts the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. When the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) starts a reach effect, the first frame of the reach start, which is the timing at which the first frame image is displayed, the SP on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The first frame of the SP reach start, which is the timing at which the first frame image is displayed when the reach effect is started, and one frame when the SPSP reach effect is started on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The first frame of SPSP reach start, which is the timing at which the eye image is displayed, is set.
  As another execution location, an effect operation is performed to indicate that the movable effect member 73 is a big hit when the effect symbol 70a variably displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) shifts to the full rotation reach effect. The first frame of the winning action that is the timing at which the first frame image is displayed, and the first frame when the movable effect member 73 performs a predetermined effect operation when the operation effect described above is executed. The first frame of the effect effect operation, which is the timing at which the image is displayed, and the first frame of promotion confirmation, which is the timing at which the first frame image is displayed when the jackpot game is promoted in the above-described promotion effect. Eyes are set.
  The probability variation confirmed effect pattern 0 is a probability variation confirmed effect pattern in which the probability variation confirmed effect is not executed, and the probability variation confirmed effect pattern 1 is a probability variation confirmed effect pattern in which the probability variation confirmed effect is executed in the first frame of the variation start. Yes, the probability variation finalization pattern 2 is a probability variation finalization effect pattern in which the probability variation finalization effect is executed at the first frame of reach reach, and the probability variation finalization pattern 3 is the probability variation in the first frame of the feature correct operation. Probability confirmation effect pattern 4 in which the confirmation effect is executed. Probability confirmation effect pattern 4 is a probability change effect effect pattern in which the probability change effect effect is executed in the first frame of the SP reach. Reference numeral 5 denotes a probability change effect production pattern in which a probability change effect production pattern is executed in the first frame of the SPSP reach start. Reference numeral 6 denotes a probability change confirmation effect pattern in which the probability change effect effect is executed in the first frame of the effect effect operation. The probability change effect effect pattern 7 is a probability change effect in which the probability change effect effect is executed in the first frame of promotion confirmation. It is a pattern of definite production.
  Here, when execution of the probability change effect is determined, the light emitting device 15c of the handle emits light in a predetermined manner at the determined execution timing (execution location), and a predetermined definite sound (from the audio output device 9). The output of “Cuincuin”) is executed, and the certainty change effect (light emission effect) is executed. An example of the probable change confirmation effect will be described later.
  As a first feature of the decision table of the probability variation effect production of the present embodiment, the probability change confirmation effect is set to be easier to execute at a later time (stage) than an earlier time (stage) of the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect). There are some points. Therefore, pulling the player's expectation for jackpot game to the time when the variable display is late improves the interest of the variable display, and the joy that becomes a promising big hit than when the positive change finalizing effect is executed early in the variable display And a sense of relief.
(Processing during variation production of production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 59, the processing during variation effect of the effect control unit 130 m will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing processing during fluctuating effects in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E641, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a condition for generating an effective period during which the operation of the effect button 17 (the effect button detection switch 17a) is effective is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined based on whether or not the variation effect pattern includes the operation effect and the promotion effect B, and whether or not the variation effect time is a time for executing the operation effect and the promotion effect B.
  The sub CPU 130a moves the process to step E646 when the effective period generation condition is not satisfied (step E641: No), and when the effective period generation condition is satisfied (step E641: Yes). In step E642, an effective period timer for measuring the generation period of the effective period and an effective period flag indicating that an effective period has occurred are set.
  In step E643, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a valid period for executing the pop-out operation of the effect button 17. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not it is an effective period for executing the operation effect B. If it is not an effective period for executing the pop-up operation of the effect button 17 (step E643: No), in step E644, a normal operation promotion command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the process during this variable effect is ended. If it is an effective period for executing the pop-out operation of the effect button 17 (step E643: Yes), in step E645, a special operation promotion command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and this variation effect is being processed. The process ends.
  As a result, an operation promotion command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900. When the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 receive a normal operation promotion command, the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light is emitted in a normal manner. When the lamp control unit 150 receives a special operation promotion command, the effect button LED is caused to emit light in a special manner, and the effect button 17 is caused to perform a pop-up operation.
  In step E646, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a valid period flag indicating that a valid period has occurred. If there is no valid period flag (step E646: No), the sub CPU 130a performs a process in step E655. If there is an effective period flag (step E646: Yes), the process proceeds to step E647.
  In step E647, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 17a is input. If the detection signal is input (step E647: Yes), the sub CPU 130a sets an effective period timer in step E648. If it is cleared and no detection signal is input (step E647: No), it is determined in step E649 whether or not the effective period timer is 0. If the effective period timer is not 0 (step E649: No) ) Ends the current variation effect process, and if the valid period timer is 0 (step E649: Yes), the process proceeds to step E650.
  In step E650, the sub CPU 130a clears the validity period flag. In step E651, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect to be executed is the promotion effect B. If the effect is not the promotion effect B (step E651: No), In E652, the effect mode of the operation effect for executing the operation effect is determined, and in step E653, the command of the operation effect corresponding to the determined effect mode of the operation effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and this change is performed. When the effect processing is finished and the effect is the promotion effect B (step E651: Yes), in step E654, a special operation effect command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current variation effect processing is ended. To do.
  As a result, an operation effect command or a special operation effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900.
  When the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 receive the operation effect command, the effect that configures the operation effect on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). An image is displayed or the movable effect member 73 is operated in a predetermined manner.
  When the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 receive a special operation effect command, the light emitting device 15c of the handle is similarly caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, and a predetermined definite sound (“cue-in” is output from the audio output device 9. Cuin "). That is, it can be said that the promotion effect B is equivalent to the notification effect as in the above-described probability change confirmation effect.
  In step E655, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variable effect time set in step E626-10 is 0. If the variable effect time is not 0 (step E655: No), When the variation effect processing is finished and the variation effect time is 0 (step E655: Yes), in step E656, “2” is set in the effect processing data, and the processing is shifted to the above-described variation effect end processing. Preparation is made, and the current variation production process ends.
(Big hit production start processing of the production control unit)
The jackpot effect start process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a jackpot effect start process in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E681, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a jackpot opening designation command has been received. If not received (step E681: No), If the current jackpot presentation start process is completed and received (step E681: Yes), the received opening designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E682.
  In step E683, the sub CPU 130a stores information on the number of final rounds corresponding to the jackpot type specified by the received opening designation command in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. In step E684, the sub CPU 130a refers to the sub RAM 130c and performs round processing. The presence / absence of the promotion effect flag in the middle is confirmed, and in step E685, a special game effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 61 (a) is selected. The special game effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E686, the sub CPU 130a refers to the determination table for the selected special game effect pattern, determines a special game effect pattern based on the presence of the opening designation command and the promotion effect flag during the round, and determines in step E687. The special game effect pattern is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The special game effect pattern is an execution mode of an effect executed during a big hit game or a small hit game.
  In step E688, the sub CPU 130a sets an opening effect command corresponding to the determined special game effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, an opening effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900.
  In step E689, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random number for determining the notification timing, selects a notification timing determination table shown in FIG. 61B in step E690, and selects the selected notification timing determination table in step E691. The jackpot game is of high value to the player based on the special game performance pattern and the random number for determining the notification timing (the type of jackpot game is promoted, the round game that can win the prize ball is The notification timing for definite notification (notification) is determined. The notification timing determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E692, the sub CPU 130a stores information on the notification timing at which the determined notification timing can be specified in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. In step E693, the sub CPU 130a clears the promotion effect flag in the round, and in step E694, the effect. “4” is set in the processing data, and preparations are made to shift the processing to the above-described process during the jackpot presentation, and the current jackpot presentation start process ends.
(Special game production pattern decision table)
FIG. 61A is a diagram showing a special game effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special game effect pattern.
  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), in the special game effect pattern determination table, the opening designation command, the presence / absence of the promotion effect flag during the round, and the special game effect pattern are associated with each other, and the contents of the effect are described as a reference. ing.
  The special game effect patterns 1, 3, 8, 10, and 14 are a promotion effect that directs whether or not the type of jackpot game is promoted and a continuous effect that directs whether or not a round game that can win a prize ball continues. This is a special game effect pattern for jackpot that is not executed.
Special game performance pattern 2 is that the promotion effect was executed during the interval between the closing of the grand prize opening 50 in the 7th round and the opening of the big winning opening 50 in the 8th round (as an interval). As a result, the promotion was successful. This is a jackpot effect pattern for executing a promotion success effect.
Special game performance pattern 4 is that promotion promotion was executed during the interval between the closing of the grand prize opening 50 in the 7th round and the opening of the grand prize opening 50 in the 8th round (as an interval), and as a result, the promotion failed It is a special game effect pattern for jackpots that executes a promotion failure effect that notifies (notifies) of the game.
  Special game performance patterns 5 and 11 continue to be performed during the interval between the closing of the grand prize opening 50 in the fourth round and the opening of the special winning opening 50 in the fifth round (successful as a result). In addition to performing a continuous success effect that notifies (notifies) that the event has been performed, a continuous effect is performed during the interval between the closing of the grand prize opening 50 in the 8th round and the opening of the grand prize opening in the 9th round (during the interval). As a result, it is a special game effect pattern for jackpots that executes a continuous success effect.
  The special game performance patterns 6 and 12 are continuously performed during the interval between the closing of the grand prize opening 50 in the fourth round and the opening of the special winning opening 50 in the fifth round (interval), and as a result succeeded. In addition to performing a continuous success effect that notifies (notifies) that the event has been performed, a continuous effect is performed during the interval between the closing of the grand prize opening 50 in the 8th round and the opening of the grand prize opening in the 9th round (during the interval). As a result, it is a special game effect pattern for jackpots that executes a continuation failure effect that notifies (notifies) that continuation has failed.
  The special game effect patterns 7 and 13 execute a continuous effect during the interval between the closing of the grand prize opening 50 in the fourth round and the opening of the special winning opening 50 in the fifth round, resulting in the continuous failure effect. Is a special game effect pattern for jackpot.
The special game effect pattern 9 is a special game effect pattern for jackpots that executes a probability change chance effect suggesting that there is a possibility that the game state has shifted to the probability variation game state from the opening to the ending (during the special game).
Special game effect patterns 15 and 16 are special game effect patterns for small hits that execute a probability change chance effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the game has changed to the probability-variable game state from the opening to the ending (during special game). It is.
(Notification timing decision table)
FIG. 61 (b) notifies (notifies) that the jackpot game is advantageous (high value) for the player (the type of jackpot game is promoted, and the round game where a winning ball can be obtained continues). It is a figure which shows the determination table of the notification timing referred when determining the notification timing to perform.
  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the notification timing determination table associates the special game effect pattern, the selection rate based on the notification timing determination random value, and the notification timing.
  As a feature of the notification timing determination table of the present embodiment, except when the jackpot game is started, when the promotion success effect is executed, or when the continuous success effect is executed, that is, the last branch point The notification timing is set only at the start of a round. By doing this, it is possible to effectively boost the promotion success effect and the continuous success effect while preventing the advance ballet of being a big hit game with high value for the player, and to improve the interest of the game Is possible.
(Processing during the jackpot production of the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 62, the big hit effect processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the big hit effect processing in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E701, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a round designation command has been received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. If not received (step E701: No), the current jackpot When the processing during presentation is finished and received (step E701: Yes), the number of jackpot rounds corresponding to the round designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c in step E702.
  In step E703, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not notification timing information is stored in the sub RAM 130c. If not (step E703: No), the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step E708 and stores it. If yes (step E703: Yes), the process proceeds to step E704.
  In step E704, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of jackpot rounds matches the notification timing information. If they match (step E704: Yes), the sub CPU 130a stores them in the sub RAM 130c in step E705. In step E706, a special round effect command and a special round performance command corresponding to the number of rounds are set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c and they do not match (step E704: No) In step E707, a command for a normal round effect corresponding to the special game effect pattern and the number of big hits is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.
  As a result, a special round effect command or a normal round effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900.
  In step E708, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the jackpot round number is the final round number. If the jackpot round number is not the final round number (step E708: No), the current jackpot effect processing is terminated. If the number of big hits is the final number of rounds (step E708: Yes), in step E709, “5” is set in the production data, and preparations are made to move the processing to the above-described big hit production end processing. The jackpot production process is finished.
(Information control processing of production control unit)
The information setting process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing information setting processing in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E850-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not it has received an adjustment mode notification command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 141, and receives it. In (Step E850-1: Yes), the processing is shifted to Step E850-2, and when not received (Step E850-1: No), the current information setting processing is ended.
  In step E850-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the type of the adjustment mode specified by the received adjustment mode notification command is an adjustment mode that enables volume adjustment, and is an adjustment mode that enables volume adjustment. If there is one (step E850-2: Yes), in step E850-3, the first volume indicating that the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19 (input reception unit) in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 130c. Set permission flags.
  On the other hand, when the adjustment mode is not capable of adjusting the volume (step E850-2: No), the sub-RAM 130c is determined in step E850-4 as the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 (input reception unit) is impossible. The first permission flag stored in is cleared. Note that the first permission flag is referred to in a first operation reception process described later.
  In step E850-5, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the type of the adjustment mode specified by the received adjustment mode notification command is an adjustment mode that enables luminance adjustment, and adjustment that enables luminance adjustment. In the mode (step E850-5: Yes), in step E850-6, the second permission flag indicating that the luminance can be adjusted is set in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and the current information The setting process ends.
  On the other hand, if the adjustment mode is not capable of adjusting the brightness (step E850-5: No), it is determined in step E850-7 that the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 (input reception unit) is impossible, and the sub-RAM 130c. The second permission flag stored in is cleared. Note that the second permission flag is referred to in a second operation reception process described later.
(Stage waiting process of production control unit)
The customer waiting process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting process in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E860-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a customer waiting command has been received, and if it has been received (step E860-1: Yes). If the process is not received (step E860-1: No), the process is moved to step E860-4.
  In step E860-2, the sub CPU 130a sets a waiting time for the customer waiting effect (for example, 60 seconds), which is the time until the customer waiting effect is started. In step E860-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a customer waiting start command. The data is set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 130c, and the process proceeds to step E860-13. As a result, a customer waiting start command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.
  In step E860-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the waiting for the customer waiting effect is being performed. If the waiting for the waiting for customer effect is being performed (step E860-4: Yes), the sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E860-5. If the process is shifted to not waiting for the customer waiting effect (step E860-4: No), the process shifts to step E860-9. It is determined whether the waiting time for the customer waiting effect is set or not.
  In step E860-5, the sub CPU 130a is performing adjustment operations such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment by the player (a volume value notification image OG and a luminance value notification image KG described later are displayed on the image display device). It is determined whether or not the adjustment operation is being accepted. If the adjustment operation is being accepted (step E860-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step E860-13 to accept the adjustment operation. When it is not during the period (step E860-5: No), the processing is moved to step E860-6.
  In step E860-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the waiting time of the customer waiting effect already set has elapsed, and when the waiting time of the customer waiting effect has elapsed (step E860-6: Yes). ), The process proceeds to step E860-7, and if the waiting time for the customer waiting effect has not elapsed (step E860-6: No), the process proceeds to step E860-13.
  In step E860-7, the sub CPU 130a sets an effect time (for example, 30 seconds) of the customer waiting effect, and in step E860-8, sets a start command of the customer waiting effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E860. The process is moved to -13. Thereby, a start command for the customer waiting effect is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the customer waiting effect for promoting the game to the player (applying the gaming machine) is started. Is done.
  In step E860-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the customer waiting effect is being performed. If the customer waiting effect is being performed (step E860-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step E860-10. If it is not during the customer waiting effect (step E860-9: No), the process proceeds to step E860-13. Note that whether or not the customer waiting effect is being performed is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect has been set.
  In step E860-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the already set effect time of the customer waiting effect has elapsed, and if the effect time of the customer waiting effect has elapsed (step E860-10: In Yes), the process moves to Step E860-11, and when the effect time of the customer waiting effect has not elapsed (Step E860-10: No), the process moves to Step E860-13.
  In step E860-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a waiting time for the customer waiting effect (for example, 60 seconds) in order to set the waiting for the customer waiting effect again in step E860-11. The data is set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 130c, and the process proceeds to step E860-13. Accordingly, the waiting for the customer waiting effect and the waiting for the customer waiting effect are repeated. Note that the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set here may be a time different from the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set in E860-2, for example, a time longer than 60 seconds or a shorter time.
  In step E860-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect process data referred to for branching the process in the first effect process described above is “0”, and the effect process data is “0”. If this is the case (step E860-13: Yes), the current customer waiting process is terminated, and if the effect processing data is not “0” (step E860-13: No), the first start port 45 or the first 2 As a variation effect is started based on the winning of a game ball at the start opening 47, in step E860-14, information related to the customer wait effect stored in the sub-RAM 130c (the waiting time of the customer wait effect, The waiting time for the customer waiting effect, etc.) is cleared, and the current customer waiting process is terminated.
(First operation acceptance process of the production control unit)
◇ First operation reception processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the first operation reception process in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E870-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the first determination table shown in FIG. 67 (a), and the current state is a performance sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the audio output device 9. ), It is determined whether or not the volume adjustment is possible during the volume adjustment. If the volume adjustment is possible (step E870-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step E870-2. When it is not the period during which the volume can be adjusted (step E870-1: No), the processing is moved to step E870-24. The first determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E870-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the first process number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “0”. If the first process number is “0” (step E870). -2: Yes), the process proceeds to step E870-3. If the first process number is not "0" (step E870-2: No), the process proceeds to step E870-7. This “first processing number” is a processing number indicating the progress level of the volume adjustment, and is set to “0” in the initialization processing in step E20 described above.
  In step E870-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the customer waiting effect is being waited. If the customer waiting effect is being waited (step E870-3: Yes), the sub CPU 130a is in step E870-4. The command 1 for volume adjustment guidance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the volume adjustment guidance command 1 is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the volume adjustment guidance image is displayed on the image display device, and the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 are emitted. The process for doing is performed.
  On the other hand, when the customer waiting effect is not on standby, that is, when the changing effect is on or big hit (step E870-3: No), in step E870-5, the command 2 for volume adjustment guidance is sent to the sub-RAM 130c. Set to the send buffer. Thereby, the command 2 for volume adjustment guidance is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for causing the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 to emit light is performed.
  In step E870-6, the sub CPU 130a sets “1” to the first process number stored in the sub RAM 130c, and ends the first operation acceptance process.
  In step E870-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the first processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “1”. If the first processing number is “1” (step E870). When the first process number is not “1” (step E870-7: No), the process proceeds to step E870-12.
  In step E870-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a volume adjustment start operation has been performed. If a volume adjustment start operation has been performed (step E870-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step E870-9. If there is no operation for starting volume adjustment (step E870-8: No), the first operation reception process of this time is terminated. The volume adjustment start operation here means that the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, that is, the operation of the left button or the right button is detected by the cross key detection switch 19a. .
  In step E870-9, the sub CPU 130a sets a volume adjustment start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a volume adjustment start command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process for causing the image display device to display a notification image of the volume value indicating the current volume value is performed.
  In step E870-10, the sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (eg, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (left button, right button), and in step E870-11, “2” is set to the first process number stored in the RAM 130c, and the current first operation reception process ends.
  In step E870-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the first process number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “2”. If the first process number is “2” (step E870). -12: Yes), the process proceeds to step E870-13. If the first process number is not “2” (step E870-12: No), the first operation acceptance process of this time is terminated. .
  In step E870-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an operation for decreasing the volume has been performed. When the operation for decreasing the volume has been performed (step E870-13: Yes), the process proceeds to step E870-14. If there is no operation for decreasing the volume (step E870-13: No), the process proceeds to step E870-16. Here, the volume reduction operation means that the left button of the cross key 19 has been operated, that is, the operation of the left button has been detected by the cross key detection switch 19a.
  In step E870-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a volume reduction command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Thereby, a command for decreasing the volume is transmitted to the display control unit 140, and a process of decreasing the volume value of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE) output from the audio output device 9 is performed.
  In step E870-15, the sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (left button, right button), and accepts the first operation reception this time. The process ends.
  In step E870-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an operation for increasing the volume has been performed. If the operation for increasing the volume has been performed (step E870-16: Yes), the process proceeds to step E870-17. If there is no volume increase operation (step E870-16: No), the process proceeds to step E870-19. The volume increasing operation here means that the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, that is, the operation of the right button is detected by the cross key detection switch 19a.
  In step E870-17, the sub CPU 130a sets a volume increase command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Thereby, a command for increasing the volume is transmitted to the display control unit 140, and a process for increasing the volume value of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE) output from the audio output device 9 is performed.
  In step E870-18, the sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (left button, right button), and accepts the first operation reception this time. The process ends.
  In step E870-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the operation interval monitoring time set in step E870-10, step E870-15, step E870-18, or the like has elapsed, and the operation interval monitoring time. If it has elapsed (step E870-19: Yes), the process proceeds to step E870-20, and if the operation interval monitoring time has not elapsed (step E870-19: No), The operation acceptance process is terminated.
  In step E870-20, the sub CPU 130a sets a volume adjustment end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a volume adjustment end command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process of hiding the notification image of the volume value displayed on the image display device and the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 are displayed. Processing for terminating the light emission is performed.
  In other words, the operation interval is monitored after the notification image of the volume value is displayed by the operation of the left or right button of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) (the volume adjustment start operation) received after the volume adjustment period is reached. When the operation of the left or right button of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) (the operation for decreasing the volume or the operation for increasing the volume) is not performed until the time (predetermined period) has elapsed, a notification image of the volume value is displayed. It is hidden. In addition, when an operation of the left or right button of the cross key 19 (a sound volume decreasing operation or a sound volume increasing operation) is performed in a state in which a sound volume value notification image is displayed, the operation interval is changed from the operation. When the operation of the left or right button of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) (the operation for decreasing the volume or the operation for increasing the volume) is not performed until the monitoring time (predetermined period) elapses, the notification image of the volume value Disappears. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the visual recognition of other images (effect design image, background image, volume adjustment guidance image, brightness adjustment guidance image, etc.) from being disturbed by the notification image of the volume value.
  In the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the volume value has actually decreased or increased due to the operation of the left or right button of the cross key 19 being performed while the notification image of the volume value is displayed. Since the monitoring time (predetermined time) of the operation interval is reset, the notification image of the volume value is immediately hidden even if the player operates the left or right button. It is possible to avoid making the player feel dissatisfied.
  Further, in this embodiment, even if the operation of the upper or lower button of the cross key 19 is performed in a state where the notification image of the volume value is displayed, the operation becomes invalid. Alternatively, the monitoring time (predetermined time) of the operation interval may be reset even when the down button is operated. In this way, even if the player accidentally operates the upper or lower button of the cross key 19, there is no inconvenience that the notification image of the volume value is immediately hidden, and the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling.
  In step E870-21, the sub CPU 130a sets “0” to the first processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c. Thereby, it will be in the state which cannot adjust immediately the volume value of the production sound (game sounds, such as BGM and SE) output from the audio | voice output apparatus 9. FIG. That is, during the period in which the volume value notification image is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is immediately adjusted (increased or decreased) by operating the cross key 19, but the volume value notification image is not displayed. When the cross key 19 is operated, the volume value of the effect sound is not immediately adjusted (increased or decreased).
  In step E870-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the customer waiting effect is being waited. If the customer waiting effect is not being waited (step E870-22: No), the sub CPU 130a performs the first operation of this time. When the reception process is finished and the waiting for the customer waiting effect is waiting (step E870-22: Yes), the waiting time for the waiting customer effect (for example, 60 seconds) is set in step E870-23, The first operation acceptance process is terminated.
  Thereby, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set in the customer waiting process of step E860 is reset. That is, a time (63 seconds later) that is obtained by adding the monitoring time of the operation interval (3 seconds) and the waiting time of the customer waiting effect (60 seconds) from the time when the operation of the cross key 19 was last detected in the first operation reception process. ) A customer waiting effect will be executed later. It should be noted that the customer waiting effect may be executed 60 seconds after the last detection of the operation of the cross key 19.
  In step E870-24, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the first process number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “0”. If the first process number is “0” (step E870). −24: Yes), the current first operation acceptance process is terminated, and if the first process number is not “0” (step E870-24: No), the process proceeds to step E870-25. .
  In step E870-25, the sub CPU 130a clears the operation interval monitoring time. In step E870-26, the sub CPU 130a sets a volume adjustment end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a volume adjustment end command is transmitted to the display control unit 140, and a process for hiding the volume adjustment guidance image and the volume value notification image displayed on the image display device is performed.
  In step E870-27, the sub CPU 130a sets “0” to the first process number stored in the sub RAM 130c, and ends the first operation acceptance process. That is, in the state where the guidance image for volume adjustment is displayed or the notification image for the volume value is displayed, there is a winning effect of the game ball at the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 and the variation effect is provided. When it is determined that the volume adjustment is disabled or the volume adjustment disabled period is started, such as when it is started or (error) notification of various occurrence events is started. The notification image is not displayed, and the sound volume adjustment operation cannot be performed.
  For this reason, the guidance image for volume adjustment and the notification image for the volume value are displayed on the image display device, and thus the visual recognition of the effect image for the variation effect displayed on the image display device and the notification image for the occurrence event is hindered. It becomes possible to suppress.
  It should be noted that even if the game ball has passed to the general-purpose gate 44 when the volume adjustment operation is being performed and the normal symbol variation display is started, the volume value can be adjusted. The notification image is not displayed, or the sound volume adjustment operation is not controlled.
  Further, when it is determined in step E870-8 that a volume adjustment start operation has been performed (step E870-8: Yes), the processing after step E870-9 is executed. The processing after step E870-9 may be executed without determining whether or not there has been. In this way, the volume value of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the sound output device 9 is changed (changed) by the first left or right button operation while waiting for the customer waiting effect. Is possible.
(Second operation acceptance process of the production control unit)
66, the second operation reception process of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the second operation reception process in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step E880-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the second determination table shown in FIG. 67B, and the current state is determined by the lamps of the image display device, the frame lighting device 10, and the panel lighting device 74 (see FIG. LED) or the like, it is determined whether or not it is a period for which luminance adjustment is possible. If it is a period for which luminance adjustment is possible (step E880-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step E880-2. If it is not the period in which the brightness adjustment is possible (step E880-1: No), the processing is moved to step E880-24. The second determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step E880-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the second processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “0”. If the second processing number is “0” (step E880). -2: Yes), the process proceeds to step E880-3. If the second process number is not "0" (step E880-2: No), the process proceeds to step E880-7. This “second process number” is a process number indicating the progress stage of the brightness adjustment, and is set to “0” in the initialization process of step E20.
  In step E880-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the customer waiting effect is being waited. If the customer waiting effect is being waited (step E880-3: Yes), the sub CPU 130a is in step E880-4. The command 1 for brightness adjustment guidance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the brightness adjustment guidance command 1 is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness adjustment guidance image is displayed on the image display device, and the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 are emitted. The process for doing is performed.
  On the other hand, when the customer waiting effect is not on standby (step E880-3: No), in step E880-5, command 2 for brightness adjustment guidance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. Thus, the brightness adjustment guidance command 2 is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for causing the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 to emit light is performed.
  In step E880-6, the sub CPU 130a sets “1” to the second process number stored in the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current second operation reception process.
  In step E880-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the second processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “1”. If the second processing number is “1” (step E880). When the second process number is not “1” (step E880-7: No), the process proceeds to step E880-12.
  In step E880-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a brightness adjustment start operation has been performed. If there has been a brightness adjustment start operation (step E880-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step E880-9. If the brightness adjustment start operation has not been performed (step E880-8: No), the current second operation acceptance process is terminated. The brightness adjustment start operation here means that the upper button or the lower button of the cross key 19 has been operated, that is, the operation of the upper button or the lower button has been detected by the cross key detection switch 19a. .
  In step E880-9, the sub CPU 130a sets a brightness adjustment start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a brightness adjustment start command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for causing the image display device to display a notification image of the brightness value indicating the current brightness value is performed.
  In step E880-10, the sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (up button, down button). In step E880-11, the sub CPU 130a sets the operation interval monitoring time. “2” is set to the second process number stored in the RAM 130c, and the current second operation reception process ends.
  In step E880-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the second processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “2”. If the second processing number is “2” (step E880). -12: Yes), the process proceeds to step E880-13. If the second process number is not “2” (step E880-12: No), the current second operation reception process is terminated. .
  In step E880-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an operation for decreasing the luminance has been performed. If the operation for decreasing the luminance has been performed (step E880-13: Yes), the process proceeds to step E880-14. If there is no operation for decreasing the brightness (step E880-13: No), the process proceeds to step E880-16. Here, the operation of decreasing the brightness means that the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated, that is, the operation of the lower button is detected by the cross key detection switch 19a.
  In step E880-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a command for lowering the brightness in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a command for lowering the brightness is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value of the lamp (LED) of the image display device, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 is reduced. Processing is performed.
  In step E880-15, the sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (up button, down button), and accepts the second operation acceptance this time. The process ends.
  In step E880-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there has been an operation for increasing the brightness. If there is no operation for increasing the brightness (step E880-16: No), the process proceeds to step E880-19. Here, the operation of increasing the brightness means that the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, that is, the operation of the upper button is detected by the cross key detection switch 19a.
  In step E880-17, the sub CPU 130a sets a command for increasing the luminance in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a command for increasing the brightness is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value of the lamp (LED) of the image display device, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 is increased. Processing is performed.
  In step E880-18, the sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (up button, down button), and accepts the second operation acceptance this time. The process ends.
  In step E880-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the operation interval monitoring time set in step E880-10, step E880-15, step E880-18 or the like has elapsed, and the operation interval monitoring time is determined. When the time has elapsed (step E880-19: Yes), the process proceeds to step E880-20. When the operation interval monitoring time has not elapsed (step E880-19: No), The operation acceptance process is terminated.
  In step E880-20, the sub CPU 130a sets a luminance adjustment end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a brightness adjustment end command is transmitted to the display control unit 140, and the process of not displaying the notification image of the brightness value displayed on the image display device or the process of terminating the light emission of the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 is performed. Done.
  That is, the operation interval is monitored after the notification image of the luminance value is displayed by the operation of the up or down button (brightness adjustment start operation) of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) received after the period in which the luminance adjustment is possible. When the operation of the upper or lower button (the operation for decreasing the luminance or the operation for increasing the luminance) of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) is not performed until the time (predetermined period) has elapsed, a notification image of the luminance value is displayed. It is hidden. In addition, when an operation of the upper or lower button of the cross key 19 (an operation for decreasing the luminance or an operation for increasing the luminance) is performed in a state where the notification image of the luminance value is displayed, the operation interval is changed from the operation. When the operation of the up or down button of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) (the operation for decreasing the brightness or the operation for increasing the brightness) is not performed until the monitoring time (predetermined period) elapses, the brightness value notification image is displayed. Disappears. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the visual recognition of other images (effect design image, background image, volume adjustment guide image, brightness adjustment guide image, etc.) from being disturbed by the notification image of the brightness value.
  In the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the luminance value is actually decreased or increased by operating the up or down button of the cross key 19 in a state where the luminance value notification image is displayed. Because the monitoring time (predetermined time) of the operation interval is reset, the brightness value notification image is immediately hidden even though the player has operated the up or down button. It is possible to avoid making the player feel dissatisfied.
  Further, in this embodiment, even if the operation of the left or right button of the cross key 19 is performed while the notification image of the luminance value is displayed, the operation becomes invalid, but the left of the cross key 19 Alternatively, the operation interval monitoring time (predetermined time) may be reset even when the right button is operated. In this way, even if the player accidentally operates the left or right button of the cross key 19, there is no inconvenience that the notification image of the brightness value is immediately hidden, and the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling.
  In step E880-21, the sub CPU 130a sets “0” to the second processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the brightness values of the lamps (LEDs) of the image display device, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 cannot be adjusted immediately. That is, the luminance value can be immediately adjusted (increased / decreased) during the period in which the luminance value notification image is displayed, but the luminance value is immediately adjusted (increased / decreased) during the period in which the luminance value notification image is not displayed. ) You can't do that.
  In step E880-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the customer waiting effect is being waited. If the customer waiting effect is not waiting (step E880-22: No), When the reception process is finished and the waiting for the customer waiting effect is waiting (step E880-22: Yes), the waiting time for the waiting customer effect (for example, 60 seconds) is set in step E880-23, The second operation acceptance process is terminated.
  Thereby, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set in the customer waiting process of step E860 is reset. That is, the time (after 63 seconds) after adding the monitoring time of the operation interval (3 seconds) and the waiting time of the customer waiting effect (60 seconds) from the time when the operation of the cross key 19 was last detected in the second operation reception process. ) A customer waiting effect will be executed later. It should be noted that the customer waiting effect may be executed 60 seconds after the last detection of the operation of the cross key 19.
  In step E880-24, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the second processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “0”. If the second processing number is “0” (step E880— 24: Yes), the second operation acceptance process is terminated. If the second process number is not “0” (step E880-24: No), the process proceeds to step E880-25.
  In step E880-25, the sub CPU 130a clears the operation interval monitoring time. In step E880-26, the sub CPU 130a sets a luminance adjustment end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Thereby, the brightness adjustment end command is transmitted to the display control unit 140, and the brightness adjustment guide image and the brightness value notification image displayed on the image display device are hidden.
  In step E880-27, the sub CPU 130a sets “0” to the second process number stored in the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current second operation reception process. That is, in the state where the guidance image for brightness adjustment is displayed or the notification image for the brightness value is displayed, there is a winning effect of the game ball at the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, and a varying effect is provided. When it is determined that the brightness adjustment period has been shifted from the brightness adjustment possible period, such as when it is started or (error) notification of various occurrence events is started, the brightness adjustment guide image or brightness value The notification image is not displayed and the brightness adjustment operation cannot be performed.
  Therefore, the fact that the guidance image for brightness adjustment and the notification image of the brightness value are displayed on the image display device impedes the visual recognition of the effect image of the variation effect displayed on the image display device and the notification image of the occurrence event. It becomes possible to suppress.
  It should be noted that even if the game ball passes to the general-purpose gate 44 and the normal symbol variation display is started when the brightness adjustment operation is being performed, the brightness value is not limited, so the brightness value is not lost. The notification image is not hidden, or the brightness is not controlled.
  In Step E880-8, when it is determined that there has been a brightness adjustment start operation (Step E880-8: Yes), the processing after Step E880-9 is executed. You may make it perform the process after step E880-9, without determining whether there existed. In this way, the brightness value of the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 is changed by the operation of the first upper button or the lower button while waiting for the customer waiting effect. It becomes possible to make it.
◇ (First judgment table)
FIG. 67A is a diagram showing a first determination table that is referred to when it is determined whether or not it is a period during which volume adjustment using the cross key 19 (input reception unit) is possible. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the first determination table includes the presence / absence of the first permission flag indicating whether or not the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible and the effect control unit 130m. The effect state (status) controlled by the above is associated with whether or not volume adjustment is possible (determination result) for the low-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state.
  As a first feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment, when the first permission flag is “none”, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is unconditionally disabled. If the first permission flag is “present”, the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19 in accordance with the performance state and the gaming state. In this way, the player can adjust the volume of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM or SE) according to the presence or absence of the first permission flag, so that the interest of the game is improved.
  ◇ As a second feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment, even when the first permission flag is “present”, notification of various occurrence events (power-on notification, power recovery notification, various error notifications) ), The volume of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM or SE) by the player cannot be adjusted. In this way, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the user is distracted by adjusting the volume and is not aware of the occurrence of various events, and can appropriately notify the occurrence of an event to be notified. It becomes possible.
  ◇ As a third feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment, the customer waiting state in which the changing effect is not executed is divided into waiting for the customer waiting effect and waiting for the customer waiting effect, and waiting for the customer waiting effect. Is a period during which the volume can be adjusted, and the volume adjustment is disabled during the customer waiting stage. By doing in this way, the customer waiting effect is not hindered by the volume adjustment using the cross key 19, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to the player. In addition, it is good also considering the waiting time of a customer waiting effect as an incapable period of volume adjustment, a waiting time effect during a customer waiting time as a possible period of volume adjustment, Good.
  As a fourth feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment, during the waiting of the customer waiting effect in which the customer waiting effect is not executed in the customer waiting state, the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the time-saving gaming It can be mentioned that the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible regardless of the state (low probability short time, high probability short time). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to extend the period when volume adjustment is possible, and it becomes possible to improve a player's convenience.
  A fifth feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment is that volume adjustment using the cross key 19 cannot be performed during luminance adjustment using the cross key 19. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the operation for adjusting the volume and the operation for adjusting the brightness do not coexist and the player is confused.
  ◇ A sixth feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment is that the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19 during the high-speed change (effect sound output) of the effect symbol 70a among the change effects. Is mentioned. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to extend the period when volume adjustment is possible, and it becomes possible to improve a player's convenience. Further, since the volume can be adjusted without waiting until the customer enters a waiting state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the gaming machine 1 from being lowered (the operation of the gaming machine 1 can be increased).
  As a seventh feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is not possible during the variation effect during the acceleration variation, the low speed variation, or the temporary stop of the effect symbol. A point is mentioned. By doing in this way, it becomes possible not to overlook a part which becomes a key point in the variation of the effect design for the operation of the volume adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
  As an eighth feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment, during the jackpot game set in the low-probability gaming state, it is basically possible to adjust the volume using the cross key 19 from the opening to the ending. However, the volume cannot be adjusted during the pre-reading notice effect such as a jackpot notice. By doing in this way, it is possible not to miss an effect important for the player for the operation of adjusting the volume, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
  It should be noted that the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot game based on the passing (winning) of the game ball to a specific area provided inside the big prize opening 50 in the specific round (for example, the 8th round and the 15th round) during the jackpot game In the case of a gaming machine 1 that generates a sound, the volume may be adjusted during a normal round (rounds other than the 8th and 15th rounds), and the volume may not be adjusted during a specific round. By doing in this way, it will not be overlooked for volume adjustment whether or not the game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round important to the player, and it is prevented that the interest of the game is reduced. Is possible. In addition, when it is determined that the game ball will pass through a specific area (win) in the first specific round (8 rounds) to generate a probability variation gaming state, during the subsequent specific round (15 rounds) The volume may be adjusted.
  Further, the volume may not be adjusted during the promotion effect execution period in which the promotion effect is performed during the jackpot game or the continuous effect execution period in which the continuation effect is performed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent a volume adjustment from being performed during a period in which the player wants the player to pay attention, thereby reducing the interest of the game.
(Second determination table)
FIG. 67B is a diagram showing a second determination table that is referred to when it is determined whether or not it is a period in which luminance adjustment using the cross key 19 (input reception unit) is possible. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the second determination table includes the presence / absence of the second permission flag indicating whether or not the luminance adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible and the effect control unit 130m. The effect state (status) controlled by, and the possibility of brightness adjustment (determination result) for the low-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state are associated with each other.
  As a first feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment, when the second permission flag is “none”, brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 is unconditionally impossible, When the second permission flag is “present”, the brightness can be adjusted using the cross key 19 according to the effect state and the game state. In this way, the player can adjust the brightness of the image display device and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) according to the presence or absence of the second permission flag. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.
  As a second feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment, even when the second permission flag is “present”, notification of various occurrence events (power-on notification, power recovery notification, various error notifications) Among them, the brightness of image display devices and various lighting devices cannot be adjusted by the player. In this way, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being distracted by adjusting the brightness and not being aware of the occurrence of various events, and to appropriately notify the occurrence of an event to be notified. It becomes possible.
  As a third feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment, the customer waiting state in which the fluctuating effect is not executed is divided into waiting for the customer waiting effect and waiting for the customer waiting effect. The brightness adjustment period is available, and during the customer waiting stage, the brightness adjustment is disabled. By doing in this way, the customer waiting effect is not hindered by the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to the player. In addition, it is good also considering the waiting time of a customer waiting effect as an incapable period of brightness adjustment, a waiting time effect during a waiting time effect as a possible period of brightness adjustment, and a waiting time of a waiting time effect and during a waiting time effect as a possible period of brightness adjustment. Good.
  As a fourth feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment, during the waiting for the customer waiting effect in which the customer waiting effect is not executed in the customer waiting state, it is a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or time-saving gaming It can be mentioned that brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible regardless of the state (low probability short time, high probability short time). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to extend the period which can adjust brightness | luminance, and it becomes possible to improve a player's convenience.
  A fifth feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment is that brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 cannot be performed during volume adjustment using the cross key 19. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the operation for adjusting the luminance and the operation for adjusting the volume are not mixed and the player is confused.
  A sixth feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment is that brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible during high-speed fluctuation (production sound output) of the production symbol during the fluctuation production. It is done. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to extend the period which can adjust brightness | luminance, and it becomes possible to improve a player's convenience.
  As a seventh feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment, the luminance adjustment using the cross key 19 is impossible during the variation variation during acceleration variation, low-speed variation, or temporary stop of the production symbol. A point is mentioned. By doing in this way, it becomes possible not to overlook the important part in the variation of the effect design for the operation of brightness adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
  As an eighth feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment, during the jackpot game set in the low probability game state, it is basically possible to adjust the brightness using the cross key 19 from the opening to the ending. However, the brightness cannot be adjusted during pre-reading notices such as jackpot notices. By doing in this way, it becomes possible not to miss an effect important for the player for the operation of adjusting the brightness, and to improve the interest of the game.
  It should be noted that the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot game based on the passing (winning) of the game ball to a specific area provided inside the big prize opening 50 in the specific round (for example, the 8th round and the 15th round) during the jackpot game In the case of the gaming machine 1 that generates the brightness, the brightness adjustment may be performed during the normal round (except the 8th round and the 15th round), and the brightness adjustment may not be performed during the specific round. By doing in this way, it is not missed for brightness adjustment whether or not a game ball passes a specific area in a specific round important for a player, and it is prevented that the interest of the game is lowered. Is possible. In addition, when it is determined that the game ball will pass through a specific area (win) in the first specific round (8 rounds) to generate a probability variation gaming state, during the subsequent specific round (15 rounds) The brightness may be adjusted.
  In addition, the luminance adjustment may not be performed during the promotion effect execution period in which the promotion effect is performed during the jackpot game or the continuous effect execution period in which the continuation effect is performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the brightness adjustment from being performed during a period in which the player wants the player to pay attention, thereby reducing the interest of the game.
  Note that, in the first determination table and the second determination table of the present embodiment, whether or not the volume adjustment during the changing effect or whether or not the luminance adjustment is possible is set according to the state (status) of the changing effect. Whether or not volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is possible may be set for each type of effect pattern (variation pattern).
  For example, in the case of the variation effect pattern 2 (shortened variation effect), the volume and the luminance can be adjusted over the entire period, and in the case of a variation effect pattern other than the variation effect pattern 2 (shortened variation effect), the effect design is fast. It can be considered that volume adjustment and luminance adjustment using the cross key 19 can be set only during the change. By doing in this way, the period in which volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are possible can be expanded, and the convenience of the player can be significantly improved.
  On the contrary, in the case of the variation effect pattern 2 (shortening variation effect), the volume and the luminance cannot be adjusted over the entire period, and in the case of the variation effect pattern other than the variation effect pattern 2 (shortening variation effect) It is also conceivable to set the volume and brightness so that they can be adjusted only during high-speed fluctuation of the symbol. By doing so, it is possible to concentrate on the fluctuating effects by not adjusting the volume and brightness to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
  In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 are made impossible during the notification of the occurrence event, but it may be set for each type of event to be notified. For example, in the case of an event (for example, an abnormal payout or a full dish) that does not cause a disadvantage to a game shop or a player (such as not causing a decrease in security), The brightness adjustment can be performed, and in the case of other events, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may be disabled. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of a player, suppressing that a game store and a player suffer a disadvantage.
(Main processing of the LCD controller)
The main process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the main process of the liquid crystal control unit 141.
  When a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the overall CPU 142, and the overall CPU 142 performs the following main processing.
  First, the central CPU 142 sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting a timer interrupt in step T1, and performs an initialization process in step T2. In this process, the overall CPU 142 reads a main processing program from the overall ROM 143, initializes a flag and the like stored in the overall RAM 144, and performs processes such as initial setting.
  In step T3, the overall CPU 142 sets an interrupt permission for permitting the timer interrupt. In T3-1, the overall CPU 142 refers to the state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 including the rotary switch, and is output from the audio output device 9. The mode switching process is performed to switch the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume (value) of the effect sound and the brightness (value) of the image display device and various illumination devices (frame illumination device 10 and panel illumination device 74). The mode switching process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T4, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not an effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130m with reference to the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144, and if not received (step T4: No), If the process is transferred to step T6-1 and received (step T4: Yes), in step T5, an animation pattern is determined from the type of animation group corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and the predetermined RAM 144 determines a predetermined value. Set the animation pattern to be set (set) in the area. The animation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  The production instruction command is a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a variation production pattern command, a pattern pattern command, a confirmed production pattern command, a certain variation confirmed production pattern command, a notice production command, an operation promotion command, an operation production Command, roulette effect command, opening effect command, round effect command, ending effect command, and the like.
  The animation group is the type of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and weight frame (display time) in which the effect image is displayed, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns, which are information that specifies (designates) parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying an image display device that displays an effect image, and the like are bundled. Is a group formed by.
  The types of animation groups include, for example, a production symbol group for displaying the animation of the production symbol 70a, a group of icons for displaying the hold icon and the animation of the fluctuation icon, and a fluctuation production animation such as a background and a character. Examples include a group of variable effects for display, a group of notice effects for displaying an animation such as a notice, and a group of special game effects for displaying an animation of a special game effect.
  In step T6, the overall CPU 142 performs a sound setting process for determining and setting a sound pattern from a group of sounds corresponding to the received effect instruction command. In step T6-1, the general CPU 142 transmits the sound pattern from the effect control unit 130m. Based on the received notification start command and notification end command, the generated event notification process is performed using the image display device and the audio output device 9 to notify the generated event. The notification process of the occurrence event will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T6-2, the overall CPU 142 sends a command related to volume adjustment (a command for volume adjustment guidance, a command for starting volume adjustment, a command for volume reduction) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the operation of the cross key 19. , For setting (adjusting) the volume (volume value) of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM or SE) output from the audio output device 9 based on the command for increasing the volume or the command for ending volume adjustment) Perform volume setting processing. The volume setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T <b> 6-3, the overall CPU 142 sends a command related to luminance adjustment (a command for guidance of luminance adjustment, a command for starting luminance adjustment, a command for lowering luminance) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the operation of the cross key 19. The brightness (brightness value) of the lamp (LED) of the backlight of the image display device and various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74) is set based on the brightness increase command and the brightness adjustment end command. Brightness setting processing for (adjustment) is performed. The brightness setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T <b> 6-4, the overall CPU 142 reduces power consumption by reducing the luminance (value) of the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74). The power saving mode control process for controlling the start and end of the power saving (eco) mode to be suppressed is performed. The power saving mode control process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T7, whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is a frame update timing for updating the effect image or the notification image to be displayed on the image display device (drawing a new effect image or notification image). If there is no frame switching flag (step T7: No), the process proceeds to step T3-1. If there is a frame switching flag (step T7: Yes), in step T8, the frame is changed. Clear the switch flag.
  In step T9, the overall CPU 142 generates a display list composed of drawing control command groups, and performs processing for outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).
  Here, the display list is image forming information for forming effect images and notification images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Alternatively, the display list is generated for each of a plurality of frames (frame update timing), and in this embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.
  Specifically, the animation scene information (address) for each animation pattern updated in the display list set in the above-described event notification processing, volume setting processing, luminance setting processing, etc., or animation control processing described later ), A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the lowest priority animation group to the animation pattern of the highest priority animation group according to the priority order (drawing order) set for the anime group to which each anime pattern belongs. The reverse is also possible.
  In step T <b> 10, the overall CPU 142 performs a drawing command process for instructing drawing of an effect image based on the display list output to the image control unit 145 (VDP). By performing the drawing command process, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image and the notification image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer is displayed in the first frame. Processing to display on the one image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is performed.
  In step T <b> 11, the overall CPU 142 performs a process of generating a sound list composed of sound control commands and outputting the generated sound list to the sound control unit 148.
  Here, the sound list is sound output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, notification sounds of occurrence events, etc.) such as sound data and music data to be output from the sound output device 9, and new sounds. Is generated on the basis of the drawing frame.
  In step T <b> 12, the overall CPU 142 performs sound output command processing that instructs the sound control unit 148 to output sound based on the sound list output. By performing the sound output command process, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output sound based on the sound list.
  Therefore, various sounds are output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and are synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. Thus, the output from the audio output device 9 ends.
  It should be noted that output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing, but various sounds are output from the audio output device 9 so as not to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. May be stopped or vice versa.
  In step T13, the overall CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating the animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern as preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs processing in step T4. After that, the process from step T3-1 to step T13 is repeated so as to loop.
(Command reception interrupt processing of the LCD controller)
The command reception interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing the command reception interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit 141, and the command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.
  In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs command reception processing for receiving an effect instruction command and the like transmitted from the effect control unit 130m. Specifically, a process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144 is performed. When this process ends, the current command reception interrupt process ends.
(V blank interrupt processing of LCD controller)
The V blank interruption process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit 141. In the V blank interrupt process, the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 145 (VDP) ends. It is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every 1/30 seconds = about 33 ms) is received (1/30 seconds = about 33 ms).
  In step T30, the overall CPU 142 performs counter update processing for updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding “1”). In step T31, the image control unit 145 (VDP) is instructed to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147, and a frame buffer switching command process is performed.
  As a result, every time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 seconds (about 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are changed to “drawing frame buffer” and “display frame buffer”. Will be switched alternately.
  In step T32, the overall CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since the frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes in steps T8 to T13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).
◇ (Mode switching process of LCD controller)
The mode switching process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the mode switching process of the liquid crystal control unit 141.
  First, in step T3-1-1, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not reference information regarding volume and brightness adjustment has been set in the overall RAM 144, and if the reference information has not been set (step T3-1-1). 1: No), the process proceeds to step T3-1-2. If the reference information has been set (step T3-1-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T3-1-3. If this process is executed first after the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the adjustment mode, reference information, and power saving mode settings have been cleared (initialized) in the initialization process in step T2, so that the reference It is determined that the information has not been set.
  In step T3-1-2, the overall CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of a fixed volume value to the voice control unit 148, and moves the process to step T3-1-4. As a result, a specific sound (for example, an important event notification sound or notification sound, which will be described later), which is output from the audio output device 9 at a fixed volume value, corresponding to the notification signal having a fixed volume value, is output. The sound control unit 148 is set as a volume value. Here, a notification signal of a fixed volume value corresponding to the volume value “6” corresponding to the volume of 120% that is the maximum volume output from the gaming machine 1 is output to the voice control unit 148.
  The fixed volume value is set in the voice control unit 148 independently (separately) from the volume value described later, and after being set in the voice control unit 148, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 continues. It is impossible to change (adjust) during When a specific sound such as a notification sound or notification sound of an important event is output from the sound output device 9 based on the establishment of a predetermined notification condition, it always depends on (corresponds to) a fixed volume value. A notification sound or notification sound of an important event is output. Note that a fixed volume value (%) corresponding to the fixed volume value may be set instead of setting a fixed volume value in the voice control unit 148, and in that case, a fixed volume value may be set. Depending on (%), it is preferable to output a notification sound or notification sound of an important event.
  The overall CPU 142 refers to the state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 in step T3-1-3, and the previous changeover switch state (switch position) stored in the overall RAM 144 in step T3-1-19 described later. To determine whether or not the state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 has changed. If there has been a change (step T3-1-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step T3-1-4. If there is no change (step T3-1-3: No), the process moves to step T3-1-19.
  The overall CPU 142 selects the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 71B in step T3-1-4, and in step T3-1-5, corresponds to the switch position of the changeover switch from the adjustment mode selection table. The adjustment mode (mode 1 to mode 16) is specified and set in a predetermined storage area of the overall RAM 144. The changeover switch 22 and the adjustment mode selection table will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T3-1-6, the overall CPU 142 sets an adjustment mode notification command corresponding to the adjustment mode in the transmission buffer of the overall RAM 144. Thereby, the notification command of the adjustment mode is transmitted to the effect control unit 130m, and information related to volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is set in the information setting process of the effect control unit 130m described above.
  In step T3-1-7, the overall CPU 142 specifies reference information corresponding to the adjustment mode from the adjustment mode selection table, and sets the reference information in a predetermined storage area of the overall RAM 144. The reference information includes whether or not volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible, the adjustment range of the volume value of various sounds output from the audio output device 9, the initial value of the volume of various sounds output from the audio output device 9, Whether or not brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible, the adjustment range of the backlight value of the image display device and the lamp (LED) of various illumination devices, the backlight of the image display device and various illumination devices (frame illumination device 10, It is the initial value of the brightness of the lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 74). The reference information may include adjustment mode and power saving mode settings.
  In step T3-1-8, the overall CPU 142 sets the initial volume value (any one of 0 to 5) specified in step T3-1-7 to a volume value indicating the current volume, and step T3-1. At -9, the notification signal of the volume value corresponding to the set volume value is output to the voice control unit 148. Thereby, the volume value corresponding to the notification signal of the volume value is set in the voice control unit 148 as a volume value of a production sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the voice output device 9.
  The volume value is set in the voice control unit 148 independently (separately) from the fixed volume value described above, and even after the voice control unit 148 is set, the operation of the changeover switch 22 and the volume adjustment are performed. It can be changed (adjusted) by operating the cross key 19 during the possible period. When outputting a normal sound such as a production sound or a notification sound of a volume described later from the audio output device 9, the production sound or the notification sound of the volume is output depending on (corresponding to) the volume value. Become. The volume value may not be set in the voice control unit 148, but a volume (%) corresponding to the volume value may be set. In this case, the sound volume depends on the volume (%) (correspondence). Then, it is preferable to output a production sound, a volume notification sound, or the like.
  In step T3-1-10, the overall CPU 142 sets the initial luminance value (any one of 0 to 5) specified in step T3-1-7 to a luminance value indicating the current luminance, and step T3-1. In -11, the notification signal of the luminance value corresponding to the set luminance value is output to the image control unit 145. Thereby, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.
  The brightness value set in the image control unit 145 can be changed (adjusted) by operating the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19 during the brightness adjustment possible period. Then, the backlight of the image display device is caused to emit light depending on (corresponding to) the luminance value. Instead of setting a luminance value in the image control unit 145, a luminance (%) corresponding to the luminance value may be set. In this case, it depends on (corresponds to) the luminance (%). Then, the backlight of the image display device may be emitted. Further, the luminance value of the backlight of the first image display device 70 and the luminance value of the backlight of the second image display device 71 may be set separately.
  In step T <b> 3-1-12, the overall CPU 142 sets a brightness value notification command corresponding to the set brightness value in the transmission buffer of the overall RAM 144. As a result, a brightness value notification command is transmitted to the lamp controller 150, and the brightness value corresponding to the brightness value notification command is sent to the lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74). The brightness value is set in the lamp control unit 150.
  The brightness value set in the lamp control unit 150 can be changed (adjusted) by operating the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19 during the brightness adjustment possible period. Then, the backlight of the image display device is caused to emit light depending on (corresponding to) the luminance value. In addition, instead of setting a luminance value in the lamp control unit 150, a luminance (%) corresponding to the luminance value may be set. In this case, it depends on (corresponds to) the luminance (%). Then, lamps (LEDs) of various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74) may be caused to emit light.
  In step T <b> 3-1-13, the overall CPU 142 specifies the power saving mode setting (ON / OFF) corresponding to the adjustment mode, and sets it in a predetermined storage area of the overall RAM 144. The setting of the power saving mode set here is referred to in the power saving mode control processing of the liquid crystal control unit described later.
  In step T3-1-14, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not an important event (power-on, power-recovery, unauthorized winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality) is currently being reported. When an event occurrence has occurred (step T3-1-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step T3-1-19, and when an important event occurrence has not occurred (step T3-1). −14: No), the process proceeds to Step T3-1-15.
  In step T3-1-15, the overall CPU 142 determines whether the customer is currently waiting or not (step T3-1-15: Yes). The process moves to 1-16, and if the customer is not waiting (step T3-1-15: No), the process moves to step T3-1-19.
  In step T3-1-16, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the current volume adjustment (display of the volume value notification image) or brightness adjustment (display of the luminance value notification image) is being performed, and the volume adjustment. If medium or luminance adjustment is not being performed (step T3-1-16: No), the process proceeds to step T3-1-17, and if volume adjustment or luminance adjustment is being performed (step T3-1-16: Yes). The processing is moved to step T3-1-17.
  In step T3-17-1, the overall CPU 142 selects the adjustment mode notification sound determination table shown in FIG. 72, and in step T3-1-18, outputs the adjustment mode notification sound output information corresponding to the adjustment mode. Set to output list. Thereby, the sound list including the output information of the adjustment mode notification sound is output to the sound control unit 148, and the adjustment mode notification sound is output (notified) from the sound output device 9. The notification table for the adjustment mode notification sound will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T3-1-19, the overall CPU 142 sets the current state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 in the switch state storage area of the overall RAM 144, and ends the current mode switching process. Note that the state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 set here is referred to in step T3-1-3 described above.
  As described above, in the mode switching process according to the present embodiment, there is no restriction such as the volume adjustment possible period and the brightness adjustment possible period, and all the periods during which power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 are adjusted. This is a possible period, and the adjustment mode is changed (switched) in accordance with the change in the switch position of the volume adjustment switch 22 under any circumstances.
  Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the volume value, luminance value, and power saving mode desired by the game store by operating the changeover switch 22, and the volume, image display device, and various illuminations output from the audio output device 9 of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to easily adjust the brightness of the lamps (LEDs) of the devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74).
  That is, even when a game in which a production sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) is being output (during special symbol fluctuation display, jackpot game, etc.), the changeover switch 22 is set to the power-saving mode OFF position. The power-saving mode setting can be switched to ON by operating the power-saving mode setting ON switch position (for example, “6”) from (for example, “5”), and game sounds such as effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) ) Is in progress (during special symbol fluctuation display, jackpot game, etc.), the power saving mode is set from the switch-on position of the power saving mode setting ON (for example, “6”). When the switch is operated to an OFF switch position (for example, “5”), the power saving mode setting can be switched to OFF.
  In the mode switching process in the present embodiment, the initial value of the volume corresponding to the changed adjustment mode is set to the volume value by changing (switching) the adjustment mode by operating the changeover switch 22 or the adjustment after the change. Even when the initial luminance value corresponding to the mode is set to the luminance value, the display information of the volume value notification image OG and the luminance value notification image KG is not set in the display list. Yes.
  Therefore, even if the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed, the volume value notification image OG and the luminance value notification image KG are not newly displayed on the image display device. Even if the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed due to the maintenance of the gaming machine 1 installed in the back-facing state and the adjustment mode is changed, the player who is playing the game is prevented from feeling suspicious. Is possible.
  In addition, when the adjustment mode is changed (changed) by operating the changeover switch 22 or the like, the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode is output from the audio output device 9 and notified. The adjustment mode set by the notification sound of the adjustment mode can be recognized.
  In addition, during the notification of an important event, the notification sound of the adjustment mode is not output from the audio output device 9, so that the notification sound of the important event is not hindered by the notification sound of the adjustment mode, It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as not being aware of the occurrence of an important event. Note that the notification sound of the adjustment mode may not be output from the audio output device 9 during the notification of the occurrence of a normal event.
  In addition, when the customer is not in a waiting state (during changing production or jackpot production, etc.), the notification sound of the adjustment mode is not output from the audio output device 9, so that the production sound (during the player's game) ( (BGM, SE, etc. game sounds) are not hindered, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced by outputting the adjustment mode notification sound.
  In addition, when the volume is being adjusted or the brightness is being adjusted, the notification sound of the adjustment mode is not output from the audio output device 9, so that the player who operates the cross key 19 to adjust the volume or brightness is suspicious. It is possible to prevent it from being felt.
  Note that the adjustment mode notification sound that is output when the adjustment mode is changed by operating the changeover switch 22 is not output from the audio output device 9 at the timing when the adjustment mode is changed, but the adjustment mode is changed. The notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode may be output after the predetermined time (for example, after 1 second).
  In this way, when a plurality of switch positions (scales) of the changeover switch 22 are changed, the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the adjustment mode being changed is not output, and the adjustment mode set last is supported. Only the notification sound of the adjustment mode to be output is output. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the adjustment mode being changed from being output continuously, making it difficult to grasp the set adjustment mode.
  Further, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is determined after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) after the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is changed, and corresponds to the determined switch position (scale). Adjustment mode information, reference information, and power saving mode settings may be set.
  In this case, when a plurality of switch positions (scales) of the changeover switch 22 are changed, the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the adjustment mode of the unconfirmed switch position is not output, and the switch position of the confirmed switch position is determined. Only the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the adjustment mode is output. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the adjustment mode of the undetermined switch position from being output continuously, making it difficult to grasp the set adjustment mode.
  During volume adjustment or brightness adjustment using the cross key 19, even if the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 changes, the adjustment mode is not changed (switched), and after the volume adjustment or brightness adjustment ends. However, as long as the state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 does not change, the adjustment mode may not be switched.
  In this way, the volume value that is not intended by the player despite the player performing an adjustment operation using the cross key 19 in order to change to an arbitrary volume (value) or brightness (value). And the inconvenience of setting the luminance value can be avoided, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.
◇ (selection table of changeover switch and adjustment mode)
The changeover switch 22 (input reception unit) and the adjustment mode selection table will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b). FIG. 71A is a diagram illustrating an appearance of the changeover switch 22, and FIG. 71B is a diagram illustrating an adjustment mode selection table.
  As shown in FIG. 71A, the changeover switch 22 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable (360 degrees) with respect to the switch body 22a having a plurality of (for example, 16) selection terminals therein and the switch body 22a. A non-shorting type rotary switch having an operation unit 22b, and by rotating the operation unit 22b, the selection terminal to which the common terminal of the operation unit 22b is connected is changed to switch the switch (the switch position is changed). To do).
  Further, 16 scales (0 to F) indicating the positions (contact points) of the selection terminals to which the common terminals are connected are provided on the upper surface of the switch body 22a, and the common terminals are connected to the operation unit 22b. An arrow indicating a selection terminal is provided. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the switch state (switch position) from the scale of the switch body 22a and the arrow of the operation unit 22b.
  Note that the changeover switch 22 may be configured by a slide switch that opens and closes a contact when the operation unit slides linearly, or a dip switch that changes the contact by operating any one of a plurality of operation units. You may comprise by.
  The above-described changeover switch 22 is usually operated by the hand of a game store clerk before or after the game store is opened, and in most cases the switch position is intentionally changed. In the case of the gaming machine 1 that is installed on both islands, the game store clerk touches the switch operation part during maintenance of the gaming machine 1 that is installed in the back-facing state. There is also a possibility that the contact will change. In addition, a case where the changeover switch 22 is operated during a game according to a player's request is also conceivable.
  As shown in FIG. 71 (b), the adjustment mode selection table associates the switch position (0 to F) of the changeover switch 22, the adjustment mode, the reference information, and the setting of the power saving mode. . The reference information includes whether or not volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible, the adjustment range of various sounds output from the audio output device 9, the initial value of the volume of various sounds output from the audio output device 9, and the cross key 19 Brightness adjustment using LCD, adjustment range of brightness value of backlight of image display device and lamp (LED) of various illumination devices, backlight of image display device and various illumination devices (frame illumination device 10, panel illumination) It is the initial value of the brightness of the lamp (LED) of the device 74).
  ◇ As the first feature of the adjustment mode selection table of this embodiment, the type (number) of volume value (initial value of volume) and the type (number) of adjustment mode rather than the type (number) of luminance value (initial value of luminance) There are many (the number of switch positions of the changeover switch 22), and at least a part of the reference information set in each adjustment mode and the setting of the power saving mode are set differently.
  In this way, it is possible to easily set various patterns of adjustment modes simply by operating the changeover switch 22. Note that the reference information and power saving mode settings that are set for some adjustment modes (minority) are common, and at least some of the reference information and power saving mode settings that are set for other adjustment modes (multiple) are different. You may set as follows.
  ◇ As a second feature of the adjustment mode selection table of the present embodiment, in adjustment modes 1 to 6 where the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is in the range of 0 to 5, volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are possible (variable). In the adjustment modes 7 to 11 in which the switch position is in the range of 6 to A, the volume adjustment is possible (variable) but the brightness adjustment is not possible (fixed), and the adjustment modes 12 to 16 in which the switch position is in the range of B to F. Then, the volume adjustment is impossible (fixed), but the brightness adjustment is possible (variable).
  In this way, it is possible to select (set) whether or not volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is possible by a rough operation of the changeover switch 22, and convenience for the game shop clerk to operate is improved.
  As a third feature of the adjustment mode selection table of the present embodiment, in the adjustment modes 1 to 6, the initial volume value gradually increases in increments of 1, and in the adjustment modes 7 to 11, the initial volume value gradually increases in increments of 1. In the adjustment modes 12 to 16, the initial value of the volume is set so as to decrease step by step and then gradually changed so that the initial value of the volume in each adjustment mode draws a waveform. (The difference between the initial values of adjacent sound volumes is the same or small).
  By doing in this way, even if the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22, the sound volume output from the audio output device 9 does not change abruptly. It becomes possible to suppress that it becomes surprised and it becomes difficult to hear because the volume decreases suddenly.
  It should be noted that the initial value of the volume in the adjustment modes 1 to 6 is not changed, and the initial value of the volume in the adjustment modes 7 to 11 is set to be gradually increased from 1 to 5 in increments of 1 to 5. By setting the initial value of the sound volume to be gradually increased from 1 to 5 in increments of 1, the initial value of the sound volume in each adjustment mode may be changed to draw a saw blade pattern.
  Further, the initial value of the volume in the adjustment modes 1 to 6 is set as it is, and the initial value of the volume in the adjustment modes 7 to 11 is set to be gradually increased from 1 to 5 in increments of 1 to 5. By setting the initial value of the volume to gradually decrease from 1 to 5 from 1 to 5, the initial value of the volume of each adjustment mode changes so as to draw a saw blade and a wave shape is drawn. You may set so that the part which changes to may be mixed.
  As a fourth feature of the adjustment mode selection table according to the present embodiment, the initial luminance value gradually increases in the adjustment modes 1 to 4, and the initial luminance value is the maximum value in the adjustment modes 5 to 13. In the adjustment modes 14 to 16, the initial values of the brightness are set so as to be gradually reduced and gradually decreased, and the initial values of the brightness in each adjustment mode change so as to draw a substantially mountain shape (trapezoid). It is done.
  By doing so, the brightness of the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74) may change suddenly when the changeover switch 22 is operated. Therefore, the luminance is not suddenly increased or the luminance is not suddenly lowered when the changeover switch 22 is operated, and the visual burden can be reduced.
  The initial value of the brightness may be set so as to draw a saw blade as in the case of the initial value of the volume. Also, the initial value of the luminance may be set so that a portion that changes so as to draw a saw blade and a portion that changes so as to draw a wave shape are mixed as in the case of the initial value of volume.
  ◇ As a fifth feature of the adjustment mode selection table of the present embodiment, the adjustment mode 1 to 6 and the adjustment mode 12 to 16 are set to the power saving (eco) mode OFF, and the adjustment modes 7 to 11 are set to the power saving ( (Eco) mode is set to ON, and the power saving mode can be set to ON / OFF by operating the changeover switch 22.
  By doing so, it is possible to set whether the power saving mode is turned on or off according to the intention of the gaming store side, and it becomes possible to control the power consumption of the gaming machine 1 to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the operating cost of the entire amusement store.
  In addition, since the number of adjustment modes in which the setting of the power saving mode is turned off is larger than the number of adjustment modes in which the setting of the power saving mode is turned on, the possibility that the setting of the power saving mode is turned off is increased. This is convenient for a gaming machine manufacturer who wants to appeal the gaming machine 1.
  In the adjustment mode selection table of the present embodiment, the target set by the adjustment mode is the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 9, the backlight of the image display device, and various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10, Although the brightness of the lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 74) is set, only one of them may be targeted. Even in such a case, it is preferable that the initial value of the volume, the initial value of the luminance, and the like are different for each adjustment mode.
  The adjustment mode selection table of the present embodiment includes an adjustment mode (adjustment mode 1) in which the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the brightness are set to “0”. The adjustment mode in which the initial value is set to “0” may not be included. In this case, the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the luminance in the adjustment mode 1 are set to “1”, and the initial values of the volume in the adjustment modes 1 to 12 are gradually changed so as to draw a waveform. It is preferable that the initial value of the luminance is gradually changed so as to draw a substantially mountain shape (trapezoid).
  In the adjustment mode selection table according to the present embodiment, whether or not volume adjustment is possible and whether or not brightness adjustment is possible (variable) or impossible (fixed) is set for each adjustment mode. Whether or not brightness adjustment is possible may be set to be possible (variable). Even in this case, it is preferable that at least a part of the reference information set in each adjustment mode and the setting of the power saving mode are different.
  It should be noted that the gaming machine 1 that executes a predetermined specific effect periodically (every hour or every 30 minutes) based on timekeeping information of an RTC (real time clock) that measures the actual date and time provided in the effect control device 130A. In such a case, it may be possible to set whether or not to execute the specific effect, the execution time of the specific effect, the type of the specific effect, and the like by operating the changeover switch 22. In this case, it is conceivable to set reference information for executing a specific effect for each adjustment mode, or to use a specific adjustment mode for setting a specific effect. If it does in this way, since a specific production | presentation can be performed with the execution aspect in accordance with the policy at the game store side, it becomes possible to appeal the purchase will as an appeal point of the gaming machine 1 to the game store.
  Further, the specific effect sound that produces the predetermined specific effect may be output at the maximum volume (volume 120%) corresponding to the fixed volume value “6” at least partially. In addition, when the specific performance to be executed is a simultaneous performance that performs the same or almost the same performance on a plurality of gaming machines 1 of the same model, A single effect in which at least a part is output from the audio output device 9 at a maximum volume (volume 120%) corresponding to a fixed volume value “6”, and the specific performance to be performed is performed by a single gaming machine 1 In this case, the single effect sound that produces the single effect may be output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the volume value. The simultaneous production sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the volume value, and the single production sound is output from the audio output device 9 at the maximum volume (120%) corresponding to the fixed volume value “6”. It may be.
◇ (Adjustment mode notification sound determination table)
FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an adjustment mode notification sound determination table that is referred to when determining (selecting) an adjustment mode notification sound corresponding to an adjustment mode.
  As shown in FIG. 72, the adjustment mode notification sound determination table associates the adjustment mode with the adjustment mode notification sound. The adjustment mode notification sound includes ON / OFF of the power saving mode, and the volume. Is set to an initial value (volume value set when the adjustment mode is changed), sound indicating whether volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is possible, and the like. Therefore, when the notification sound of the adjustment mode is output from the audio output device 9, it is possible to grasp the outline of the set adjustment mode. Note that the notification sound in the adjustment mode may include a voice indicating the initial value of the luminance (the luminance value set when the adjustment mode is changed).
  As to whether or not volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is possible, only the sound that can be adjusted so that the amount of information to be notified is not excessive is included, and the sound that adjustment is impossible is not included. However, it may be possible to include a sound indicating that adjustment is impossible.
  In addition, when a specific adjustment mode (for example, adjustment mode 1 in which the initial value of the volume is set to 0) is set, an adjustment mode notification sound is output, and an adjustment mode that is not a specific adjustment mode When set to (adjustment modes 2 to 16 where the initial value of the volume is set to other than 0), the notification sound of the adjustment mode may not be output, or vice versa.
◇ (Modification of mode switching process of LCD controller)
A modification of the mode switching process of the liquid crystal controller 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating a modified example of the mode switching process of the liquid crystal control unit 141. Here, only the parts different from the mode switching process of FIG. 70 will be described, and the same parts will be denoted by the same step numbers and the description thereof will be omitted.
  As a first difference of the modified example of the mode switching process shown in FIG. 73, a step T3-1-8 is provided between step T3-1-8 and step T3-1-9 in the mode switching process shown in FIG. -1 and step T3-1-8-2 are provided.
  In step T3-1-8-1, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the volume is currently being adjusted (displaying the notification image of the volume value), and if the volume is not being adjusted (step T3-1-8-1). : No), the process proceeds to step T3-1-9, and if the volume is being adjusted (step T3-1-8-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T3-1-8-2. In step T3-1-8-2, the display information of the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the current volume value is set in the display list.
  By doing so, the notification image of the volume value displayed on the image display device during the volume adjustment is changed (updated) to the notification image of the volume value according to the change of the adjustment mode, and the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed. It is possible to let the player know the volume value that has been set by changing, and avoid the inconvenience of the discrepancy between the volume value that the player recognizes and the volume value that is actually set Become.
  As a second difference of the modified example of the mode switching process shown in FIG. 73, a step T3-1-10 is provided between step T3-1-10 and step T3-1-11 in the mode switching process shown in FIG. -1 and step T3-1-10-2 are provided.
  In step T3-1-10-1, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the brightness is currently being adjusted (displays a notification image of the brightness value). If the brightness is not being adjusted (step T3-1-10-). 1: No), the process proceeds to step T3-11-1. If the luminance is being adjusted (step T3-1-10-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step T3-1-10-2. In step T3-1-10-2, the display information of the notification image having the luminance value corresponding to the current luminance value is set in the display list.
  In this way, the brightness value notification image displayed on the image display device during the brightness adjustment is changed (updated) to the brightness value notification image corresponding to the change of the adjustment mode, and the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed. It is possible to inform the player of the set brightness value by changing the value, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the brightness value recognized by the player deviates from the actually set brightness value. Become.
◇ (Modification example of adjustment mode selection table)
A modification of the adjustment mode selection table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74B is a diagram showing a modification of the adjustment mode selection table. In this modification, the brightness of the backlight of the image display device using the cross key 19 and the lamps (LEDs) of various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74) cannot be changed. 71 is different from the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 71 in that the volume range set in is different and there is a dedicated adjustment mode for setting the power saving mode.
  As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the adjustment mode selection table of the modification, the switch position (0 to F) of the changeover switch, the adjustment mode, whether volume adjustment is possible, the volume range to be set, and the volume The adjustment range of the value and the initial value of the volume are associated with each other.
  As a first feature of the adjustment mode selection table of this modification, there are more types of adjustment modes (number of switch positions of the changeover switch 22) than types (numbers) of volume values (initial values of volume), and adjustment modes From 1 to 12, at least a part of the information set in each adjustment mode is different. In this way, it is possible to easily set various patterns of adjustment modes simply by operating the changeover switch 22.
  As a second feature of the adjustment mode selection table of this modification, in adjustment modes 1 to 6 in which the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is in the range of 0 to 5, the volume can be adjusted (variable), and the switch position is In the adjustment modes 7 to 12 corresponding to the range of 6 to B, the volume adjustment is set to be impossible (fixed). By doing so, it is possible to select (set) whether or not the volume can be adjusted by roughly operating the changeover switch 22, and convenience is improved.
  As a third feature of the adjustment mode selection table of this modification, the initial value of the volume gradually increases in increments of 1 in the adjustment modes 0 to 6, and gradually increases in increments of 1 in the adjustment modes 7 to 12. The initial value of the volume in the adjustment modes 1 to 12 gradually changes so as to draw a substantially mountain shape (trapezoid) (the difference between the initial values of adjacent sound volumes is the same or small). It is done. By doing in this way, even if the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22, the sound volume output from the audio output device 9 does not change abruptly. It becomes possible to suppress that it becomes surprised and it becomes difficult to hear because the volume decreases suddenly.
  As a fourth feature of the adjustment mode selection table of the present modification, the volume ranges are different in the adjustment modes 1 to 6, and the volume corresponding to each volume value is also set differently. . By doing in this way, the volume range (sound level: free, minimum, small, medium, large, maximum) of the sound output from the sound output device 9 by the operation of the changeover switch 22 can be set. It is possible to limit the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 on the side.
  As a fifth feature of the adjustment mode selection table of this modification, the adjustment modes 13 to 16 are dedicated adjustment modes for setting the power saving mode, and the changeover switch 22 is set to any one of the switches C to F. By setting the position (state), the power saving mode setting screen is displayed. The backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) in the power saving mode are displayed. The brightness can be set. In this way, the selection terminal of the changeover switch 22 can be used without any loss, and the brightness of the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of various illumination devices in the power saving mode is arbitrarily set. It becomes possible.
  In the adjustment mode selection table of this modification, the target set by the adjustment mode is the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 9, but the backlight of the image display device and various illumination devices (frames) May be replaced with the brightness of the lamp (LED) of the lighting device 10 for the panel and the lighting device 74 for the panel, and the volume range and the luminance range may be set differently for each adjustment mode for both the volume and the luminance. .
  Further, in this modification, it is preferable that the power saving mode setting (information) set in the overall RAM 144 (nonvolatile memory) by operating the changeover switch 22 is not lost due to power-off of the gaming machine 1, In some cases, backup power may be supplied to the overall RAM 144, or power saving mode settings (information) may be stored in a non-volatile memory such as FERAM. Even in this case, the reference information may be cleared when the gaming machine 1 is lost or the power is restored.
  In addition, the adjustment mode selection table of this modification includes an adjustment mode (adjustment mode 1) in which the initial value of the volume is set to “0”, but the initial value of the volume is set to “0”. The adjustment mode may not be included. In that case, the initial value of the volume in the adjustment mode 1 is set to “1”, and the initial value of the volume in the adjustment modes 1 to 12 is configured to gradually change so as to draw a substantially mountain shape (trapezoid). Good.
(Modification example of determination table of notification sound in adjustment mode)
FIG. 75A shows an adjustment mode that is referred to when an adjustment mode notification sound corresponding to a modification of the adjustment mode selection table is set and an adjustment mode notification sound corresponding to the adjustment mode is determined (selected). It is a figure which shows the determination table of the notification sound of.
  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the adjustment mode notification sound determination table, the adjustment mode and the adjustment mode notification sound are associated with each other. (Volume level), whether or not volume adjustment is possible, and a sound indicating that the power saving mode is being set are set. Therefore, when the notification sound of the adjustment mode is output from the audio output device 9, it is possible to grasp the outline of the set adjustment mode.
  In addition, when the modified example of the adjustment mode selection table is replaced so that the luminance is the target, or both the volume and the luminance are targeted, the notification sound of the adjustment mode is also changed to the content that targets the volume and the luminance. Will be changed.
(Power-saving mode setting screen)
FIG. 75B is a diagram showing a power saving mode setting screen corresponding to a modification of the adjustment mode selection table.
  On the setting screen of the power saving mode, the first item (luminance of the display device, 30%, 50%, 70%) for setting the luminance of the backlight of the image display device and various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10). The second item (brightness of various LEDs, 30%, 50%, 70%) for setting the luminance of the lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 74) and the third item for determining the treatment of the setting contents Items (cancel, decision, initialization) are displayed side by side, and a “selection” guidance image and an effect button 17 indicating that an item or setting (luminance, etc.) is selected by the cross key 19 at the bottom of the screen. A “determination” guidance image indicating that the determination is made is displayed.
  Here, the first item or the second item is selected using the cross key 19 or the effect button 17, and after selecting the brightness of the selected item, the third item “decision” or “initialization” is selected. Thus, the setting of the power saving mode (the brightness of the display device and the brightness of various LEDs during the power saving mode) is completed. If the “cancel” option is selected and determined, the original luminance setting is maintained. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to arbitrarily set the setting during the power saving mode, and it becomes possible to control the operating cost related to the gaming machine 1 of the amusement store to some extent.
  In addition, when the changeover switch 22 is operated before the setting of the power saving mode is completed and the switch position is not C to F, or when the game ball wins the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, a variation effect is produced. When started, the setting of the power saving mode ends in the middle and the original luminance setting is maintained, and the power saving mode setting screen displayed on the image display device is also hidden.
  Even if the changeover switch 22 is operated during the power saving mode setting operation, the power saving mode setting operation is not continued and the power saving mode setting screen is not hidden if the switch position is C to F. . Therefore, when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 changes due to vibration or impact or when the game machine 1 facing the backside of both sides is in contact with the changeover switch 22, the switch position changes. Even in such a case, it is difficult for the inconvenience that the setting operation of the power saving mode is terminated midway.
(Anime pattern setting process in the LCD controller)
The animation pattern setting process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the animation pattern setting process of the liquid crystal controller 141.
  First, in step T5-1, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a customer waiting effect command, and if it is not a customer waiting effect command (step T5-1: No), step T5. When the process is shifted to -3 and the command is a customer waiting effect command (step T5-1: Yes), in step T5-2, a customer waiting animation is displayed from the customer waiting group for displaying the customer waiting animation. A process for setting an animation pattern waiting for a customer to determine a pattern and set (set) it in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed.
  In step T5-3, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an icon display command, and if it is not an icon display command (step T5-3: No), step T5-5. If the command is an icon display command (step T5-3: Yes), in step T5-4, an icon is displayed from the group of icons for displaying the animation of the suspended icon and the animation of the variable icon. An animation pattern is set for an icon to be determined and set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144.
  In step T5-5, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a variation effect pattern command, and if it is not a variation effect pattern command (step T5-5: No), step T5-7. If the command is a variation effect pattern command (step T5-5: Yes), in step T5-6, the variation effect animation is displayed from the variation effect group for displaying the background animation and the character animation. An animation pattern setting process is performed for determining the pattern and setting (setting) it in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144.
  In step T5-7, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a symbol pattern command. If it is not a symbol pattern command (step T5-7: No), the overall CPU 142 proceeds to step T5-9. If it is a symbol pattern command (step T5-7: Yes), in step T5-8, a symbol animation pattern from a group of effect symbols for displaying the animation of the effect symbol or the animation of the fourth symbol is displayed. Is set, and a setting process of an animation pattern of a symbol to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed.
  In step T5-9, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a notice effect command, and if it is not a notice effect command (step T5-9: No), step T5-11 is performed. If the command is a notification effect (step T5-9: Yes), in step T5-10, a notification effect for displaying a notification effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit is displayed. The animation pattern of the notice effect is set by determining the animation pattern of the notice effect from the group and setting (setting) it in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144.
  In step T5-11, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received instruction instruction command is an operation promotion command. If the command is not an operation promotion command (step T5-11: No), step T5-13 If the command is an operation promotion command (step T5-11: Yes), the operation is performed from the operation promotion group for displaying the operation promotion effect prompting the operation of the effect button 17 in step T5-12. A process for setting an animation pattern for promoting operation is performed in which a promotion animation pattern is determined and set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144.
  In step T5-13, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an operation effect command. If the command is not an operation effect command (step T5-13: No), the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the effect instruction command is an operation effect command. If the command is an operation effect command (step T5-13: Yes), the operation effect animation pattern is determined from the operation effect group for displaying the operation effect in step T5-14. An operation effect animation pattern setting process to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed.
  In step T5-15, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a roulette effect command, and if it is not a roulette effect command (step T5-15: No), step T5-17 If the command is a roulette effect command (step T5-15: Yes), the roulette effect is displayed from the roulette effect group for displaying the roulette effect for notifying the progress of the variable effect in step T5-16. A roulette effect animation pattern setting process is performed in which the animation pattern is determined and set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144.
  In step T5-17, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an opening effect command. If the command is not an opening effect command (step T5-17: No), the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the effect instruction command is an opening effect command. If the command is an opening effect command (step T5-17: Yes), an opening effect animation pattern is determined from the opening effect group for displaying the opening effect in step T5-18. An opening effect animation pattern setting process to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed.
  In step T5-19, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a round effect command. If the command is not a round effect command (step T5-19: No), the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the effect instruction command is a round effect command. If the command is a round production command (step T5-19: Yes), in step T5-20, the round production animation pattern is determined from the round production group for displaying the round production. A round effect animation pattern setting process to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed.
  In step T5-21, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an ending effect command. If the command is not an ending effect command (step T5-21: No), the current animation pattern When the setting process is finished and the command is an ending effect (step T5-21: Yes), the animation pattern of the ending effect is determined from the ending effect group for displaying the ending effect in step T5-22. Then, an ending effect animation pattern determination process to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed, and the current animation pattern setting process is terminated.
  ◇ The process of notifying the occurrence event of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the notification process of the occurrence event of the liquid crystal control unit 141.
  First, in step T6-1-1, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a notification start command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m is received, and receives the notification start command (step T6-1). -1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-1-2. If not received (step T6-1-1: No), the process proceeds to step T6-1-12.
  In step T6-1-2, the overall CPU 142 identifies the type of event that has occurred from the received notification start command, and in step T6-1-3, display information of the notification image corresponding to the event that has occurred is displayed. Set to list. Accordingly, a display list including display information of a notification image corresponding to the event that has occurred is output to the image control unit 145, and a notification image of the event that has occurred is displayed on the image display device. The event notification image will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T6-1-4, the overall CPU 142 determines whether there is output information of the notification sound corresponding to the higher priority event (see FIG. 48) in the output list, and there is output information. In (Step T6-1-4: Yes), the processing is moved to Step T6-1-5. When there is no output information (Step T6-1-4: No), the processing is performed in Step T6-1-6. Move. The event notification sound will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T6-1-5, the overall CPU 142 determines that an event with a lower priority has occurred at the same time as an event with a higher priority, and waits for output information of an alarm sound corresponding to the event that has occurred this time. The process is moved to step T6-1-12.
  As a result, when multiple events occur at the same time, the output of the notification sound of the event corresponding to the lower priority event is waited, and only the notification sound of the event corresponding to the higher priority event is received. Will be output. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes impossible to grasp what kind of event has occurred due to a mixture of notification sounds of a plurality of events.
  In step T6-1-6, the overall CPU 142 outputs an event notification sound corresponding to an event having a lower priority than the event that has occurred this time, or whether an event notification sound corresponding to the event that has occurred is not output. As a result, the output information of the notification sound of the event corresponding to the event that has occurred this time is set in the output list. As a result, a sound list including the output information of the notification sound of the event corresponding to the event that has occurred this time is output to the sound control unit 148, and the notification sound of the event that has occurred this time is output from the sound output device 9.
  In step T6-1-7, the overall CPU 142 determines whether there is output information of an alarm sound of an event corresponding to an event having a lower priority than the event that has occurred this time in the output list. If there is no output (step T6-1-7: No), the process proceeds to step T6-1-9. If there is output information (step T6-1-7: Yes), step T6-1-1 In step 8, the output information of the notification sound of the event corresponding to the event having a lower priority than the event that has occurred this time is moved from the output list to the standby list. As a result, the notification sound of the event corresponding to the higher priority event is output preferentially, and it is possible to take appropriate measures on the game store side.
  In step T6-1-9, the overall CPU 142 determines whether the output information of the notification sound of the event set in the output list is an important event, and determines whether the important event (power-on, power-on recovery) , Illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality) (step T6-1-9: Yes), the process moves to step T6-1-10, and it is not an important event ( In step T6-1-9: No), the process moves to step T6-1-11.
  In step T6-1-10, the overall CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of a volume value corresponding to the volume value 0 (mute, mute) to the voice control unit 148. As a result, 0 (mute, mute) is set in the sound control unit 148 as the volume (value) of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the sound output device 9, and corresponds to the important event that occurred. It is possible to emphasize (make conspicuous) the notification sound of important events to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game store clerk accurately recognize the occurrence of an important event.
  In step T6-11-1, the overall CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of a volume value corresponding to ¼ of the current volume value to the voice control unit 148. As a result, the volume (value) of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 is ¼ of the current volume value (the value depending on the current adjustment mode and volume value). ) Is set in the voice control unit 148, and the notification sound of the event corresponding to the normal event can be emphasized (made more conspicuous) than the effect sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to make a player or a game store clerk accurately recognize the occurrence of a normal event.
  In step T6-1-12, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the notification end command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m is received, and if the notification end command is received (step T6-1-12). : Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-1-13, and if it has not been received (step T6-1-12: No), the current event notification process is terminated.
  In step T6-1-13, the overall CPU 142 specifies the type of event for which the notification period has ended from the received notification end command. In step T6-1-14, the overall CPU 142 determines the type of the notification image corresponding to the event for which the notification period has ended. Clear display information from the display list. Accordingly, a display list that does not include the display information of the notification image corresponding to the event for which the notification period has ended is output to the image control unit 145, and the notification image for the event for which the notification period has ended is not displayed on the image display device.
  In step T6-1-15, the overall CPU 142 determines whether there is output information of notification sound corresponding to the event for which the notification period has ended in the output list, and if there is output information (step T6-1). (-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-1-16. If there is no output information (step T6-1-15: No), the process proceeds to step T6-1-17.
  In step T6-1-16, the overall CPU 142 clears the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event for which the notification period has ended from the output list. As a result, a sound list that does not include the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event for which the notification period has ended is output to the sound control unit 148, and the notification sound for the event for which the notification period has ended is not output from the sound output device 9.
  In step T6-1-17, the overall CPU 142 clears the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event for which the notification period has ended from the waiting list. Thereby, the state where the output of the notification sound corresponding to the event for which the notification period has ended is released.
  In step T6-1-18, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not there is notification information output information corresponding to the event in the standby list, and if there is no output information (step T6-1-18: No). In step T6-1-19, the process proceeds to step T6-1-19. If there is output information (step T6-1-18: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-1-20.
  In step T6-1-19, the overall CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of the volume value corresponding to the current volume value to the voice control unit 148, and ends the current event notification process. Thereby, the sound volume (value) corresponding to the notification signal of the sound volume value is set in the sound control unit 148 as the sound volume (value) of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM and SE) output from the sound output device 9.
  By doing so, the volume (value) of 0 or 1/4 set in the voice control unit 148 at the start of notification of the event that has occurred is the start of notification of the event that occurred at the end of the notification of the event that has occurred It will return to the previous volume (value). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the volume (value) of the production sound from being lowered despite the end of the notification of the event that has occurred, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. .
  In step T6-1-20, the overall CPU 142 sets the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the highest priority event in the waiting list in the output list. Thereby, the sound list including the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event set in the current output list is output to the audio control unit 148, and the event set in the current output list from the audio output device 9 is output. A corresponding notification sound is output.
  In step T6-1-21, the general CPU 142 determines whether the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event set in the output list is an important event, and is the important event. In the case (step T6-1-21: Yes), the processing is shifted to step T6-1-22. When the event is not an important event (step T6-1-21: No), step T6-1-1 is performed. The processing is moved to 23.
  In step T6-1-22, the overall CPU 142 outputs a volume value notification signal corresponding to the volume value 0 (mute, mute) to the voice control unit, and ends the current event notification process. Accordingly, 0 (mute, mute) is set in the sound control unit 148 as the volume (value) of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the sound output device 9, and notification corresponding to an important event is made. It is possible to emphasize (make the sound stand out).
  In step T6-1-23, the overall CPU 142 outputs a volume value notification signal corresponding to ¼ of the current volume value to the voice control unit, and ends the current event notification process. As a result, the volume (value) of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 is ¼ of the current volume value (the value depending on the current adjustment mode and volume value). ) Is set in the voice control unit 148, and the notification sound corresponding to the normal event can be emphasized (conspicuous) over the effect sound.
  At the end of notification of the event that has occurred, the volume (value) of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM or SE) is restored to the state before the output of the notification sound corresponding to the event is started (current volume value). Instead, the initial value of the volume specified by the current adjustment mode may be restored. In addition, when one of important event notification and normal event notification ends, it returns to the state before the event notification started (current volume value) and the other ends May be returned to the initial value of the volume specified by the current adjustment mode.
  Also, in the case where the effect sound (game such as BGM, SE, etc.) is set to a volume corresponding to a volume value of 0 or a volume corresponding to 1/4 of the current volume value is output, a notification sound of an event that has occurred is output. In addition, a notification sound of an event that has occurred after the volume of the production sound has been gradually reduced (fade out) may be output, or an event that has occurred after the volume of the production sound has been gradually reduced (fade out) The volume of the sound may be gradually increased (fade in), or the volume of the notification sound of the event that occurs may be gradually increased (fade in) while the volume of the production sound is gradually decreased (fade out). It may be (so-called crossfade). Even when the volume of the production sound is returned to the original volume based on the end of the notification sound of the event that has occurred, fade-out, fade-in, and crossfade processing is performed with the production sound of the notification sound of the event that has occurred. It is good to do.
(Event notification image)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a notification image of an event displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) when an event to be notified occurs. Specifically, FIG. 78A is a diagram showing a notification image for notifying that power has been turned on, and FIG. 78B is a diagram showing a notification image for notifying that power recovery has occurred. 78 (c) shows a notification image for notifying that an illegal winning has occurred, a notification image for notifying that a magnetic abnormality has occurred, a notification image for notifying that an abnormal winning has occurred, and opening of a frame has occurred. It is a figure which shows the alerting image which alert | reports having performed, the alerting image which alert | reports that the dish full occurred, and the alerting image which alert | reports that the right-handed error generate | occur | produced.
  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), a power-on notification image for notifying that power-on has occurred is a character image G1 including characters “Please wait for initialization” superimposed on a monochrome background image; It is composed of a gauge image G2 composed of a time gauge indicating the remaining power-on notification period (time), and the remaining notification period (time) is notified as the width of the black strip of the gauge image G2 increases with time. It has come to be.
  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), the power recovery notification image for notifying that the power recovery has occurred includes a character image G3 including characters “Please wait for a while during power recovery” superimposed on a monochrome background image; It is composed of a gauge image G2 composed of a time gauge indicating the remaining notification period (time) of power recovery, and the remaining notification period (time) is notified as the width of the black strip of the gauge image G2 increases with time. It has come to be.
  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the illegal winning notification image for notifying that an illegal winning has occurred is an icon image G4 composed of characters of “illegal winning” and an exclamation mark, and is a first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the abnormal winning notification image for notifying that an abnormal winning has occurred is an icon image G5 composed of characters of “abnormal winning” and an exclamation mark, and is a first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed at the lower right of the screen and immediately above the display position of the icon image G4.
  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the magnetic abnormality notification image for notifying that the magnetic abnormality has occurred is an icon image G6 composed of the characters “magnetic abnormality” and an exclamation mark, and is displayed in the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.
  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the radio wave abnormality notification image for notifying that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is an icon image G7 composed of the characters “radio wave abnormality” and an exclamation mark, and the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed at the lower left of the screen, directly above the display position of the icon image G6.
  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the frame opening notification image for notifying that the frame opening has occurred is an icon image G8 composed of the characters “door open” and an exclamation mark, and is displayed in the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen.
  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the full notification image for notifying that the full plate has occurred is an icon image G9 composed of characters “Extract the full plate ball” and an exclamation point. It is displayed at the lower center of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).
  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), a right-handed error notification image for notifying that a right-handed error has occurred is an icon image G10 composed of the characters “Please make a left-handed” and an exclamation point. The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
  The icon images G4 to G10 are displayed at positions that do not overlap with the stopped effect design 70a on an effective line set so as to cross the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in the vertical direction. It is configured to be displayed translucent (may be opaque) so that an effect image or the like displayed behind can be visually recognized. Further, when a plurality of events notified by the icon images G4 to G10 occur at the same time, the icon images G4 to G10 are also displayed at the same time.
  The icon images G4 to G10 are enlarged and displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) so as to be superimposed on the single-color background image, similarly to the power-on notification image and the power recovery notification image. Also good. In this case, the icon image corresponding to the higher priority event is preferentially displayed in the same manner as the event notification sound, and the display of the icon image corresponding to the lower priority event is waited. Is preferred.
  Further, the first image display device displays an icon image in the case of a normal event, and superimposes it on a monochrome background image in the case of an important event in the same manner as a power-on notification image or a power recovery notification image. The display may be enlarged to 70 (main liquid crystal). In this way, it becomes possible to increase the appealing power of important events, and it becomes easier for game shop staff to notice the occurrence of important events.
(Decision table for notification sound of occurrence event)
FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a generated event notification sound determination table for explaining the generated event notification sound output from the audio output device 9 when an event to be notified occurs. As shown in FIG. 79, the type of event to be generated and the notification sound of the generated event for reporting the generated event are associated with each other in the generated event notification sound determination table.
When power is turned on, a notification sound of an occurrence event composed of a combination of a sound “power is turned on” and a siren (warning sound, warning sound) is output.
When power recovery occurs, a notification sound of an occurrence event composed of a combination of a sound “power recovery” and a siren (warning sound, warning sound) is output.
When an illegal winning is generated, a notification sound of an occurrence event including a combination of a voice of “illegal winning” and a siren (warning sound, warning sound) is output.
When an abnormal winning occurs, a notification sound of an occurrence event composed of a combination of a voice “abnormal winning” and a siren (warning sound, warning sound) is output.
When a magnetic abnormality occurs, a notification sound of an occurrence event composed of a combination of a sound “magnetic abnormality” and a siren (warning sound, warning sound) is output.
When a radio wave abnormality occurs, a notification sound of an occurrence event composed of a combination of a sound of “radio wave abnormality” and a siren (warning sound, warning sound) is output.
When the opening of the frame occurs, a notification sound of the generated event consisting of a sound “door is open” is output.
When the dish is full, a notification sound of an occurrence event including a voice “please remove the ball” is output.
When a right-handed error occurs, a notification sound of the generated event including a voice “Please make a left-handed” is output.
  As described above, in the determination table for the notification sound of the occurrence event, the siren (warning sound, alert) is used for the notification sound of the occurrence event of an important event (power-on, power recovery, illegal prize, abnormal prize, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality). Sound), and the notification sound of the occurrence of a normal event (frame open, full plate, right-handed error) does not include a siren (warning sound, warning sound). The notification level (warning level, warning level) of an important event is higher than the notification level.
◇ (Volume setting process of LCD controller)
The volume setting process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the volume setting process of the liquid crystal control unit 141.
  First, in step T6-2-1, the overall CPU 142 has received the command 1 for volume adjustment guidance transmitted from the effect control unit 130m at the start of the customer waiting state (waiting for the customer waiting effect). If the command 1 for volume adjustment guidance is received (step T6-2-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-2, and the command for volume adjustment guidance is performed. If 1 is not received (step T6-2-1: No), the process proceeds to step T6-2-3.
  In step T6-2-2, the overall CPU 142 sets the display information of the volume adjustment guide image for guiding the volume adjustment in the display list, and ends the current volume setting process. As a result, a display list including display information of the guidance image for volume adjustment is output to the image control unit 145, and the guidance image for volume adjustment is displayed on the image display device. Note that the guidance image for volume adjustment will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T6-2-3, the overall CPU 142 receives a volume adjustment start command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m by operating the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 during the volume adjustment possible period. If the sound volume adjustment start command is received (step T6-2-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-4, and the sound volume adjustment start command is received. If not (step T6-2-3: No), the process proceeds to step T6-2-6.
  In step T6-2-4, the overall CPU 142 clears the display information of the guidance image for volume adjustment from the display list, and in step T6-2-5, the overall CPU 142 clears the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the current volume value. The display information is set in the display list, and the current volume setting process is terminated. As a result, a display list including the display information of the volume value notification image instead of the display information of the volume adjustment guidance image is output to the image control unit 145, and the volume value notification image is displayed instead of the volume adjustment guidance image. It will be displayed on the display device. Note that the notification image of the volume value will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T6-2-6, the central CPU 142 determines that the operation interval monitoring time (3 seconds) has elapsed since the final operation of the cross key 19 during volume adjustment, or the volume adjustment is not possible during the volume adjustment. It is determined whether or not a volume adjustment end command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m is received. If a volume adjustment end command is received (step T6-2-6: Yes), The process moves to T6-2-7, and if a volume adjustment end command has not been received (step T6-2-6: No), the process moves to step T6-2-8.
  In step T6-2-7, the overall CPU 142 clears the display information of the sound volume notification image from the display list, and ends the current sound volume setting process. As a result, a display list that does not include the display information of the notification image of the volume value is output to the image control unit 145, and the notification image of the volume value is not displayed on the image display device.
  In step T6-2-8, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a volume value notification image is being displayed, and if the volume value notification image is being displayed (step T6-2-8: Yes). In step T6-2-9, the process proceeds to step T6-2-9. If the volume value notification image is not being displayed (step T6-2-8: No), the process proceeds to step T6-213.
  In step T6-2-9, the overall CPU 142 performs a volume setting process for increasing or decreasing the volume value of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE) using the cross key 19, and in step T6-2. At -10, the display information of the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the current volume value is set in the display list. As a result, a display list including display information of the notification image of the volume value reflecting the increase / decrease of the volume value is output to the image control unit 145, and the notification image of the volume value is displayed on the image display device. The volume changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T6-211, the general CPU 142 determines whether the customer is currently waiting or not (step T6-211: Yes). When the process is shifted to 2-12 and the customer is not waiting (step T6-211: No), the current sound volume setting process is terminated.
  In step T6-22-1, the overall CPU 142 sets the output information of the notification sound of the sound volume corresponding to the current sound volume value in the output list, and ends the current sound volume setting process. As a result, a sound list including output information of sound volume notification sound corresponding to the current sound volume value is output to the sound control unit 148, and sound volume sound notification is output from the sound output device 9. The volume notification sound will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T6-213, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the customer waiting effect has been started. If the customer waiting effect has been started (step T6-213: Yes), the general CPU 142 determines whether or not the customer waiting effect has been started. The process is shifted to -14, and when the customer waiting effect is not started (step T6-213: No), the current volume setting process is terminated.
  In step T6-214, the overall CPU 142 performs a volume value reset process for resetting the current volume value to the initial volume value corresponding to the current adjustment mode, and ends the current volume setting process. . The volume value reset process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  As described above, in the volume setting process in the present embodiment, volume adjustment (increase or decrease in volume value) using the cross key 19 only during the display of the notification image of the volume value, even during the volume adjustment possible period. ) And the notification image of the volume value reflecting the result of the volume adjustment is displayed, so that the current volume value can be notified to the player. Therefore, the volume can be adjusted while checking the current volume value, and the volume (value) intended by the player can be set.
  In addition, since the sound output device 9 outputs a notification sound having a volume corresponding to the current volume value when in a customer waiting state (waiting for a customer waiting effect where no effect sound is output), the sound output device 9 outputs a sound volume. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as the fact that the notification sound is output and the effect sound of the variation effect is obstructed, or the sound notification sound of the volume is output and the effect sound of the jackpot game is obstructed during the jackpot game It is possible to notify the player of the volume value at an appropriate timing.
  ◇ In addition, the current volume value is set to the current volume value immediately before the start of the customer waiting effect, which is executed when the non-operating state of the cross key 19 continues during the waiting time of the customer waiting effect (60 seconds) while waiting for the customer waiting effect. Since the process of resetting the volume to the initial value corresponding to the adjustment mode is performed, the effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) (Game sound) is not output, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to the player of the customer waiting effect.
(Volume adjustment guide image)
FIG. 81A is a diagram showing a volume adjustment guide image displayed on the image display device at the start of the customer waiting state in the volume adjustment possible period. The volume adjustment guide image includes an image of a cross key imitating the cross key 19 indicating that the left button and the right button are lit, and a character image indicating that the volume adjustment is started by operating the left button or the right button. It is comprised by.
(Volume value notification image)
FIG. 81B is a diagram showing a notification image of the volume value displayed on the image display device when the volume adjustment is started by operating the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 during the volume adjustment possible period. is there. The notification image of the volume value is used to notify the volume value by an image of a cross key imitating the cross key 19 indicating that the left button and the right button are emitting light and the number of lit (white) square gauges. And a speaker image for numerically informing the volume value. It should be noted that minus and plus identifiers are respectively displayed on the left and right buttons of the cross key image.
The notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value 0 is in a display mode in which “0” is included in the speaker image in a state where the gauge of the gauge image is completely extinguished (blackened).
The notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value 1 has a display mode in which “1” is included in the speaker image in a state where only one gauge of the gauge image is lit (whited).
The notification image of the sound volume value corresponding to the sound volume value 2 has a display mode in which “2” is included in the speaker image in a state where 2 gauges of the gauge image are lit (white paint).
The notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value 3 has a display mode in which “3” is included in the image of the speaker in a state where the 3 gauges of the gauge image are lit (whited).
The notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value 4 has a display mode in which “4” is included in the speaker image in a state in which the gauge of the gauge image is lit (white).
The notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value 5 is in a display mode in which “5” is included in the speaker image in a state where all the gauges in the gauge image are lit (whited).
(Volume notification sound)
FIG. 81 (c) shows a sound volume notification sound output from the sound output device 9 when the sound volume value is changed by operating the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 while the sound volume value notification image is displayed. FIG.
The notification sound with a volume value of 0 is silent.
The notification sound of the volume of volume value 1 is “do” indicating the first pitch of the scale.
The notification sound of the volume of volume value 2 is “L” indicating the second pitch of the scale.
The notification sound of the volume level 3 is “mi” indicating the third pitch of the scale.
The notification sound of the volume value 4 is “F” indicating the fourth pitch of the scale.
The notification sound of the volume of volume value 5 is “So” indicating the fifth pitch of the scale.
  In this way, when the volume value is continuously increased or decreased, the pitch of the notification sound of the volume gradually changes, so it becomes possible to immediately grasp the change in the volume value, and the kindness of the player It is possible to make a notification.
◇ (Volume change processing of LCD controller)
The volume changing process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the volume change processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141.
  First, in step T6-2-9-1, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not it has received a volume reduction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m when the left button of the cross key 19 during volume adjustment is operated. If the volume reduction command is received (step T6-2-9-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-2-2, and the volume reduction command is Is not received (step T6-2-9-1: No), the process proceeds to step T6-2-9-5.
  In step T6-2-2-2, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the current volume value is larger than the lower limit value of the adjustment range of the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode. (T6-2-9-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-9-3, and if it is not greater than the lower limit (step T6-2-9-2: No), step T6 The process is transferred to -2-9-5.
  In step T6-2-9-3, the overall CPU 142 subtracts 1 from the volume value. In step T6-2-9-4, the overall CPU 142 sends a volume value notification signal corresponding to the volume value after the subtraction to the audio control unit 148. Output. Thereby, the volume value corresponding to the notification signal of the volume value is set in the voice control unit 148 as a volume value of a production sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the voice output device 9.
  In step T6-2-9-5, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a volume increase command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m is received when the right button of the cross key 19 during volume adjustment is operated. If the command for increasing the volume is received (step T6-2-9-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-9-6, and the command for increasing the volume is received. If not (step T6-2-9-5: No), the current sound volume changing process is terminated.
  In step T6-2-9-6, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the current volume value is smaller than the upper limit value of the adjustment range of the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode. (T6-2-9-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-9-7, and if it is not smaller than the upper limit value (step T6-2-9-6: No), this time End the volume change process.
  In step T6-2-9-7, the overall CPU 142 adds 1 to the volume value. In step T6-2-9-8, the overall CPU 142 sends a volume value notification signal corresponding to the added volume value to the voice control unit 148. Output, and the current volume changing process is terminated. Thereby, the volume value corresponding to the notification signal of the volume value is set in the voice control unit 148 as a volume value of a production sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the voice output device 9.
  Note that, when the adjustment mode 1 is set by the changeover switch 22 and the initial value of the volume is set to “0”, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible. If the initial value is changed from “0”, control may be performed so that the value does not return to “0” again. In this way, it is possible to reduce the volume to 0% corresponding to the volume value “0” only during the maintenance work of the gaming machine 1 at the game store side, and maintenance is performed by the effect sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE). Work will not be hindered.
  Further, there are six types of volume values “0” to “5” that are the same as the initial value of the volume set by the operation of the changeover switch 22 as the volume value that can be set by the volume adjustment by the operation of the cross key 19. The volume value that can be set by the operation of “0” may be other than six types “0” to “5”. For example, there are three types of “1”, “3”, and “5” that can be set by operating the changeover switch 22. , Six types of “0.5”, “1.5”, “2.5”, “3.5”, “4.5” that cannot be set by the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the operation of the changeover switch 22 The volume value may be set to 11 types in increments of 0.5 from “0” to “5” consisting of a volume value that can be set and a volume value that cannot be set.
◇ (Volume value reset process of LCD controller)
The volume value reset process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83A is a flowchart showing the volume value reset process of the liquid crystal control unit 141.
  First, in step T6-214-1, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the volume adjustment possibility set in the overall RAM 144 is “possible”, and whether or not the volume adjustment is possible is “possible”. If this is the case (step T6-214-1: Yes), the process moves to step T6-214-2, and if the volume adjustment is not “possible” (step T6-214-1: No). ) Ends the reset processing of the current volume value.
  In step T6-214-2, the overall CPU 142 confirms the initial volume value and the current volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode, and in step T6-214-3, the current volume value is the initial volume level. It is determined whether or not the value is smaller than the value. If the value is smaller than the initial value of the sound volume (step T6-2-14-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-214-4, and the initial sound volume is set. If it is not smaller than the value (step T6-2-14-3: No), the current volume value reset process is terminated.
  In step T6-2-14-4, the overall CPU 142 resets the volume value by setting the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode to the volume value, and in step T6-2-14-5, the volume after the reset. The volume value notification signal corresponding to the value is output to the voice control unit 148, and the current volume value reset process ends. Thereby, the volume value corresponding to the notification signal of the volume value is set in the voice control unit 148 as a volume value of a production sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the voice output device 9.
  ◇ In this way, when the current volume value is lower than the initial volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode, the volume value is reset, and when the current volume value is higher than the initial volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode. By not resetting the volume value, an effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) of the customer waiting effect is output with a volume value equal to or higher than the volume value intended by the game shop side that has set the adjustment mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to the player waiting for the effect or to improve the appealing power of the customer waiting based on the result of the player's volume adjustment.
◇ (Modified example of reset processing of volume value of LCD controller)
A modified example of the volume value reset process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83B is a flowchart showing a modification of the volume value reset process of the liquid crystal control unit 141. Note that the present modification is different from the volume value reset process described above in that the volume value is reset without comparing the initial value of the volume with the current volume value.
  First, in step T6-2-14-11, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the volume adjustment possibility set in the overall RAM 144 is “possible”, and whether or not the volume adjustment is possible is “possible”. In the case (step T6-214-11: Yes), the process is transferred to step T6-214-12, and if the volume adjustment is not “possible” (step T6-214-11: No). ) Ends the reset processing of the current volume value.
  In step T6-214-12, the overall CPU 142 resets the volume value by setting the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode to the volume value, and in step T6-214-13, the volume after reset is set. The volume value notification signal corresponding to the value is output to the voice control unit 148, and the current volume value reset process ends. Thereby, the volume value corresponding to the notification signal of the volume value is set in the voice control unit 148 as a volume value of a production sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the voice output device 9.
  ◇ In this way, by resetting the volume value without comparing the initial volume value with the current volume value, the stage sound (BGM) Game sound such as SE, etc.) is output, and it is possible to prevent the appealing power of players of the same model installed side by side in a game store from appealing to a player.
  If the current volume value is larger than the initial volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode, the volume value is reset. If the current volume value is smaller than the initial volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode, the volume value is reset. May not be reset. By doing in this way, the effect sound (game sounds such as BGM, SE, etc.) of the customer waiting effect is not output with a volume value larger than the volume value intended by the game shop side for which the adjustment mode is set, There will be no situation where only the gaming machine 1 is noticeable.
(LCD brightness setting process)
The brightness setting process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal controller 141.
  First, in step T6-3-1, the general CPU 142 has received the brightness adjustment guidance command 1 transmitted from the effect control unit 130m at the start of the customer waiting state (waiting for the customer waiting effect). If the command 1 for brightness adjustment guidance is received (step T6-3-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-2, and the command for guidance of brightness adjustment is performed. If 1 is not received (step T6-3-1: No), the process proceeds to step T6-3-3.
  In step T <b> 6-3-2, the overall CPU 142 sets the display information of the brightness adjustment guide image for guiding the brightness adjustment in the display list, and ends the current brightness setting process. As a result, a display list including display information of the brightness adjustment guide image is output to the image control unit 145, and the brightness adjustment guide image is displayed on the image display device. The brightness adjustment guide image will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T6-3-3, the overall CPU 142 receives the brightness adjustment start command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m by operating the lower button or the upper button of the cross key 19 during the brightness adjustment possible period. If the brightness adjustment start command is received (step T6-3-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-4, and the brightness adjustment start command is received. If not (step T6-3-3: No), the process proceeds to step T6-3-6.
  In step T6-3-4, the overall CPU 142 clears the display information of the brightness adjustment guide image from the display list, and in step T6-3-5, the overall CPU 142 displays the brightness value notification image corresponding to the current brightness value. The display information is set in the display list, and the current luminance setting process is terminated. As a result, a display list including the display information of the brightness value notification image instead of the display information of the brightness adjustment guide image is output to the image control unit 145, and the brightness value notification image is displayed instead of the brightness adjustment guide image. It will be displayed on the display device. The notification image of the brightness value will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step T6-3-6, the general CPU 142 determines that the operation interval monitoring time (3 seconds) has elapsed since the final operation of the cross key 19 during luminance adjustment, or the luminance adjustment is not possible during luminance adjustment. It is determined whether or not the brightness adjustment end command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m is received. If the brightness adjustment end command is received (step T6-3-6: Yes), The process moves to T6-3-7, and if the brightness adjustment end command has not been received (step T6-3-6: No), the process moves to step T6-3-8.
  In step T6-3-7, the overall CPU 142 clears the display information of the notification image of the luminance value from the display list, and ends the current luminance setting process. As a result, a display list that does not include the display information of the brightness value notification image is output to the image control unit 145, and the brightness value notification image is not displayed on the image display device.
  In step T6-3-8, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a luminance value notification image is being displayed. If the luminance value notification image is being displayed (step T6-3-8: Yes). In step T6-3-9, the process proceeds to step T6-3-12. If the brightness notification image is not being displayed (step T6-3-8: No), the process proceeds to step T6-3-12.
  In step T6-3-9, the overall CPU 142 determines the brightness (value) of the backlight of the image display device using the cross key 19 and the lamps (LEDs) of various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74). ) Is changed to increase or decrease. The luminance changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  The overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the luminance value has changed in step T6-3-10. If the luminance value has changed (step T6-3-10: Yes), step T6-3- If the process shifts to No. 11 and the brightness value changes (step T6-3-10: No), the current brightness setting process is terminated.
  In step T6-3-11, the overall CPU 142 sets the display information of the notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the current luminance value in the display list, and ends the current luminance setting process. Thereby, a display list including display information of the notification image of the luminance value reflecting the increase / decrease of the luminance (value) is output to the image control unit 145, and the notification image of the luminance value is displayed on the image display device. .
  In step T6-3-12, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the customer waiting effect has been started. If the customer waiting effect has been started (step T6-3-12: Yes), step T6-3 is executed. When the process is shifted to -13 and the customer waiting effect is not started (step T6-3-12: No), the current luminance setting process is ended.
  In step T6-3-13, the overall CPU 142 performs a brightness value reset process for resetting the current brightness value to the initial brightness value corresponding to the current adjustment mode, and ends the current brightness setting process. . The luminance value reset processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
  As described above, in the brightness setting process according to the present embodiment, brightness adjustment (increase or decrease in brightness value) using the cross key 19 only during display of the notification image of the brightness value, even during the brightness adjustment possible period. Since the notification image of the luminance value reflecting the result of the luminance adjustment is displayed, the current luminance value can be notified to the player. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the luminance while confirming the current luminance value, and it is possible to set the luminance (value) intended by the player.
  In addition, the current luminance value is set to the current brightness value immediately before the start of the customer waiting effect, which is executed when the non-operation state of the cross key 19 continues during the waiting time of the customer waiting effect (60 seconds) while waiting for the customer waiting effect. A process of resetting to the initial value of the brightness corresponding to the adjustment mode is performed. Therefore, the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) have a luminance value lower than the luminance value intended by the amusement shop for which the adjustment mode is set. No light is emitted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to the player of the customer waiting effect.
(Guidance image for brightness adjustment)
FIG. 85A is a diagram showing a brightness adjustment guide image displayed on the image display device at the start of the customer waiting state in the brightness adjustment possible period. The brightness adjustment guide image includes an image of a cross key imitating the cross key 19 indicating that the lower button and the upper button are lit, and a character image indicating that the brightness adjustment is started by operating the lower button or the upper button. It is comprised by.
  FIG. 85B is a diagram showing a notification image of the brightness value displayed on the image display device when the brightness adjustment is started by operating the lower button or the upper button of the cross key 19 during the brightness adjustment possible period. is there. The notification image of the brightness value is used to notify the brightness value by the image of the cross key imitating the cross key 19 representing the state in which the lower button and the upper button emit light and the number of lit (white-painted) rhombus gauges. The gauge image and a lamp image for informing the luminance value numerically. In addition, the minus and plus identifiers are displayed on the lower and upper buttons of the cross key image, respectively.
The notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value 0 is in a display mode in which the lamp image includes “0” in a state where the gauge of the gauge image is completely turned off (becomes black).
The notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value 1 is in a display mode in which only one gauge of the gauge image is lit (white paint) and the lamp image includes “1”.
The notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value 2 is in a display mode in which “2” is included in the lamp image in a state where 2 gauges of the gauge image are lit (white paint).
The notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value 3 is in a display mode in which “3” is included in the lamp image in a state where the 3 gauges of the gauge image are lit (white paint).
The notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value 4 is in a display mode in which “4” is included in the lamp image in a state where the four gauges of the gauge image are lit (white paint).
The notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value 5 is in a display mode in which “5” is included in the lamp image in a state where all the gauges of the gauge image are lit (white paint).
(LCD brightness change process)
The brightness changing process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the luminance changing process of the liquid crystal control unit 141.
  First, in step T6-3-9-1, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not it has received a brightness reduction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m when the lower button of the cross key 19 during brightness adjustment is operated. If the command for decreasing the brightness is received (step T6-3-9-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-9-2, and the command for decreasing the brightness is received. Is not received (step T6-3-9-1: No), the process proceeds to step T6-3-9-6.
  In step T6-3-9-2, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the current luminance value is larger than the lower limit value of the adjustment range of the luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode. (T6-3-9-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-9-3. If it is not larger than the lower limit (step T6-3-9-2: No), step T6 The process is transferred to -2-9-6.
  In step T6-3-9-3, the overall CPU 142 subtracts 1 from the luminance value, and in step T6-3-9-4, the overall CPU 142 sends a luminance value notification signal corresponding to the luminance value after the subtraction to the image control unit 145. Output. Thereby, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.
  In step T6-3-9-5, the overall CPU 142 sets a luminance value notification command corresponding to the luminance value after the subtraction in the transmission buffer of the overall RAM 144. Thereby, a brightness value notification command is transmitted to the lamp control unit, and the brightness value corresponding to the brightness value notification command is the brightness of the lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 74). The value is set in the lamp control unit 150 as a value.
  In step T6-3-9-6, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a brightness increase command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m when the upper button of the cross key 19 during brightness adjustment is operated is received. If the command for increasing the brightness is received (step T6-3-9-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-9-7, and the command for increasing the brightness is received. If not (step T6-3-9-6: No), the current luminance changing process is terminated.
  In step T6-3-9-7, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the current luminance value is smaller than the upper limit value of the adjustment range of the luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode. (T6-3-9-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-9-8, and if it is not smaller than the upper limit (step T6-3-9-7: No), this time The brightness change process is terminated.
  In step T6-3-9-8, the overall CPU 142 adds 1 to the luminance value. In step T6-3-9-9, the overall CPU 142 sends a luminance value notification signal corresponding to the luminance value after addition to the image control unit 145. Output. Thereby, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.
  In step T6-3-9-10, the overall CPU 142 sets a luminance value notification command corresponding to the added luminance value in the transmission buffer of the overall RAM 144. As a result, a brightness value notification command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value corresponding to the brightness value notification command is transmitted from the lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74). The brightness value is set in the lamp control unit 150.
  When the adjustment mode 1 is set by the changeover switch 22 and the initial luminance value is set to “0”, the luminance adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible. If the initial value is changed from “0”, control may be performed so that the value does not return to “0” again. In this way, the volume can be reduced to 0% corresponding to the luminance value “0” only during the maintenance work of the gaming machine 1 at the game store side, and the maintenance work is hindered by the light emitted from various lighting devices. It will not be.
(Reset processing of brightness value of LCD controller)
The brightness value reset processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87A is a flowchart showing the luminance value reset processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141.
  First, in step T <b> 6-3-13-1, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the luminance adjustment set in the overall RAM 144 is “possible”, and whether or not the luminance adjustment is possible is “possible”. If this is the case (step T6-3-13-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-13-2, and if the brightness adjustment is not possible (step T6-3-13-1: No). ), The current luminance value reset process is terminated.
  In step T6-3-13-2, the overall CPU 142 confirms the initial luminance value and the current luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode, and in step T6-3-13-3, the current luminance value is the initial luminance value. It is determined whether or not the value is smaller than the initial value. If the luminance is smaller than the initial value of the luminance (step T6-3-13-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-13-4, and the initial luminance is obtained. If it is not smaller than the value (step T6-3-13-3: No), the current luminance value reset process is terminated.
  In step T6-3-13-4, the overall CPU 142 resets the luminance value by setting the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode to the luminance value, and in step T6-3-13-5, the luminance after reset is set. The notification signal of the brightness value corresponding to the value is output to the image control unit 145, and the current brightness value reset process is terminated. Thereby, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.
  In step T6-3-13-6, the overall CPU 142 sets a luminance value notification command corresponding to the luminance value after reset in the transmission buffer of the overall RAM 144, and ends the current luminance value reset process. As a result, a brightness value notification command is transmitted to the lamp controller 150, and the brightness value corresponding to the brightness value notification command is sent to the lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74). The brightness value is set in the lamp control unit 150.
  Thus, when the current luminance value is smaller than the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode, the luminance value is reset, and when the current luminance value is larger than the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode. By not resetting the brightness value, the backlight of the image display device and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board The lamp (LED) of the illumination device 74) emits light. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to the player waiting for the effect of the customer, or to improve the appealing power of the customer waiting effect in response to the result of the player's brightness adjustment.
(Modification of brightness value reset process of LCD controller)
A modified example of the luminance value reset processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87B is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the luminance value reset process of the liquid crystal control unit 141. Note that this modification is different from the luminance value reset processing described above in that the luminance value is reset without comparing the initial luminance value with the current luminance value.
  First, in step T6-3-13-11, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the brightness adjustment possibility set in the overall RAM 144 is “possible”, and the brightness adjustment possibility is “possible”. In the case (step T6-3-13-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-13-12, and whether or not brightness adjustment is possible is not set in the overall RAM 144 (step T6-3-13). -11: No), the current luminance value reset process is terminated.
  In step T6-3-13-12, the overall CPU 142 resets the luminance value by setting the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode to the luminance value, and in step T6-3-13-13, the luminance after the reset is reset. A notification signal of the luminance value corresponding to the value is output to the image control unit 145. Thereby, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.
  In step T6-3-13-14, the overall CPU 142 sets a luminance value notification command corresponding to the reset luminance value in the transmission buffer of the overall RAM 144, and ends the current luminance value reset process. As a result, a brightness value notification command is transmitted to the lamp controller 150, and the brightness value corresponding to the brightness value notification command is sent to the lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74). The brightness value is set in the lamp control unit 150.
  In this way, by resetting the luminance value without comparing the initial luminance value with the current luminance value, the image display is performed according to the luminance value intended by the game shop side that has set the adjustment mode during execution of the customer waiting effect. The backlight of the device and the lamps (LEDs) of various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74) emit light. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the appealing power of players of the same model that are installed side by side in the game store from appealing to customers.
  If the current luminance value is larger than the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode, the luminance value is reset. If the current luminance value is smaller than the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode, the luminance value is reset. May not be reset. By doing in this way, the backlight of the image display device and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board use) according to the luminance value higher than the luminance value intended by the game shop side that has set the adjustment mode during the execution of the customer waiting effect. The lamp (LED) of the lighting device 74) does not emit light, and only a specific gaming machine 1 does not stand out.
(Control processing of power saving mode of LCD controller)
The power saving mode control process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a power saving mode control process of the liquid crystal control unit 141.
  First, in step T6-4-1, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is started. When the customer waiting effect is started (step T6-4-1: Yes), If the process moves to T6-4-2 and the customer waiting effect is not started (step T6-4-1: No), the process moves to step T6-4-6.
  In step T6-4-2, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the power saving mode setting stored in the overall RAM 144 is ON. If the power saving mode setting is ON (step T6-4-2). : Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-4-3. If the power saving mode setting is not ON (step T6-4-2: No), the process proceeds to step T6-4-6.
  In step T6-4-3, the overall CPU 142 stores power saving mode execution information indicating that the power saving mode is being executed in a predetermined storage area of the overall RAM 144. In step T6-4-4, the overall CPU 142 stores the power saving mode execution information. Notification signal (in this case, luminance 50% = luminance value 0) is output to the image control unit 145. Thereby, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device. That is, low luminance light emission (light emission in the power saving mode) of the backlight of the image display device is started.
  In step T6-4-5, the overall CPU 142 sets a brightness value notification command for the power saving mode in the transmission buffer of the overall RAM 144. As a result, a notification command of the brightness value for the power saving mode (here, brightness 50% = brightness value 0) is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value corresponding to the notification command of the brightness value for the power saving mode is various lighting devices. The brightness value of the lamp (LED) of (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) is set in the lamp control unit 150. That is, low-luminance light emission (light-saving mode light emission) of lamps (LEDs) of various illumination devices is started.
  In step T6-4-6, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the customer waiting effect ends. If the customer waiting effect ends (step T6-4-6: Yes), step T6-4- If the customer waiting effect is not finished (step T6-4-6: No), the current power saving mode control process is finished.
  In step T6-4-7, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the power saving mode execution information is set in a predetermined storage area of the overall RAM 144, and if the power saving mode execution information is set (step T6). -4-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-4-8. If the execution information of the power saving mode is not set (step T6-4-7: No), the current power saving mode The control process ends.
  In step T6-4-8, the overall CPU 142 clears the power saving mode execution information set in the overall RAM 144. In step T6-4-9, the overall CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of the luminance value corresponding to the current luminance value. The data is output to the control unit 145. Thereby, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device. That is, the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device returns to the luminance value at the start of the customer waiting effect (after the luminance value reset process).
  In step T6-4-10, the overall CPU 142 sets a luminance value command corresponding to the current luminance value in the transmission buffer of the overall RAM 144, and ends the current power saving mode control process. Thereby, a brightness value notification command is transmitted to the lamp control unit, and the brightness value corresponding to the brightness value notification command is the brightness of the lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 74). The value is set in the lamp control unit 150 as a value. That is, the luminance values of the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices are restored to the luminance values at the start of the customer waiting effect (after the luminance value reset process).
  When the changeover switch 22 is operated during the power saving mode, the adjustment mode is changed by the mode switching process described above, and the image control unit 145 or the lamp control unit 150 corresponds to the initial value of the brightness of the adjustment mode after the change. Since the luminance value is set (rewritten), the power saving mode is substantially ended.
  However, when the adjustment mode is changed from mode 2 to mode 1, the initial value of the luminance in mode 1 is the same value (0) as the luminance value in the power saving mode. Will continue.
  When the changeover switch 22 is operated during the power saving mode, the adjustment mode is changed by the mode switching process described above, and a volume value corresponding to the initial value of the changed adjustment mode is set in the voice control unit 148. Therefore, the volume of the production sound (BGM, SE, etc.) for the customer waiting effect output from the audio output device 9 also changes.
  However, when the adjustment mode is changed from mode 6 to mode 7, the initial value of the volume in mode 6 and mode 7 is the same value (5), so that the customer waiting output from the audio output device 9 is awaited. The volume of the effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) for the effect will not change.
  Although the customer waiting effect does not end halfway along with the end of the power saving mode by the operation of the changeover switch 22, the customer waiting effect may be ended by the operation of the changeover switch 22.
◇ (Example of output volume by voice control unit 148)
An example of the output volume by the voice control unit 148 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an example of the output sound volume by the sound control unit 148. In the table of the output volume example, the type of sound output from the audio output device 9 is associated with the output volume in the event non-notification period, the important event notification period, and the normal event notification period. .
"Notification sound of important events"
Important event notification sound output from the sound output device 9 when an important event occurs (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, unauthorized winning notification sound, abnormal winning notification sound, magnetic abnormality notification sound , The notification sound of radio wave abnormality) is a fixed volume value (in this embodiment, the volume value “in this embodiment”) set by the voice control unit 148 in response to reception of the notification signal of the fixed volume value output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. 6 ", which is the maximum volume output from the gaming machine 1).
  Specifically, in a state where the fixed volume value “6” is set in the voice control unit 148, an important event occurs during the non-notification period of the occurrence event, and the voice control unit 148 notifies the important event. When the sound list including the sound output information is received, the notification sound of the important event corresponding to the generated important event is received from the sound output device 9 at the maximum volume (volume 120%) corresponding to the fixed volume value “6”. Is output. That is, regardless of the volume value set in the voice control unit 148 from “0” to “5”, the maximum volume corresponding to the fixed volume value “6” without depending on this volume value. The sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 120%.
`` Normal event notification sound ''
A normal event notification sound (frame opening notification sound, dish full notification sound, right-handed error notification sound) output from the audio output device 9 when a normal event occurs is output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. It is output depending on (corresponding to) the volume value (in this embodiment, “0” to “5”) set by the voice control unit 148 in response to the reception of the volume value notification signal.
  Specifically, in a state where the sound volume value “0” is set in the voice control unit 148, a normal event occurs during the non-notification period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 outputs a normal event notification sound. When the sound list including the information is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is output from the sound output device 9 at a volume of 0% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “0” (or Do not output).
  Further, a normal event occurs during the non-notification period of the event with the volume value “1” set in the voice control unit 148, and the voice control unit 148 includes output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 20% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “1”.
  In addition, a normal event occurs during the non-notification period of the event in a state where the volume value “2” is set in the voice control unit 148, and the voice control unit 148 includes output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “2”.
  In addition, a normal event occurs during a non-notification period of the event in a state where the volume value “3” is set in the voice control unit 148, and the voice control unit 148 includes output information of a normal event notification sound. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “3”.
  Further, a normal event occurs during the non-notification period of the event with the volume value “4” set in the voice control unit 148, and the voice control unit 148 includes output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is output at a volume of 80% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “4”.
  Further, a normal event occurs during the non-notification period of the event in a state where the volume value “5” is set in the voice control unit 148, and the voice control unit 148 includes output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 100% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “5”.
  If the sound control unit 148 has a volume value “0” and the normal event notification sound is output (or not output) at a volume of 0%, the player will be notified of the occurrence of the normal event. For example, a normal event notification sound may be output at a volume of 20% corresponding to the volume value “1”. In this way, even if the volume value is set to “0”, it is possible to make the player or game clerk recognize the occurrence of a normal event. Note that the volume may depend on (correspond to) other volume values.
"Notification sound for adjustment mode"
The adjustment mode notification sound output from the audio output device 9 when the adjustment mode is changed by the operation of the changeover switch 22 corresponds to the reception of the fixed volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. 148 is output at the maximum volume output from the gaming machine 1 depending on the fixed volume value (volume value “6”) set.
  Specifically, in a state where the fixed volume value “6” is set in the voice control unit 148, the changeover switch 22 is operated during the non-notification period of the occurrence event or the notification period of the normal event, and the adjustment mode is set. When the sound control unit 148 is changed and receives the sound list including the output information of the notification sound of the adjustment mode, the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode is the maximum volume corresponding to the fixed volume value “6”. The sound is output from the sound output device 9 at a volume of 120%.
"Volume notification sound"
A sound volume notification sound output from the sound output device 9 when the sound volume value is changed by operating the cross key 19 is set by the sound control unit 148 in response to reception of the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. Are output depending on the volume value ("0" to "5" in this embodiment).
  Specifically, when the volume value is changed to “0” by the operation of the cross key 19 during the non-notification period of the occurrence event, the voice control unit 148 is notified by the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. When the volume value “0” is set and then the sound control unit 148 receives a sound list including the output information of the volume notification sound from the liquid crystal control unit 141, the volume notification sound corresponding to the volume value “0” is output. The sound is output at a volume of 0% corresponding to the value “0”. When the volume value is “0”, the volume notification sound is silent, and thus the volume notification sound is not actually output at an audible volume.
  When the volume value is changed to “1” by operating the cross key 19 during the non-notification period of the occurrence event, the volume value “1” is sent to the voice control unit 148 by the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. 1 ”is set, and then the sound control unit 148 receives a sound list including output information of the volume notification sound from the liquid crystal control unit 141, the volume notification sound“ do ”corresponding to the volume value“ 1 ”is The sound is output at a volume of 20% corresponding to the value “1”.
  When the volume value is changed to “2” by operating the cross key 19 during the event non-notification period, the volume value “2” is sent to the voice control unit 148 by the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. ”Is set, and then the sound control unit 148 receives the sound list including the output information of the volume notification sound from the liquid crystal control unit 141, the volume notification sound“ R ”corresponding to the volume value“ 2 ”is It is output at a volume of 40% corresponding to “2”.
  When the volume value is changed to “3” by operating the cross key 19 during the event non-notification period, the volume value “3” is sent to the voice control unit 148 by the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. ”Is set, and then the sound control unit 148 receives a sound list including the output information of the volume notification sound from the liquid crystal control unit 141, the volume notification sound“ mi ”corresponding to the volume value“ 3 ”is the volume value. The sound is output at a volume of 60% corresponding to “3”.
  When the volume value is changed to “4” by operating the cross key 19 during the event non-notification period, the volume value “4” is sent to the voice control unit 148 by the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. ”Is set, and then the sound control unit 148 receives the sound list including the output information of the sound volume notification sound from the liquid crystal control unit 141, the sound volume sound“ F ”corresponding to the sound volume value“ 4 ”is It is output at a volume of 80% corresponding to “4”.
  When the volume value is changed to “5” by operating the cross key 19 during the non-notification period of the event, the volume value “5” is sent to the voice control unit 148 by the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. ”Is set, and then the sound control unit 148 receives the sound list including the output information of the volume notification sound from the liquid crystal control unit 141, the volume notification sound“ So ”corresponding to the volume value“ 5 ”is set to the volume value. It is output at a volume of 100% corresponding to “5”.
"Direction sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE)"
The production sound (game sound such as BGM or SE) output from the audio output device 9 in a scene other than the standby state of the customer waiting production corresponds to the reception of the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. It is output depending on the volume value set by the voice control unit 148 (“0” to “5” in this embodiment).
  Specifically, as long as the sound volume value “0” is set in the voice control unit 148, it is any period of an event non-notification period, an important event notification period, and a normal event notification period. However, the effect sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 0% corresponding to the volume value “0”. In other words, although it is output as a non-audible sound, the production sound may not be output itself.
  Further, if the volume value “1” is set in the voice control unit 148, the volume of 20% corresponding to the volume value “1” is set during the event non-notification period, and the important event is set during the notification period. Is a volume of 0%, and during the normal event notification period, the production sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 5%, which is 1/4 of the volume value “1”.
  Further, if the sound volume value “2” is set in the voice control unit 148, during the non-notification period of the generated event, the notification period of the important event is 40% of the volume corresponding to the volume value “2”. Production sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 0%, and at a volume of 10%, which is 1/4 of the volume value “2”, during a normal event notification period.
  Further, if the sound volume value “3” is set in the voice control unit 148, during the non-notification period of the occurrence event, the notification period of the important event is 60% volume corresponding to the volume value “3”. Production sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 0%, and at a volume of 15%, which is 1/4 of the volume value “3”, during a normal event notification period.
  Also, if the sound volume value “4” is set in the voice control unit 148, the important event notification period is 80% of the volume corresponding to the volume value “4” during the non-notification period of the occurrence event. Production sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 0%, and at a volume of 20%, which is 1/4 of the volume value “4”, during the normal event notification period.
  Also, if the sound volume value “5” is set in the voice control unit 148, the important event notification period is 100% volume corresponding to the volume value “5” during the non-notification period of the occurrence event. Production sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 0%, and at a volume of 25%, which is 1/4 of the volume value “5”, during a normal event notification period.
"Notification sound (single notification sound, promotion notification sound, continuous notification sound)"
Notification sound (single notification sound, promotion notification sound, continuation notification sound) output from the sound output device 9 during the fluctuating performance or the jackpot game is a fixed volume value notification output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. It is output at the maximum volume output from the gaming machine 1 depending on (corresponding to) the fixed volume value (volume value “6”) set by the voice control unit 148 corresponding to the reception of the signal.
  Specifically, in a state where a fixed volume value “6” is set in the voice control unit 148, one notification is made during the event non-notification period, the important event notification period, and the normal event notification period. When any of the condition, the promotion notification condition, or the continuous notification condition is satisfied and the sound control unit 148 receives the sound list including the output information of the notification sound, the notification sound corresponding to the satisfied notification condition is a fixed volume value. The sound is output from the sound output device 9 at the maximum sound volume (volume 120%) corresponding to “6”.
  As described above, the notification sound is output at the maximum volume (volume 120%) output from the gaming machine 1 depending on the fixed volume value (volume value “6”). It is possible to make the player surely recognize the output of the notification sound for notifying that the game will be performed, and to improve the fun of the game by efficiently encouraging the player.
  Note that during the notification period of important events, the volume of the notification sound may be 0%, or may be a volume that depends on the volume value set in the voice control unit 148. Further, when the volume value set in the voice control unit 148 is “0”, the notification sound may be output at a volume of 0% or the notification sound may not be output. Further, the notification sound is output at a volume that is ¼ of the volume corresponding to the volume value set in the voice control unit 148 (for example, when the volume value is “3” and the volume is 60%, the volume is 15%). It may be output.
  In the present embodiment, the notification sound is output depending on the fixed volume value, but the jackpot urging the player to launch a game ball toward the right game area where the big winning opening 50 is provided during the jackpot game. A fixed right sound volume (right / short) notification sound or a short / medium right-hand notification (notification) sound that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the right game area in which the normal gate 44 is provided during the short-time gaming state. Depending on the volume value “6”), the maximum volume (volume 120%) output from the gaming machine 1 may be used.
  Further, the gaming machine 1 generates a probability-variable gaming state after the jackpot game ends based on the passage (winning) of the game ball to a specific area provided in the big winning opening 50, and the game ball to the specific area A predetermined passage notification (notification) sound is output from the audio output device 9 when the player passes, and the predetermined notification sound is output from the gaming machine 1 depending on a fixed volume value (volume value “6”). The maximum output volume (volume 120%) may be output. Even if the game ball passes through the specific area, a predetermined notification sound is output when the game ball that will generate the probability varying game state passes through the specific area. A predetermined notification sound may not be output when passing through the specific area.
  Further, the gaming machine 1 is configured to shift the small hit game to the big hit game based on the passing (winning) of the game ball to the specific area provided in the big winning opening 50 during the small hit game. A predetermined notification sound (passage notification sound) is output from the sound output device 9 when the game ball passes, and the predetermined notification sound depends on a fixed volume value (volume value “6”). 1 may be output at the maximum volume output from volume 1 (volume 120%). Even if the game ball passes through the specific area, a notification sound (notification) sound of passing is output when the game ball to be transferred to the jackpot game passes through the specific area, but other game balls When passing to a specific area, the notification sound of passing may not be output.
(Modification of output volume by voice control unit 148)
An output volume modification example by the sound control unit 148 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the output sound volume by the sound control unit 148. In the table of the modified output volume, the type of sound output from the audio output device 9 is associated with the output volume in the event non-notification period, the important event notification period, and the normal event notification period. ing. Here, only a portion different from the output volume example by the voice control unit 148 shown in FIG. 89 will be described.
`` Normal event notification sound ''
A normal event notification sound (frame opening notification sound, dish full notification sound, right-handed error notification sound) output from the audio output device 9 when a normal event occurs is output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. A volume that is 80% of the volume depending on the volume value (“0” to “5” in the present embodiment) set by the audio control unit 148 in response to the reception of the volume value notification signal, that is, the effect sound (BGM, It is output at a lower volume than game sounds such as SE.
  Specifically, in a state where the sound volume value “0” is set in the voice control unit 148, a normal event occurs during the non-notification period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 outputs a normal event notification sound. When a sound list including information is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is 80% of the volume (0%) that depends on (corresponds to) the volume value “0”, that is, 0%. Is output from the audio output device 9 (or not output).
  Further, a normal event occurs during the non-notification period of the event with the volume value “1” set in the voice control unit 148, and the voice control unit 148 includes output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event has a volume of 80% of the volume (20%) depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “1”, that is, a volume of 16%. Output from the audio output device 9.
  In addition, a normal event occurs during the non-notification period of the event in a state where the volume value “2” is set in the voice control unit 148, and the voice control unit 148 includes output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is 80% of the volume (40%) depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “2”, that is, the volume of 32%. Output from the audio output device 9.
  In addition, a normal event occurs during a non-notification period of the event in a state where the volume value “3” is set in the voice control unit 148, and the voice control unit 148 includes output information of a normal event notification sound. When the sound list is received, the normal event notification sound corresponding to the generated normal event has a volume of 80% of the volume (60%) depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “3”, that is, a volume of 48%. Output from the output device 9.
  Further, a normal event occurs during the non-notification period of the event with the volume value “4” set in the voice control unit 148, and the voice control unit 148 includes output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is a volume of 80% of the volume (80%) depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “4”, that is, a volume of 64%. Is output.
  Further, a normal event occurs during the non-notification period of the event in a state where the volume value “5” is set in the voice control unit 148, and the voice control unit 148 includes output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is 80% of the volume (100%) of the volume (100%) depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “5”, that is, the volume is 80%. Output from the output device 9.
  Since it did in this way, the sound notification sound and effect sound (game sounds, such as BGM and SE) which are output depending on (corresponding) to the sound volume value set in the sound control unit 148, from the sound notification of a normal event. Can also be emphasized (conspicuous), and it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game from being extremely lowered by the notification sound of a normal event.
  If the sound control unit 148 has a volume value “0” and the normal event notification sound is output (or not output) at a volume of 0%, the player will be notified of the occurrence of the normal event. Because it is difficult for the game shop clerk to recognize it, for example, a normal event notification sound is output at a volume of 80% of the volume (20%) depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “1”, that is, a volume of 16%. You may be made to do. In this way, even if the volume value is set to “0”, it is possible to make the player or game clerk recognize the occurrence of a normal event. It may be 80% of the volume depending on (corresponding to) other volume values.
  In the present embodiment, a fixed volume value is set in the audio control unit 148 by outputting a fixed volume value notification signal from the liquid crystal control unit 141 to the audio control unit 148 only once immediately after power-on. The output information (list for output) is output (notification), such as notification sound of important event, adjustment mode notification sound, notification sound, etc. Each time, the output information includes a fixed volume value “6”, and when the output information (output list) is notified to the voice control unit 148, the fixed volume value included in the output information. It is preferable to refer to the value and output a sound corresponding to the output information depending on (corresponding to) the fixed volume value.
  In the present embodiment, a fixed volume value is set in the audio control unit 148 by a fixed volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. A fixed volume value may not be set for 148. Specifically, a sound level to be output to the voice control unit 148 at a fixed volume value, an important event notification sound, an adjustment mode notification sound, a notification sound, etc., and a fixed volume value “6” are set in advance. In addition, when output information (list for output) such as notification sound of important event, notification sound of adjustment mode, notification sound, etc. is notified from the liquid crystal control unit 141, a fixed volume associated with the output information. It is preferable to refer to the value and output a sound corresponding to the output information depending on (corresponding to) the fixed volume value.
(Main process of lamp controller 150)
The main process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing main processing of the lamp control unit 150.
  First, the lamp CPU 150a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step R1, and performs an initialization process in step R2. In this processing, the lamp CPU 150a reads a main processing program from the lamp ROM 150b, initializes a flag and the like stored in the lamp RAM 150c, and performs processing such as initial setting.
  In step R3, the lamp CPU 150a sets an interrupt permission for permitting the timer interrupt, and in step R3-1, performs a process for setting the luminance of the LED. Specifically, a process of setting the brightness of the lamps (LEDs) of various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74) is performed based on the brightness value notification command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 141. . The LED brightness setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step R4, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the reception buffer of the lamp RAM 150c to determine whether or not an effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130m. If not received (step R4: No), If the processing is shifted to step R6-1 and received (step R4: Yes), in step R5, LED light emission information setting processing is performed.
  Specifically, based on the received effect instruction command, a light emission pattern (light emission mode) and a light emission timing (light emission timing) for causing LEDs provided in the frame illumination device 10, the handle light emission device 15c, the panel illumination device 74, and the like to emit light. (Time) etc. is determined and set. One or a plurality of light emission patterns are set corresponding to the effect instruction command, and the light emission pattern to be executed is determined from the one or more.
  In step R6, the lamp CPU 150a performs motor drive information setting processing. Specifically, a driving pattern (driving mode) or driving force for driving a motor or solenoid provided in the button driving device 17b, the blower device 21, the panel driving device 75, or the like based on the received instruction instruction command. Processing for determining and setting timing (time) and the like is performed. One or a plurality of driving patterns are set corresponding to the effect instruction command, and a driving pattern to be executed is determined from the one or more driving patterns.
  In step R6-1, the lamp CPU 150a performs processing for setting light emission information of the notification LED. Specifically, a process of setting or clearing the light emission information of the notification LED 10a based on the notification start command and the notification end command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 141 is performed. The process of setting the light emission information of the notification LED will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step R6-2, the lamp CPU 150a performs light emission information setting processing for the cross key. Specifically, various commands (volume adjustment guidance commands, volume adjustment start commands, volume adjustment end commands, Based on the brightness adjustment guidance command, the brightness adjustment start command, and the brightness adjustment end command, processing for setting or clearing the light emission information of the LED for the cross key 19 is performed.
  In step R7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a frame switching flag, and the effect image displayed on the image display device is updated (a new effect image is drawn) at the frame switching timing. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that there is, and if there is no frame switching flag (step R7: No), the process proceeds to step R3-1, and if there is a frame switching flag ( In step R7: Yes, the frame switching flag is cleared in step R8.
  In step R9, the lamp CPU 150a controls the light emission of the handle to turn on or off the LED provided in the light emitting device 15c of the handle based on the light emission pattern of the handle set in the process of setting the light emission information of the LED in step R5. Process.
  In step R9-1, the lamp CPU 150a turns on or off the notification LED 10a based on the notification LED light emission information set in the notification LED light emission information setting process in step R6-1. Process.
  In step R10, the lamp CPU 150a drives the air blower that drives or stops the motor provided in the air blower 21 based on the drive pattern of the air blower set in the motor drive information setting process in step R6. After performing the processing, the processing is shifted to step R4, and thereafter, the processing from steps R4 to R10 is repeatedly performed so as to loop.
(Command reception interrupt processing of lamp control unit 150)
A command reception interrupt process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92A is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the lamp control unit 150. The command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.
  In step R20, the lamp CPU 150a performs a command reception process for receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m. Specifically, a process for storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the lamp RAM 150c is performed. When this process ends, the current command reception interrupt process ends.
(V blank interrupt processing of lamp controller 150)
The V blank interruption processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92B is a flowchart showing the V blank interruption process of the lamp control unit 150. In the V blank interruption process, the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 145 (VDP) ends. It is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every 1/30 seconds = about 33 ms) is received (1/30 seconds = about 33 ms).
  In step R30, the lamp CPU 150a performs counter update processing for updating various counters (scene switching counter, weight frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding “1”), and drawing (display) in step R31. ) A frame switching flag indicating that the frame has been switched is set, and the current V blank interrupt processing is terminated. Since the frame switching flag is referred to in step R7, the processing in steps R8 to R10 is executed as a V blank interruption process (for a frame in which an effect image displayed on the image display device is updated). It is executed every update timing).
  For this reason, the V blank interruption process is executed in the handle light emission control process in step R8, the notification LED light emission control process in step R9-1, and the blower drive process in step R10 (frame update timing). ) Every time.
  As a result, the light emitting device 15c of the handle can start a light emission effect (a probability change effect that is a kind of notification effect) so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing, and synchronized with the frame update timing ( The light emitting device 15c of the handle can end the light emission effect (probability change effect which is a kind of notification effect) so as to be synchronized.
  For this reason, it is possible to execute a certain change confirmation effect (notification effect) in synchronization with the update timing of a frame in which a predetermined effect image is displayed on the image display device (the effect image is updated), and the frame update timing and the deviation are changed. Compared to the case where the probability change confirmation effect (notification effect) is executed in the state of being played, the appeal to the player regarding the probability change effect effect (notification effect) can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. .
  In addition, it is possible to start notification light emission of an event occurring in the notification LED 10a so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing, and an event generated in the notification LED 10a so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. The notification light emission can be terminated.
  Therefore, a notification image corresponding to the event that has occurred is displayed on the image display device (the notification image is updated). Compared with the case where notification light emission of an event that occurs in a state that is out of timing is executed, the appeal power of notification of an event that has occurred can be increased.
  In addition, the blower device 21 can start a blowing effect (a determined effect that is a kind of notification effect) so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing, and is synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. In addition, the air blowing device 21 can end the air blowing effect (a determined effect that is a kind of notification effect).
  Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a definite effect (notification effect) in synchronization with the update timing of the frame in which the predetermined effect image is displayed on the image display device (the effect image is updated), and the frame update timing is shifted. Compared to a case where a confirmed effect (notification effect) is executed in the state, it is possible to increase appeal to the player regarding the confirmed effect (notification effect) and to improve the interest of the game.
(Timer interrupt processing of lamp controller 150)
The timer interrupt process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92C is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the lamp control unit 150.
A clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 130, whereby the timer interruption process described below is executed. In the present embodiment, the V blank interrupt process is prioritized over the timer interrupt process for the convenience of executing the notification effect in synchronization with the frame update timing. .
  First, the lamp CPU 150a performs timer update processing for updating various timer counters in step R41, and inputs to various switches such as a position detection switch (not shown) for detecting the position of the movable effect member 73 in step R42. It is determined whether or not there is an input, and when there is an input, input processing for setting predetermined data is performed.
  In step R43, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the LED provided in the frame illumination device 10 or the panel illumination device 74 or the LED for the effect button 17 is based on the LED emission pattern set in step R5 or step R6-2. The LED light emission processing for setting lighting data for dynamically lighting the LED for the cross key 19 is performed.
  In step R44, the lamp CPU 150a determines the board drive device 75 based on the motor drive pattern (the pattern button drive motor drive pattern, the board drive motor drive pattern, etc.) set in step R6. The motor drive processing for setting the drive data for dynamically driving the drive motor and the drive motor of the effect button provided in the.
  In step R45, the lamp CPU 150a performs output processing for outputting lighting data set in the LED light emission processing in step R43, driving data set in the motor driving processing in step R44, and the like. End the interrupt process.
  As a result, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, the panel driving device 75, and the effect button are more effective than the light emitting device 15c, the notification LED 10a, and the blower device 21 that are controlled in 1/30 second (about 33 ms). This drive motor is controlled in a shorter cycle (4 ms), and fine control can be performed, so that it is possible to produce an interesting production.
(Brightness setting processing of LED of lamp control unit 150)
The setting process of the brightness of the LED of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the LED brightness setting process of the lamp controller 150.
  First, in step R3-1-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a fixed luminance (value) has been set in a predetermined storage area of the lamp RAM 150c, and the fixed luminance (value) has not been set. In the case (step R3-1-1: No), the process is moved to step R3-1-2, and when the fixed luminance (value) has been set (step R3-1-1: Yes), The process moves to step R3-1-3. When this process is first executed after the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the fixed brightness (value) is cleared (initialized) in the initialization process in step R2, and therefore the fixed brightness (value) is set. ) Is determined not to be set.
  In step R3-1-2, the lamp CPU 150a sets a predetermined luminance (100% which is the maximum luminance in the present embodiment) as a luminance of the light emitting device 15c of the handle and the notification LED 10a in a predetermined storage area of the lamp RAM 150c. Then, the setting process of the brightness of the current LED is finished.
  In step R3-1-3, the lamp CPU 150a receives the brightness value notification command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 141 when the brightness value is changed by the brightness change process or the brightness value reset process described above. If the brightness value notification command is received (step R3-1-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step R3-1-4, and the brightness value notification command is received. If not (step R3-1-3: No), the current LED brightness setting process is terminated.
  In step R3-1-4, the lamp CPU 150a displays the luminance corresponding to the notification command of the luminance value for the frame illumination device 10 (including the LED for the effect button 17 and the LED for the cross key 19) and the panel illumination device 74. Is set in a predetermined storage area of the lamp RAM 150c, and the brightness setting process for the current LED is terminated.
(Example of light emission brightness by the lamp controller 150)
An example of light emission luminance by the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a table of light emission luminance examples by the lamp control unit 150. In the table of the example of the light emission luminance, the light emission target is associated with the luminance in the standby of the variation effect and the customer waiting effect or in the customer waiting effect.
"Image display device"
The backlight of the image display device has a luminance value (“0” to “0” in the present embodiment) set by the lamp control unit 150 in response to reception of a luminance value notification command output from the liquid crystal control unit 141 in response to a change in luminance value. The light emission depends on (corresponds to) “5”).
  Specifically, in a state where the brightness value “0” is set in the lamp control unit 150, during the changing production, during the waiting for the customer waiting production, during the customer waiting production where the power saving mode is OFF, the customer whose power saving mode is ON. During the standby effect, the backlight of the image display device emits light with a luminance of 50%.
  Further, in a state where the brightness value “1” is set in the lamp control unit 150, power saving is performed at 60% luminance during the fluctuating effect, when waiting for the customer waiting effect, and during the customer waiting effect when the power saving mode is OFF. If the mode is ON during the customer waiting effect (that is, the power saving mode), the backlight of the image display device emits light with a luminance of 50%.
  In the state in which the brightness value “2” is set in the lamp control unit 150, the power is saved at 70% brightness during the fluctuating effect, when waiting for the customer waiting effect, or during the customer waiting effect when the power saving mode is OFF. If the mode is ON during the customer waiting effect (that is, the power saving mode), the backlight of the image display device emits light with a luminance of 50%.
  Further, in a state where the brightness value “3” is set in the lamp control unit 150, 80% brightness is obtained when the changing effect, the waiting for the waiting effect, or the waiting effect for which the power saving mode is OFF. If the mode is ON during the customer waiting effect (that is, the power saving mode), the backlight of the image display device emits light with a luminance of 50%.
  In the state where the brightness value “4” is set in the lamp control unit 150, the power saving is 90% during the changing effect, when waiting for the customer waiting effect, or during the customer waiting effect when the power saving mode is OFF. If the mode is ON during the customer waiting effect (that is, the power saving mode), the backlight of the image display device emits light with a luminance of 50%.
  In the state where the brightness value “5” is set in the lamp control unit 150, the power is saved at 100% brightness during the fluctuating effect, when waiting for the customer waiting effect, or during the customer waiting effect when the power saving mode is OFF. If the mode is ON during the customer waiting effect (that is, the power saving mode), the backlight of the image display device emits light with a luminance of 50%.
"Frame lighting device"
The lamp (LED) of the frame illumination device 10 has a luminance value (in this embodiment) set by the lamp control unit 150 in response to the reception of the luminance value notification command output from the liquid crystal control unit 141 when the luminance value changes. Light is emitted depending on (corresponding to) "0" to "5").
  The relationship between the luminance value set in the lamp control unit 150 and the luminance of the lamp (LED) of the frame illumination device 10 is the same as that of the backlight of the image display device, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. To do.
"Lighting device for panel"
The lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 74 has a luminance value (in this embodiment) set by the lamp control unit 150 in response to reception of a luminance value notification command output from the liquid crystal control unit 141 when the luminance value changes. Light is emitted depending on (corresponding to) "0" to "5").
  Note that the relationship between the luminance value set in the lamp control unit 150 and the luminance of the lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 74 is the same as that of the backlight of the image display device, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. To do.
"Light emitting device of the handle"
The LED of the light emitting device 15c of the handle emits light depending on (corresponding to) the fixed luminance (100% in the present embodiment) set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LED of the light emitting device 15c of the handle emits light with a luminance of 100% during the variation effect.
"Notification LED"
The notification LED 10a emits light depending on (corresponding to) the fixed luminance (100% in the present embodiment) set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the notification LED 10a emits light with a luminance of 100% during the variation effect, during the waiting for the customer effect, and during the customer effect.
"Special symbol display"
The plurality of LEDs of the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 emit light without depending on the fixed luminance or luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LEDs of the special symbol displays 60 and 61 emit light at a luminance of 100% during the changing effect, during the waiting for the waiting effect, and during the waiting effect. Therefore, even when the brightness value is changed by the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs of the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 does not change.
"Special symbol hold indicator"
The plurality of LEDs of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64 emit light without depending on the fixed luminance and the luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LED of the special symbol hold indicators 63 and 64 emits light with a luminance of 100% during the changing effect, during the waiting for the waiting effect, and during the waiting effect. Therefore, even when the brightness value is changed by the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64 may change. Absent.
"Normal symbol display"
The LED of the normal symbol display 62 emits light without depending on the fixed luminance or luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LED of the normal symbol display 62 emits light with a luminance of 100% during the variation effect, during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, and during the waiting for the customer effect. Therefore, even if the luminance value is changed by the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19, the luminance of the LED of the normal symbol display 62 does not change.
"Normal symbol hold indicator"
The plurality of LEDs of the normal symbol hold indicator 65 emit light without depending on the fixed luminance or luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LED of the normal symbol hold indicator 65 emits light with a luminance of 100% during the changing effect, during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, and during the waiting for the customer effect. Therefore, even when the luminance value is changed by the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19, the luminance of the plurality of LEDs of the normal symbol hold display 65 does not change.
"Round number display"
The LED of the round number display 66 emits light without depending on the fixed luminance or luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LED of the round number display 66 emits light with a luminance of 100% during the changing effect, during the waiting for the waiting effect, and during the waiting effect. Therefore, even when the luminance value is changed by the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19, the luminance of the LED of the round number display 66 does not change.
"Right-handed display"
The LED of the right-handed display 67 emits light without depending on the fixed luminance or luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LED of the right-handed display 67 emits light with a luminance of 100% during the variation effect, during the standby for the customer wait effect, and during the customer wait effect. Therefore, even when the luminance value is changed by the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19, the luminance of the LED of the right-handed display 67 does not change.
(Setting process of light emission information of notification LED of lamp control unit 150)
The setting process of the light emission information of the notification LED of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the light emission information of the notification LED of the lamp control unit 150.
  First, in step R6-1-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a notification start command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m is received when various events occur, and receives the notification start command. In the case (step R6-1-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step R6-1-2. When the notification start command is not received (step R6-1-1: No), step R6- The processing is moved to 1-9.
  In step R6-1-2, the lamp CPU 150a identifies the type of event that has occurred from the received notification start command. In step R6-1-3, the event that has occurred is an event to be notified by the notification LED 10a (illegal prize, It is determined whether or not it is an abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, door opening, payout abnormality), and if it is an event to be notified (step R6-1-3: Yes), step R6-1-4 If the event is not a notification target event (step R6-1-3: No), the process moves to step R6-1-9.
  In step R6-1-4, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether there is light emission information of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the higher priority event in the light emission list, and if there is light emission information (step R6-1). -4: Yes), the process proceeds to step R6-1-5. If there is no light emission information (step R6-1-4: No), the process proceeds to step R6-1-6.
  In step R6-1-5, the lamp CPU 150a waits for the flashing light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event that has occurred this time, assuming that a lower priority event has occurred at the same time as the higher priority event. The list is set in the list and the process proceeds to step R6-1-9. Thereby, when a plurality of events occur at the same time, the notification LED 10a corresponding to the lower priority event waits for light emission, and the notification LED 10a corresponding to the higher priority event is emitted. become.
  In step R6-1-6, the lamp CPU 150a does not execute the light emission of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event or performs the light emission of the notification LED 10a corresponding to an event having a lower priority than the event that has occurred this time. As a result, the blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event that has occurred this time is set in the light emission list. Thereby, light emission of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event that has occurred this time is performed.
  In step R6-1-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the flashing light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to an event having a lower priority than the event that has occurred this time is present in the light emission list. If there is a pattern (step R6-1-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step R6-1-8. If there is no blinking light emission pattern (step R6-1-7: No), the process proceeds to step R6-1-8. The processing is moved to R6-1-9.
  In step R6-1-8, the lamp CPU 150a moves the blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event having a lower priority than the event that has occurred this time from the light emission list to the standby list. As a result, the notification LED 10a emits light according to the blinking light emission pattern corresponding to the higher priority event.
  In step R6-1-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the notification end command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m is received at the end of the occurrence event notification period, and receives the notification end command. In the case (step R6-1-9: Yes), the processing is shifted to step R6-1-10, and when the notification end command is not received (step R6-1-9: No), the current notification The LED light emission information setting process is terminated.
  In step R6-1-10, the lamp CPU 150a identifies the type of event for which the notification period has ended from the received notification end command. In step R6-1-11, the event for which the notification period has ended is notified by the notification LED 10a. If it is an event to be notified (step R6-1-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step R6-1-12, and if it is not an event to be notified (step In R6-1-11: No), the setting processing of the light emission information of the current notification LED ends.
  In step R6-1-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a flashing light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event that the notification period has ended in the light emission list, and if there is a flashing light emission pattern ( In step R6-1-12: Yes, the process proceeds to step R6-1-13. If there is no blinking light emission pattern (step R6-1-12: No), the process proceeds to step R6-1-14. Move processing.
  In step R6-1-13, the lamp CPU 150a clears the blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event for which the notification period has ended from the light emission list, and proceeds to step R6-1-15. Thereby, the light emission of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event for which the notification period has ended is ended.
  In step R6-1-14, the lamp CPU 150a clears the blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event for which the notification period has ended from the waiting list, and proceeds to step R6-1-15. Thereby, the state where the lighting of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event for which the notification period has ended is released.
  In step R6-1-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the occurrence event in the standby list, and if there is a blinking light emission pattern (step R6-1). -15: Yes), the process proceeds to step R6-1-16. If there is no blinking light emission pattern (step R6-1-15: No), the process of setting the light emission information of the current notification LED is performed. finish.
  In step R6-1-16, the lamp CPU 150a sets the blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the highest priority event in the standby list to the light emission list, and the current notification LED emits light. The information setting process ends. As a result, the notification LED 10a emits light by the blinking light emission pattern set in the current light emission list.
(Setting process of light emission information of handle LED of lamp control unit 150)
The light emission information setting process of the handle LED of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a process for setting the light emission information of the handle LED of the lamp control unit 150. This process is performed in the LED light emission information setting process in step R5.
  First, in Step R5-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a pattern command for the certainty confirmed effect, and if it is not a pattern command for the certainty confirmed effect (Step R5-1: No). Moves the process to step R5-8, and if it is a probability change confirmed effect pattern command (step R5-1: Yes), moves the process to step R5-2.
  In step R5-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the variation effect pattern command for specifying the execution timing of the probability variation confirmed effect has been received, and if not received (step R5-2: No). Moves to step R5-8, and if it has been received (step R5-2: Yes), in step R5-3, the probability change confirmation in the variation effect specified by the variation effect pattern from the pattern of the probability change confirmation effect is performed. Specify (calculate) the number of production start frames.
  In step R5-4, the lamp CPU 150a sets a value obtained by adding the adjustment value (2) for synchronization to the specified number of frames in the start counter of the probability change effect. Here, the adjustment value for synchronization refers to the effect image corresponding to the effect instruction command after the liquid crystal control unit 141 receives the effect instruction command (for example, the change effect pattern command) from the effect control unit 130m. Since two frames are required to be displayed, the adjustment value is used to absorb the delay of the two frames and execute the certainty confirmed effect at an appropriate timing corresponding to the certainty confirmed effect pattern.
  In step R5-5, the lamp CPU 150a specifies (calculates) the number of symbols for determining symbols in the variation effect defined by the variation effect pattern, and in step R5-6, the adjustment value (synchronization value) is synchronized with the identified number of frames. The value obtained by adding 2) is set in the probability variation finalization end counter, and the light emission pattern 1 of the handle LED is set in step R5-7.
  In this way, in the handle light emission control process in step R9, which is executed every time the frame update timing arrives (1/30 seconds), the probability variation confirmed effect start counter is decremented by one, and the probability variation confirmed effect is determined. When the start counter reaches 0, the lighting control of the handle LED (execution of the certainty change confirmation effect) is started. In addition, after the probability variation confirmed effect start counter reaches zero, the probability variation confirmed effect end counter is decremented by one. When the probability variation confirmed effect end counter reaches zero, the lighting control of the handle LED (execution of the probability variation confirmed effect) ends (stops). )
  In step R5-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a special operation effect command, and if it is not a special operation effect command (step R5-8: No), The process moves to step R5-12, and if the command is a special operation effect command (step R5-8: Yes), the process moves to step R5-9.
  In step R5-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets the adjustment value (2) for synchronization in the start counter of the probability variation confirmed effect, and in step R5-10, the execution value (90 = about 3 seconds) of the probability variation confirmed effect. Is set to the end counter of the probability change effect, and the light emission pattern 1 of the handle LED is set.
  In this way, in the light emission control processing of the handle in step R9, which is executed every time the frame update timing arrives (1/30 seconds), the probability variation confirmed effect start counter is decremented by one, and the probability variation is confirmed. When the production start counter reaches 0, lighting control of the handle LED (execution of the certainty change confirmation production) is started. In addition, after the start counter of the certain change confirmation effect becomes 0, the end counter of the certain change confirmation effect is decremented by 1, and when the end counter of the certain change confirmation effect becomes 0 (about 3 seconds after the start of the certain change confirmation effect), the handle is displayed. The LED lighting control (execution of the certainty change confirmation effect) is ended (stopped).
  In step R5-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a special round effect command. If the command is not a special round effect command (step R5-12: No), When the setting process of the light emission information of the handle LED is finished and the command is a special round effect command (step R5-12: Yes), the process is shifted to step R5-13.
  In step R5-13, the lamp CPU 150a sets the adjustment value (2) for synchronization in the start counter of the rank-up effect, and in step R5-14, the execution value (150 = about 5 seconds) of the rank-up effect. Is set in the rank-up effect end counter, and in step R5-15, the light emission pattern 2 of the handle LED is set, and the light emission information setting processing of the current handle LED is ended.
  In this way, in the handle light emission control process of step R9, which is executed every time the frame update timing arrives (1/30 seconds), the rank-up effect start counter is decremented by 1, and the rank is increased. When the production start counter reaches 0, lighting control of the handle LED (elevation notification production, continuous announcement production) is started. Further, after the rank-up effect start counter reaches 0, the rank-up effect end counter is decremented by one. When the rank-up effect end counter reaches 0, the steering LED lighting control (elevation notification effect, continuous notification effect) ) Is terminated (stopped).
(Setting process of driving information of the blower of the lamp controller 150)
With reference to FIG. 97, the setting processing of the driving information of the blower of the lamp control unit 150 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing setting processing of driving information of the blower in the lamp control unit 150. This process is performed in the motor drive information setting process in step R6.
  First, in step R6-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a confirmed effect pattern command, and if it is not a confirmed effect pattern command (step R6-1: No), When the setting process of the driving information of the current blower is finished and the pattern command is a definite effect (step R6-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step R6-2.
  In step R6-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the variation effect pattern command for specifying the execution timing of the confirmed effect has been received, and if not received (step R6-2: No). When the setting process of the drive information of the current blower is finished and received (step R6-2: Yes), in step R6-3, in the variation effect defined by the variation effect pattern from the confirmed effect pattern. Specify (calculate) the number of start frames of the confirmed effect
  In step R6-4, the lamp CPU 150a sets a value obtained by adding the adjustment value (2) for synchronization to the specified number of frames to the start counter of the definite effect, and in step R6-5, the execution value ( 300 = approx. 10 seconds) is set in the final counter of the definite effect, the drive pattern of the blower is set, and the current setting process of the drive information of the blower is finished.
  By doing in this way, in the driving process of the air blower in step R10, which is executed every time the frame update timing arrives (1/30 seconds), the confirmed effect start counter is decremented by one, and the confirmed effect When the start counter reaches 0, drive control of the blower device 21 (execution of the certainty change confirmation effect) is started. In addition, after the final counter of the confirmed effect reaches 0, the end counter of the confirmed effect is decremented by one. When the final counter of the confirmed effect reaches 0 (about 10 seconds after the finalized effect starts), the blower 21 is driven. Control (execution of the definite effect) is ended (stopped).
(Timing chart before and after start of final production)
FIG. 98 is a timing chart showing various timings before and after the start of the confirmed effect when the confirmed effect is started in the first frame of the reach start of the variation effect pattern 24.
In this figure, the effect image update cycle (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141 (image control unit 145) is synchronized with the control cycle of the blower device 21 controlled by the lamp control unit 150 in 1/30 seconds. (Synchronization).
  The timing of T1 is the timing of the 149th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing during the normal variation execution period (about 5 seconds) in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, the air blower 21 is not activated (driven), and drawing of image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started. Display of the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen a of the normal variation effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T2 is the timing of the 150th frame after the start of the change effect, and is the update timing of the last frame in the normal change execution period in which the change of the effect symbol 70a is normal. At this timing, the blower 21 is not activated (driven), and drawing of image data c (background image, reach effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started. Display of the image data b drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen b of the normal variation effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T3 is the timing of the 151st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing (the first frame of reach start) that switches to the execution period of the reach change in which the reach effect is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the air blower 21 is started, drawing of image data d (background image, reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started. The display of the image data c drawn in the two-frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen c of the reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T4 is the 152th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the reach change execution period in which the reach effect is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 is continued, and drawing of image data e (background image, reach effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen d of the reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 153th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing during the reach change execution period in which the reach effect is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 is continued, and drawing of image data f (background image, reach effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started. Then, the display of the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen e of the reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device.
  As described above, the finalized effect using the blower device 21 is started in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the update timing of the frame in which the predetermined effect image (image data c for starting the reach effect) is displayed on the image display device. Compared with the case where the confirmed effect (notification effect) starts in a state shifted from the frame update timing, it is possible to increase the appeal to the player regarding the confirmed effect (notification effect), and to improve the interest of the game Is possible.
(Timing chart before and after the final production)
FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing various timings before and after the finalized effect started at the first frame of the reach start of the variable effect pattern 24.
In this figure, the effect image update cycle (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141 (image control unit 145) is synchronized with the control cycle of the blower device 21 controlled by the lamp control unit 150 in 1/30 seconds. (Synchronization).
  The timing of T7 is the timing of the 448th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing during the SP reach variation execution period (about 15 seconds) in which the SP reach effect A is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 is continued, and drawing of the image data h (background image, SP reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started. Then, the display of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen g of the SP reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T8 is the timing of the 449th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing during the SP reach variation execution period in which the SP reach effect A is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 is continued, and drawing of image data i (background image, SP reach effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started. Then, the display of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen h of the SP reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T9 is the timing of the 450th frame from the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing during the SP reach variation execution period in which the SP reach effect A is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 is continued, and drawing of image data j (background image, SP reach effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started. Then, the display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen i of the SP reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T10 is a timing which becomes the 451th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is a timing in the middle of the execution period of the SP reach variation in which the SP reach effect A is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 that has been driven for about 10 seconds (300 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, SP reach effect image, various images) to the second frame buffer is stopped. The drawing of the design image, various icon images, etc.) is started, the display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen d of the SP reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device. Will be displayed.
  The timing of T11 is the timing of the 452th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is a timing in the middle of the execution period of the SP reach variation in which the SP reach effect A is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 is stopped, and drawing of the image data l (background image, SP reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started. Then, display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen k of the SP reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device.
  In this way, the finalized effect using the blower device 21 is completed in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the update timing of the frame in which the predetermined effect image (image data j for performing the SP reach effect) is displayed on the image display device. Therefore, as compared with the case where the confirmed effect (notification effect) ends in a state shifted from the frame update timing, it is possible to reduce that the player feels uncomfortable, and to clarify the confirmed effect (notification effect). It is possible to improve the fun of the game.
(Example of final production)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the case where the finalized effect is started at the first frame of reach start of the variable effect pattern 24. Specifically, FIG. 100 (a) shows an effect in the middle of the normal variable period. FIG. 100 (b) is an example of an effect at the start of the reach variation execution period (timing T3 in FIG. 98), and FIG. 100 (c) is an effect in the early stage of the SP reach variation execution period. FIG. 100 (d) shows an example of an effect in the middle of the SP reach variation execution period (timing T10 in FIG. 99).
  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (a), the background image HG, the effect symbol 70a which is the effect symbol image ZG, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and “7” is displayed in the left variable display area. A normal variation effect (variation effect before reach) is executed by moving and displaying the effect symbol 70a in the vertical direction in the center and right variation display areas while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped). At this time, since the operation (drive) of the blower device 21 is stopped, the confirmed effect is not executed.
  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (b), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays the background image HG, the effect symbol 70a that is the effect symbol image ZG, the character that is the reach effect image EG1, and the like. The action symbol 70a is moved and displayed in the center variable display area while the "7" effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the variable display area, and the action display is performed so that the characters "Leach!" By doing so, the reach variation effect is executed. At this time, when the air blower 21 is actuated (driven) and wind (air) is sent from the air blowing port 15d of the launching handle 15 toward the player, the definite effect is started.
  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (c), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays the background image HG, the effect symbol image ZG, the character that is the effect image EG2 of SP reach, etc., and moves to the lower right of the screen. By moving and displaying the effect symbol 70a in the center variable display region while displaying the effect symbol 70a of "7" in the left and right variation display regions in the left and right variation display regions, or by displaying the characters so as to confront each other. The SP reach variation effect is executed. At this time, the confirmed effect is continuously executed while maintaining the state in which the blower 21 is activated (driven).
  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100D, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays the background image HG, the effect symbol image ZG, the character that is the effect image EG2 of the SP reach, and the like, and moves to the lower right of the screen. The effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the left and right variation display regions of the displayed variation display region, while the effect symbol 70a is moved and displayed in the central variation display region, and the action display is performed so that the character never faces. Thus, the SP reach variation effect is executed. At this time, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 is stopped, and the execution of the confirmed effect is ended.
(Timing chart 1 before and after the start of the probable finalization effect)
FIG. 101 is a timing chart showing various timings before and after the start of the certainty confirmation effect when the certainty confirmation effect is started in the first promotion confirmation frame when the effect button 17 is operated in the promotion effect B of the variation effect pattern 43. It is.
In this figure, an effect image update period (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141 (image control unit 145), a handle light emitting device 15c controlled by the lamp control unit 150, and a panel for the movable effect member 73 The control cycle of the driving device 75 is synchronized (tuned) at 1/30 seconds.
  The timing of T1 is the timing of the 1557th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the update timing of the frame during the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, an effective period in which the effect button 17 (the effect button detection switch 17a) is enabled has occurred, but the light emitting device 15c for the handle and the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 are activated. Not.
  In addition, at the timing of T1, drawing of image data l (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, operation promotion images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started and drawn to the second frame buffer. Display of the displayed image data k on the image display device is started, and the display screen k of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T2 is the timing of the 1558th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the update timing of the frame during the promotion effect execution period in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, an effective period has occurred, but the light emitting device 15c for the handle and the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 are not operating.
  In addition, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data m (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, operation promotion images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and drawing is performed in the first frame buffer. The displayed image data l is displayed on the image display device, and the display screen l for the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T3 is a timing in the middle of the 1558th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is a timing when the operation of the effect button 17 is detected by the effect button detection switch 17a. At this timing, the effective period ends, and a special operation effect command is transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.
  The timing of T4 is the timing of the 1559th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the promotion effect execution period in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 have received special operation effect commands, but the operation of the handle light emitting device 15c and the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 is not started.
  Also, at the timing of T4, drawing of image data n (background image, effect image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started and drawn in the second frame buffer. Display of the image data m on the image display device is started, and the display screen m of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 1560th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the update timing of the frame during the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c for the handle and the panel driving device 75 for the movable effect member 73 is started.
  In addition, at the timing of T5, drawing of image data o (background image, effect image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started and drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data n on the image display device is started, the display screen n of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of one notification sound is started from the sound output device 9.
  The timing of T6 is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed at the timing of the 1561th frame after the start of the change effect. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c for the handle and the panel driving device 75 for the movable effect member 73 is continued.
  Also, at the timing of T6, drawing of image data p (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data that has been drawn in the second frame buffer o is started to be displayed on the image display device, the display screen o of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of one notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.
  In this way, in accordance with the update timing of the frame in which the image data n for starting the promotion success effect after two frames (the adjustment value for synchronization described above) is received from the number of frames in which the command for the special operation effect is received. Therefore, the probability variation confirmation effect using the voice output device 9 and the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is started, so that the probability variation confirmation effect is produced as compared with the case where the probability variation confirmation effect (notification effect) is started with a deviation from the frame update timing. The appeal to the player regarding (notification production) can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.
(Timing chart 2 before and after the start of the probable change confirmation effect)
FIG. 102 is a timing chart showing various timings before and after the start of the certainty change confirmation effect when the effect button 17 is not operated in the promotion effect B of the variation effect pattern 43.
In this figure, an effect image update period (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141 (image control unit 145), a handle light emitting device 15c controlled by the lamp control unit 150, and a panel for the movable effect member 73 The control cycle of the driving device 75 is synchronized (tuned) at 1/30 seconds.
  The timing of T1 is the timing of the 1574th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, an effective period in which the effect button 17 (the effect button detection switch 17a) is enabled has occurred, but the light emitting device 15c for the handle and the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 are activated. Not.
  In addition, at the timing of T1, drawing of image data n (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, operation promotion images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started and drawn to the second frame buffer. The displayed image data m is displayed on the image display device, and the display screen m of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T2 is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the execution period of the promotion effect where the promotion effect B is performed, which is the 1575th frame after the start of the change effect. At this timing, an effective period has occurred, but the light emitting device 15c for the handle and the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 are not operating.
  Also, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data o (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, operation promotion images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and drawing is performed in the first frame buffer. The displayed image data n is displayed on the image display device, and the display screen n of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T3 is a timing in the middle of the 1575th frame after the start of the fluctuating effect, and is a timing at which the effective period that has occurred for a predetermined time (about 1.5 seconds) ends. At this timing, a special operation effect command is transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.
  The timing of T4 is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the execution period of the promotion effect where the promotion effect B is performed at the timing of the 1576th frame after the start of the change effect. At this timing, the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 have received special operation effect commands, but the operation of the handle light emitting device 15c and the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 is not started.
  Also, at the timing of T4, drawing of image data p (background image, effect image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started and drawn in the second frame buffer. Display of the image data o on the image display device is started, and the display screen o of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 1577th frame after the start of the variation effect, and the update timing of the frame in the middle of the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c for the handle and the panel driving device 75 for the movable effect member 73 is started.
  In addition, at the timing of T5, drawing of image data q (background image, effect image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started and drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data p on the image display device is started, the display screen p of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of one notification sound from the sound output device 9 is started.
  The timing of T6 is the timing of the 1578th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c for the handle and the panel driving device 75 for the movable effect member 73 is continued.
  Also, at the timing of T6, drawing of image data r (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data that has been drawn in the second frame buffer The display of q on the image display device is started, the display screen o of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of one notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.
  As described above, the audio output is performed in accordance with the update timing of the frame in which the image data p for starting the promotion success effect after 2 frames (the above-described synchronization adjustment value) is received from the number of frames in which the command for the special operation effect is received. Since the probability variation confirmation effect using the device 9 and the light emitting device 15c of the handle is started, the probability variation confirmation effect (notification effect) is compared with the case where the probability variation confirmation effect (notification effect) is started with a deviation from the frame update timing. ) Can increase the appeal to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
  Further, even if the player does not operate the effect button 17 during the effective period, the certain change confirmation effect (notification effect) is executed at the end of the effective period, so the operation of the effect button 17 is forgotten or the operation of the effect button 17 is performed. It is possible for a player who is embarrassed to experience a certainty change effect (notification effect), and to improve the interest of the game.
  It is to be noted that the execution period of the certain change confirmation effect is determined by the certain change confirmation effect when the operation of the effect button 17 is performed during the effective period and the certain change confirmation effect when the operation button is not operated during the effective period. It is also possible to change the effect mode of the certainty-change confirmation effect, such as making it different, making the light emitting mode of the light emitting device 15c of the handle different, or making the one notification sound output from the audio output device 9 different.
  In addition, the operation of the effect button 17 is performed during the effective period, but a special operation effect command from the effect control unit 130m cannot be normally received because the liquid crystal control unit 141 or the lamp control unit 150 misses ( In the case of bit dropping, etc., the probability change confirmation effect (notification effect) may not be executed.
  In addition, for example, the time from the occurrence of the effective period (effective time) is measured, and a special operation effect command is normally performed when the effective period (effective time) ends or after a predetermined number of frames (elapsed predetermined period). When it is determined that reception has not been performed, the probability change effect (notification effect) may be executed in accordance with the update timing of the next frame or the update timing of the frame that is several frames later. In this way, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from not being executed because the command cannot be normally received, and to suppress the interest of the game from being reduced.
(Timing chart before and after the end of the probable finalization effect)
FIG. 103 is a timing chart showing various timings before and after the end of the certainty change confirmation effect started during the execution period of the promotion effect of the variation effect pattern 43.
In this figure, the effect image update cycle (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141 (image control unit 145) is synchronized with the control cycle of the blower device 21 controlled by the lamp control unit 150 in 1/30 seconds. (Synchronization).
  The timing of T7 is the update timing of the last frame in the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed at the timing of the 1590th frame after the start of the change effect. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the light emitting device 15c for the handle and the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 is continued, and the image data s (background image, promotion effect image, various images) to the first frame buffer is continued. Drawing of graphic images and various icon images) is started, display of image data r drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and a display screen r for promotion effect is displayed on the image display device. It becomes a state.
  The timing of T8 is the update timing of the first frame in the execution period of the fluctuation fluctuation that makes the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) on the production symbol 70a, which is the timing of the 1620th frame after the fluctuation production starts. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 is stopped, and the image data u (background image, shaking effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is stopped. ) Is started, and display of the image data t (background image, shaking effect image, various design images, various icon images) drawn in the second frame buffer is started on the image display device. Is a state in which the display screen t of the fluctuation variation effect is displayed. That is, the operation (drive) of the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 is stopped in synchronization with the update timing of the frame in which the display screen t of the fluctuation variation effect is displayed.
  The timing of T9 is the timing of the 1621th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the fluctuation variation execution period that causes the variation of the effect symbol 70a. At this timing, drawing of image data v (background image, shaking effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data u drawn in the first frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, and the display screen u of the fluctuation variation effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T10 is the timing of the 1635th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the update timing of the first frame in the execution period of the variable stop that causes the effect symbol 70a to make the actual stop. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the handle is stopped, drawing of the image data x (background image, stop effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started. Display of the image data w (background image, stop effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) drawn in the frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen of the variable stop effect is displayed on the image display device. w is displayed.
  As described above, the probability change confirmation using the light emitting device 15c of the handle is performed in synchronization (synchronously) with the update timing of the frame in which the predetermined effect image (image data w for performing the change stop effect) is displayed on the image display device. Since the production ends, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort compared to the case where the probability change confirmation production (notification production) ends with a deviation from the frame update timing. (Direction) can be sharpened, and the fun of the game can be improved.
  In addition, since the certainty change confirmed effect (notification effect) is not executed when the effect symbol 70a is actually stopped (variable stop effect is performed), the player's sense of uplifting with respect to the occurrence of the jackpot game is surely confirmed confirmed effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.
(Example of a certain change confirmation production)
FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the case where the certainty change confirmation effect is started when the effect button is operated in the execution period of the promotion effect of the change effect pattern 43. Specifically, FIG. FIG. 104B is an example of an effect in the middle of the execution period of the promotion effect, and FIG. 104C is an example of the effect in the execution period of the fluctuation fluctuation. Yes, FIG. 104 (d) shows an effect example in the execution period of the variable stop.
  104 (a), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) has a combination of effect symbols 70a that are the background image HG and the effect symbol image ZG (four types of “555” to “888”), The operation promotion image SG (the effect button image indicating the effect button 17, the time gauge image indicating the remaining effective period, and the character image prompting the operation of the effect button 17) and the like are displayed and the operation promotion image displayed in the center of the screen is displayed. The promotion effect is executed by moving and displaying the effect symbol 70a in an annular shape around the image SG. Further, an operation promotion effect is executed by displaying an action so as to reduce the gauge width of the time gauge image. At this time, since the handle light-emitting device 15c is not operated, the probability variation effect is not executed.
  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (b), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is combined with the background image HG or the effect symbol image 70a which is the effect symbol image ZG after the promotion ("777") or the effect of the promotion success. The image EG3 is displayed, and the promotion success effect is executed by the movable effect member 73 moving (falling) in front of the effect image EG3 of the promotion success displayed in the center of the screen. Further, the handle light-emitting device 15c emits light with the light emission pattern 1 of the handle LED, and a single notification sound is output from the sound output device 9, whereby a certain change confirmation effect is executed.
  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (c), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays the background image HG and the combination of effect symbols 70a (“777”) that is the effect symbol image ZG after promotion, and the screen The fluctuation variation effect is executed by causing the combination (“777”) of the effect symbols 70a to swing at the center. In addition, although the output of one notification sound from the audio output device 9 is stopped, the probability change confirmation effect is executed by the light emitting device 15c of the handle being emitted with the light emission pattern 1 of the handle LED.
  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (d), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays the background image HG and the combination (“777”) of the effect symbol 70a that is the effect symbol image ZG after promotion. The variation stop effect is executed by stopping and displaying the combination (“777”) of the effect symbol 70a in the center. At this time, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the handle is stopped, and the certainty change confirmation effect is finished. That is, the probability variation finalizing effect ends at the final stop timing of the effect symbol 70a.
(Timing chart before and after the start of promotion announcement production)
FIG. 105 shows various timings before and after the start of the promotion notification effect in the case where the promotion notification effect (corresponding to the notification effect) is started at the timing when the eighth round is started from the promotion effect during the 16-round probable jackpot game of 13 rounds. It is a timing chart which shows.
In this figure, the update cycle (frame update timing) of the effect image controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141 (image control unit 145) and the control cycle of the light emitting device 15c of the handle controlled by the lamp control unit 150 are 1/30 seconds. Are synchronized.
  The timing of T1 is the timing of the 484th frame from the start of the seventh round of the jackpot game, and the update timing of the frame in the middle of the closing time (interval) of the seventh round. At this timing, the light emitting device 15c of the handle is not activated.
  In addition, at the timing of T1, drawing of image data d (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data that has been drawn in the second frame buffer Display of c (background image, promotion effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) on the image display device is started, and the display screen c of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device. That is, the promotion effect is being executed.
  The timing of T2 is the timing of the 485th frame after the seventh round of the jackpot game is started, and the update timing of the frame in the middle of the closing time (interval) of the seventh round. At this timing, the light emitting device 15c of the handle is not activated.
  Also, at the timing of T2, drawing of the image data e (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data that has been drawn in the first frame buffer d is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the display screen d of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device. That is, the promotion effect is being executed.
  The timing of T3 is a timing in the middle of the 485th frame after the seventh round of the jackpot game is started, and the main control board 110 ends the closing time (interval) of the seventh round and starts the eighth round. It is timing. At this timing, a round designation command for the eighth opening (8 rounds) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (effect control unit 130m).
  The timing of T4 is a timing in the middle of the 485th frame after the seventh round of the jackpot game is started, and the closing time (interval) of the seventh round by the round designation command received from the main control board 110 by the effect control unit 130m. ) Is the timing for recognizing the end of and starting the eighth round of production. At this timing, a special round effect command is transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.
  The timing of T5 is the update timing of the frame that is the timing of the 486th frame from the start of the seventh round of the jackpot game and is the final closing time (interval) of the seventh round. At this timing, the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 receive a special round effect command, but the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the handle is not started.
  In addition, at the timing of T5, drawing of image data f (background image, effect image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started and drawn in the second frame buffer. Display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the display screen e of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T6 is the timing of the first frame of the eighth round of the jackpot game, and is the update timing of the frame that switches from the closing time (interval) of the seventh round to the round effect of the eighth round. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the handle is started.
  Also, at the timing of T6, drawing of image data g (background image, effect image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started and drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, the display screen f of the promotion success effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the promotion notification sound from the sound output device 9 is started.
  The timing of T7 is the timing of the second frame after the start of the eighth round of the jackpot game, and the update timing of the frame in the middle of executing the promotion promotion effect. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the handle is continued.
  In addition, at the timing of T7, drawing of the image data h (background image, promotion image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer The display of the data g on the image display device is started, the display screen g of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the promotion notification sound from the sound output device 9 is continued.
  In this manner, a frame in which a predetermined effect image (image data f for starting a promotion success effect) is displayed on the image display device after two frames (the above-described synchronization adjustment value) from the number of frames that have received a special round effect command. Since the promotion notification effect using the audio output device 9 and the light emitting device 15c of the handle is started in accordance with the update timing, the promotion notification effect (notification effect) is started in a state shifted from the frame update timing. Therefore, it is possible to increase the appeal to the player regarding the promotion notification effect, and to improve the interest of the game.
  Also, a promotion notification is made at the start of a round game that is the boundary between a jackpot game that is advantageous (high value) for the player and a jackpot game that is disadvantageous (low value) for the player, that is, at a timing according to the progress of the game. Since the effect (notification effect) is executed, the effect of the promotion notification effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.
  It should be noted that a special round effect transmitted from the effect control unit 130m or a case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the round designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 (for example, a bit drop). If the liquid crystal control unit 141 or the lamp control unit 150 fails to receive the command normally (such as bit dropping), the promotion notification effect (notification effect) may not be executed.
  Also, for example, the interval time after the end of the round game is measured, and the command can be normally received when the interval time elapses (the promotion effect or the continuous effect ends) or after a predetermined number of frames (elapsed a predetermined period). If it is determined that there is not, the promotion notification effect (notification effect) may be executed in accordance with the update timing of the next frame or the update timing of the frame after several frames. In this way, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from not being executed because the command cannot be normally received, and to suppress the interest of the game from being reduced.
(Production example of promotion announcement production)
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an effect example in the case where the promotion notification effect (corresponding to the notification effect) is started at the start of the eighth round of the 16-round probable jackpot game of substantially 13 rounds. Specifically, FIG. FIG. 106B is an example of an effect in the second half of the promotion effect, and FIG. 106C is an example of the effect at the start of the round effect of the eighth round. FIG. 106 (d) shows an effect example in the middle of the round effect of the eighth round.
  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 106A and 106B, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) shows the background image HG and the promotion effect image (“BIG” image EG4 indicating the promotion success and the promotion failure). The “MIDLE” image EG5) is displayed, and the promotion effect (round) is displayed by causing the “BIG” image EG4 displayed on the left side of the screen and the “MIDLE” image EG5 displayed on the right side of the screen to be pressed against each other. Medium promotion effect) is being executed. At this time, since the light emitting device 15c of the handle is not operated, the promotion notification effect is not executed.
  In the effect example shown in FIG. 106C, the background image HG, the “BIG” image EG4, the confetti image EG6, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the “BIG” image EG4 is displayed at the center of the screen. The promotion success effect is executed by displaying the action such that the confetti image EG6 falls while being enlarged. Furthermore, the light emitting device 15c of the handle emits light with the light emission pattern 2 of the handle LED, and a promotion notification sound is output from the sound output device 9, whereby the promotion notification effect is executed.
  In the effect example shown in FIG. 106 (d), the background image HG, the “BIG” image EG4, the character image EG7, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the character image EG7 displays the “BIG” image EG4. By displaying as if pierced with a scissors, the round effect of the eighth round is executed. Further, the promotion notification effect is executed by the light emitting device 15c of the handle being emitted by the light emission pattern 2 of the handle LED.
(Timing chart before and after the start of continuous announcement production)
FIG. 107 shows various timings before and after the start of the continuous notification effect in the case of starting the continuous notification effect (corresponding to the notification effect) at the timing when the ninth round starts from the continuous effect during the 16-round probability big hit game of 16 rounds. It is a timing chart which shows.
In this figure, the update cycle (frame update timing) of the effect image controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141 (image control unit 145) and the control cycle of the handle light emitting device 15c controlled by the lamp control unit 150 are 1/30. Synchronized in seconds.
  The timing of T1 is the timing of the 478th frame after the start of the eighth round of the jackpot game, and the update timing of the frame in the middle of the closing time (interval) of the eight rounds. At this timing, the light emitting device 15c of the handle is not activated.
  Also, at the timing of T1, drawing of image data e (background image, continuous effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data drawn in the second frame buffer Display of d (background image, continuous effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the image display device is started, and the continuous display screen d is displayed on the image display device. That is, the continuation effect is being executed.
  The timing of T2 is the timing of the 479th frame after the start of the eighth round of the jackpot game, and the update timing of the frame in the middle of the closing time (interval) of the eight rounds. At this timing, the light emitting device 15c of the handle is not activated.
  Also, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data f (background image, continuous effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data that has been drawn in the first frame buffer e is displayed on the image display device, and the display screen e of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device. That is, the continuation effect is being executed.
  The timing of T3 is the middle of the 479th frame after the 8th round of the jackpot game is started, and the main control board 110 ends the closing time (interval) of the 8th round and starts the 9th round. It is timing. At this timing, a round designation command for the ninth opening (9 rounds) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (effect control unit 130m).
  The timing of T4 is a timing in the middle of the 479th frame after the start of the eighth round of the jackpot game, and the closing time (interval) of the eighth round is determined by the round designation command received from the main control board 110 by the effect control unit 130m. ) Is the timing for recognizing the end of the event and starting the 9th round effect. At this timing, a special round effect command is transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.
  The timing of T5 is the update timing of the frame that is the timing of the 480th frame after the start of the eighth round of the jackpot game and the final closing time (interval) of the eighth round. At this timing, the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 receive a special round effect command, but the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the handle is not started.
  Also, at the timing of T5, drawing of the image data g (background image, effect image of success in succession, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started and drawn in the second frame buffer. Display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the display screen f of the continuous effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T6 is the timing of the first frame of the ninth round of the jackpot game, and the update timing of the frame that switches from the closing time (interval) of the eighth round to the round effect of the ninth round. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the handle is started.
  Also, at the timing of T6, drawing of the image data h (background image, effect image of success in succession, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started and drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, the continuation success effect display screen g is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the continuation notification sound is started from the sound output device 9. That is, it is set so that the continuous notification effect using the audio output device 9 and the light emitting device 15c of the handle is started in accordance with the update timing of the frame in which the image data g for starting the continuous success effect is displayed.
  The timing of T7 is the timing of the second frame after the ninth round of the jackpot game is started, and is the update timing of the frame in the middle of executing the continuous success effect. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the handle is continued.
  Also, at the timing of T7, drawing of the image data i (background image, effect image of successful continuation, various design images, various icon images) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer The display of the data h on the image display device is started, the display screen h of the success success effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the promotion notification sound from the sound output device 9 is continued.
  In this way, a frame in which a predetermined effect image (image data g for starting the promotion success effect) is displayed on the image display device after two frames (the above-described synchronization adjustment value) from the number of frames that have received a special round effect command. Since the continuous notification effect using the audio output device 9 and the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is started in accordance with the update timing, the continuous notification effect (notification effect) is started with a difference from the frame update timing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appeal to the player regarding the continuous notification effect, and to improve the interest of the game.
  In addition, at the start of a round game that is a boundary between a jackpot game that is advantageous (high value) for the player and a jackpot game that is disadvantageous (low value) for the player, that is, at a timing according to the progress of the game Since the production (notification production) is executed, the production effect of the continuous notification production can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.
  It should be noted that a special round effect transmitted from the effect control unit 130m or a case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the round designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 (for example, a bit drop). If the liquid crystal control unit 141 or the lamp control unit 150 fails to receive the command normally (such as bit dropping), the continuous notification effect (notification effect) may not be executed.
  In addition, the interval time from the end of the round game is measured, and the command cannot be normally received when the interval time has elapsed (the promotion effect or the continuous effect has ended) or after a predetermined number of frames (the predetermined period has elapsed). When it is determined, the continuous notification effect (notification effect) may be executed in accordance with the update timing of the next frame or the update timing of the frame that is several frames later. In this way, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from not being executed because the command cannot be normally received, and to suppress the interest of the game from being reduced.
(Example of production of continuous announcement production)
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an effect example in the case where the continuous notification effect is started at the start of the ninth round of the 16-round probable big hit game of 16 rounds. Specifically, FIG. 108 (b) is an effect example in the second half of the continuation effect, FIG. 108 (c) is an effect example at the start of the 9th round effect, and FIG. d) is an effect example in the middle of the round effect of the ninth round.
  108 (a) and 108 (b), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays the background image HG and the continuous effect image (the “continuation” image EG8 indicating the success of the continuation and the continuation failure). "Failure" image EG9) is displayed, and the effect is displayed by pressing the "continuation" image EG8 displayed on the left side of the screen and the "failure" image EG9 displayed on the right side of the screen so as to push each other. Medium continuation production) is being executed. At this time, since the light emitting device 15c of the handle is not operated, the continuous notification effect is not executed.
  108 (c), the background image HG, the “continuation” image EG8, the confetti image EG6, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the “continuation” image EG8 is displayed at the center of the screen. The continuous success effect is executed by displaying the action so that the confetti image EG6 falls while being enlarged. Further, the light emitting device 15c of the handle emits light with the light emission pattern 2 of the handle LED, and a continuous notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, whereby the continuous notification effect is executed.
  In the effect example shown in FIG. 108D, the background image HG, the “continuation” image EG8, the character image EG10, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the character image EG10 displays the “continuation” image EG8. By displaying as if pierced with a scissors, the round effect of the ninth round is executed. Further, the promotion notification effect is executed by the light emitting device 15c of the handle being emitted by the light emission pattern 2 of the handle LED.
(Modification of one-shot announcement production)
FIG. 109 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the single notification effect (definite effect, certain change confirmed effect). In the modification shown in FIG. 109, when the execution timing of the confirmed effect and the execution timing of the certain change confirmed effect are determined to be the same execution timing, the execution timing of the certain change confirmed effect is changed to the timing when the execution of the confirmed effect ends ( This is different from the above-described embodiment in that it is delayed.
In FIG. 109, a case where the confirmed effect and the execution timing of the certain variation confirmed effect are determined in the first frame of the variation start in the variation effect pattern 24 will be described as an example.
In this figure, the update cycle (frame update timing) of the effect image controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141 (image control unit 145) and the control cycle of the handle light emitting device 15c controlled by the lamp control unit 150 are 1/30. Synchronized in seconds.
  The timing of T7 is the timing of the 299th frame after the start of the change effect, and is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the reach change execution period in which the reach effect is performed. At this timing, the air blower 21 is activated and a definite effect is being executed, but since the handle light emitting device 15c is not operating, the certain change definite effect is not being executed.
  Also, at the timing of T7, drawing of image data i (background image, reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer The display of the data h on the image display device is started, and the display screen h of reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T8 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the change effect, and is the update timing of the last frame in the reach change execution period. At this timing, the air blower 21 is activated and a definite effect is being executed, but since the handle light emitting device 15c is not operating, the certain change definite effect is not being executed.
  In addition, at the timing of T8, drawing of image data j (background image, SP reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started and drawn in the second frame buffer. Display of the image data i on the image display device is started, and the display screen i of the reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device.
  The timing of T9 is the timing of the 301st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing that switches from the reach change execution period to the SP reach change execution period in which the SP reach effect is performed. At this timing, the operation of the blower device 21 is stopped and the finalized effect is ended, and the light emitting device 15c of the handle is operated to start the confirmed change finalized effect.
  Also, at the timing of T9, drawing of image data k (background image, SP reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started and drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data j on the image display device is started, the display screen j of the SP reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of one notification sound is started from the sound output device 9.
  The timing at T10 is the 302th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the SP reach variation execution period. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the handle is continued.
  Also, at the timing of T10, drawing of the image data l (background image, SP reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started and drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data k on the image display device is started, the display screen k of the SP reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of one notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. .
  In this way, the confirmed effect using the blower device 21 is finished in accordance with the update timing of the frame in which the image data j for starting the SP reach effect that is about 10 seconds after the start of the variable effect is displayed. It is set so that the probability variation effect using the sound output device 9 and the light emitting device 15c of the handle is started so as to be switched. Therefore, the confirmed effect and the confirmed change confirmed effect are executed without interfering with each other, and the effect of the effect can be improved and the fun of the game can be improved.
  In the above-described modification, when the execution timing of the confirmed effect and the execution timing of the confirmed variation confirmed effect are determined to be the same execution timing, the execution timing of the confirmed variation confirmed effect is the timing (number of frames). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined that the execution of the confirmed effect has ended (as an opportunity), and the execution of the certain change confirmed effect may be started.
  Also, instead of starting the execution of the certain change confirmation effect at the timing when the confirmation effect is finished, the certain change confirmation effect may be executed after a predetermined period (several frames) has elapsed since the completion of the confirmation effect. May be determined by lottery. Even when the probability variation effect is executed in such a form, it is desirable to start the probability variation effect at the frame update timing and end the probability change effect at the frame update timing.
  In the present embodiment, the probability variation finalizing effect is definitely announced (notified) that the probability variation jackpot will be a probability variation jackpot, but the probability variation jackpot that is most advantageous to the player (for example, a 16-round probability jackpot) is assumed. It is good also as what notifies (notify | reports) definitely. In this way, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's feeling of uplift when the probability change effect is executed.
  Further, in the present embodiment, the probability variation finalizing effect is configured by the light emission of the light emitting device 15c of the handle and one notification sound from the audio output device 9, but the probability variation finalizing effect display on the image display device may be combined. Then, the operations of the movable effect member 73 may be combined, only one of them may be executed, or any combination thereof may be performed.
  Further, in the present embodiment, the certainty change confirmation effect is executed only once during one variation display, but may be executed a plurality of times at different execution timings, or may be executed a plurality of times. However, it may be limited to a range that does not exceed the predetermined number of times. In this way, it is possible to enhance the production effect without drastically impairing the rarity of the probability variation finalization.
  In the present embodiment, when the operation of the effect button 17 is detected by the effect button detection switch 17a in the effective period of the promotion effect B, drawing of the effect image of the promotion success is started at the update timing of the next frame, and the image display device Although the certainty change confirmation effect is executed at the update timing of the frame in which the effect image of the promotion success is displayed, several frames after the operation of the effect button 17 is detected by the effect button detection switch 17a. The rendering of the successful promotion effect image is started at the update timing of the subsequent frame (for example, 10 frames), and the probability change final effect is executed at the update timing of the frame in which the successful promotion effect image is displayed on the image display device. A delay probability change final effect may be executed. In this way, the variation of the probability change effect is increased, and the player's expectation and frustration at the time of operation of the effect button 17 can be enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved.
  In the present embodiment, when an effective period based on the promotion effect B occurs, the promotion is successful even if the operation button 17 is operated or the operation button 17 is not operated. The production and the certainty confirmation production are executed, but when the effective period based on the operation productions A to C occurs, the operation production is executed only when the production button 17 is operated. May be.
  In the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the confirmed effect or the certainty confirmed effect is determined by a lottery separate from the decision of the varying effect pattern, but the varying effect pattern and the confirmed effect or certainty confirmed effect are executed. Or execution timing may be associated with each other to determine whether or not to execute the final effect without lottery and the execution timing. If it does in this way, it will become possible to reduce the control burden of an effect control part.
  In the present embodiment, during the short-time gaming state, the shooting handle 15 is twisted to the right as much as possible to fire the game ball toward the right gaming area. Since there is a case where the player does not properly hold the firing handle 15, it is possible not to execute the probability change effect by the blower 21. Instead, the probability variation finalizing effect may be executed using the light emitting device 15c of the handle. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the player does not notice that the certainty change effect is executed in the short-time gaming state.
  Further, in this embodiment, a confirmed effect, a probable change confirmed effect, a promotion notification effect, and a continuous notification effect are executed as notification effects. You may be made to perform the jackpot notice which announces (notifies | reports) definitely by the time of the end of a jackpot game that the holding | maintenance continuous chain which becomes a jackpot after completion | finish is generated. Further, when the jackpot notice is executed, the light emitting device 15c of the handle may be operated, a notification sound may be output from the audio output device 9, or the blower device 21 is operated. Alternatively, any combination thereof may be performed.
  In this embodiment, the promotion effect and the continuation effect are performed during the closing time (interval) of a predetermined round, but may be performed from the opening time of the predetermined round to the closing time. If it does in this way, the execution time of a promotion effect and a continuation effect can be ensured for a long time, and it becomes possible to perform a highly interesting effect.
  In the present embodiment, the process from step T7 to step T13 is performed in the main process of the liquid crystal control unit 141. However, the process from step T7 to step T32 of the V blank interruption process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 is performed. You may make it perform the process of step T13.
  Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of Step R7 to Step R10 is performed in the main processing of the lamp control unit 150, but instead of Step R31 of the V blank interruption processing of the lamp control unit 150, Step R7 to Step R10 are performed. You may make it perform the process of.
  In the present embodiment, the image control unit 145 (VDP) causes the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) to display a frame rate (frame image). Update timing, frame update cycle) and the V blank signal output from the image control unit 145 (VDP) in order to synchronize (tune) the steering light emitting device 15c and the control cycle of the blower device 21 with the liquid crystal control unit 141. However, the lamp controller 150 is provided with a timer counter that is updated at, for example, 1 ms, and the timer counter measures 33 ms that is the same as the frame rate. The operation control of the device 21 may be synchronized (tuned).
  In this embodiment, the frame rate at which image data (effect image) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) by the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps ( 1/30 seconds = about 33 ms), but the frame rate for displaying the image data (effect image) on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is 60 fps (1/60 seconds = about 16.6 ms). The frame rate for displaying the image data (effect image) on the two-image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) may be 30 fps (1/30 seconds = about 33 ms), or vice versa. In this case, the start and end of a notification effect (a definite effect, a certain change confirmation effect, a promotion notification effect, and a continuous definite effect) are controlled at the frame update timing corresponding to the frame rate of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Good.
  Further, the frame rate of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is set to 60 fps (1/60 seconds = about 16.6 ms), and image data (effect image) is displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). When the frame rate is set to 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays substantially the same image data (effect image) for two frames. You may make it display image data so that it may become the same frame rate as 2 image display apparatus 71 (sub-liquid crystal).
  In addition, the frame rate of both the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is set to 60 fps (1/60 seconds = about 16.6 ms), and the same image data for two frames ( By displaying the effect image, the frame rate may be substantially 30 fps (1/30 seconds = about 33 ms).
  In the present embodiment, the image control unit 145 (VDP) and the sound control unit 148 are controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141. However, the effect control unit 130m is provided with the control function of the liquid crystal control unit 141, and the effect control is performed. The image controller 145 (VDP) and the audio controller 148 may be controlled by the unit 130m.
  In this embodiment, the lamp controller 150 controls the frame illumination device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, the blower device 21, the panel illumination device 74, and the panel drive device 75. However, the control function of the lamp control unit 150 is provided to the effect control unit 130m, and the effect control unit 130m allows the frame illumination device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, the blower device 21, the panel illumination device 74, The panel drive device 75 may be controlled.
  In the present embodiment, as the notification effect, a one-shot notification effect or a rank-up effect for informing (indicating) the progress or result of the game (variation display, jackpot) to the player is exemplified. It may be a normal notice effect that informs (improves) the progress or result of display or jackpot).
  For example, the display of an image suggesting the degree of expectation of jackpot and / or the speech announcement effect for outputting a sound (voice) suggesting the degree of expectation of jackpot, the operation of the movable effect member 73 in a mode suggesting the degree of expectation of jackpot And / or an effect announcement for the effect of emitting light from the panel lighting device 74 for the movable effect member 73 in a mode that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot, and a frame lighting device 10 in a mode that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot Alternatively, a light emission announcement effect that emits light from the panel lighting device 74 may be used as a notification effect, and may be started at the frame update timing corresponding to the operation detection or operation non-detection of the effect button 17 in the effective period during the variable display. .
  Further, one or a plurality of composite effects obtained by arbitrarily combining any of the serif notice effect, the accessory notice effect, and the light emission notice effect are set as a notification effect, and the operation detection or the operation non-detection of the effect button 17 in the effective period during the variable display is performed. It may be started at the update timing of the frame corresponding to. In addition, a frame corresponding to reception of a predetermined command (special symbol memory designation command, start opening prize designation command, normal symbol memory designation command, etc.) from the main control board 110 for the serif notice effect, the accessory notice effect, and the light emission notice effect. It may be started at the update timing.
  Further, pre-reading notice such as continuous notice effect or hold change notice effect performed using one or more of the image display device, the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the movable effect member 73. The frame corresponding to the operation detection or non-detection of the effect button 17 in the effective time over one or a plurality of variable displays before the variable symbol display of the special symbol corresponding to the start opening prize designation command is started. It may be started at the update timing. In this case, during the validity period, the hold icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command is displayed as a special hold icon including a button image resembling the effect button 17, thereby informing the effective time while prompting the operation of the effect button 17. Good. In addition, an effective operation time may be notified while a dedicated operation promotion image is displayed in the pre-reading notice effect and the operation of the effect button 17 is prompted.
  It should be noted that the effective time of the effect button 17 in the notice effect such as the one-shot notice effect, the serif notice effect, the accessory notice effect, and the light emission notice effect described above and the valid time of the effect button 17 in the look-ahead notice effect are generated at the same time. Alternatively, only one of the valid times may be restricted. When the effective time is generated at the same time, priority is given to the shorter remaining time of the effective time, starting at the frame update timing corresponding to the operation detection or non-detection of the effect button 17 and the remaining time of the effective period. The longer one may be started later at the frame update timing corresponding to the detected operation or non-detected operation of the effect button 17.
  In addition, when a plurality of effect buttons are provided and the normal notice effect and the effective time of the pre-read notice effect occur at the same time, the first effect button is enabled in the normal notice effect and the operation for the normal notice effect is promoted. An image (first effect button image or the like) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in the pre-reading notice effect, the second effect button is enabled and an operation promotion image (second effect button image or the like) is displayed. May be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) or vice versa.
  Further, when only one effective time of the normal notice effect and the pre-read notice effect occurs, both the first effect button and the second effect button may be effective, and in this case, the first image display One or both of the first effect button image and the second effect button image may be displayed on the device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or the first image display device 70 ( One of the first effect button image and the second effect button image may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display).
  In the present embodiment, the effect button detection switch 17a constitutes “input detection means”, but is not limited to this. For example, an infrared sensor for detecting an operation such as a player's hand-holding, a player's hand It is good also as a detection element which can detect inputs, such as a player's operation and operation, such as a touch panel for detecting predetermined operation.
  Further, in the present embodiment, the “valid period” during which the effect button 17 (the effect button detection switch 17a) is effective during the change effect is generated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An effective period may be generated, and an operation effect corresponding to the state of the game (during a changing effect, during a customer waiting state, during a jackpot game, etc.) may be executed based on the operation of the effect button 17.
  In the present embodiment, the blower that sends wind (air) in a predetermined manner toward the player and the light emitting device of the handle for causing the launching handle to emit light in a predetermined manner constitute the “production means”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a frame illumination device 10 that is provided on a glass frame and emits light in a predetermined manner, a panel illumination device 74 that is provided on a game board and emits light in a predetermined manner, and a predetermined effect image. Second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) for displaying, movable effect member 73 provided on the game board and operating in a predetermined manner, frame provided on a glass frame for operating the movable member for frames in a predetermined manner A movable device (not shown) may be used.
  In the present embodiment, an event that is advantageous to the player may occur in the progress process of the game (during a variable display or a big hit), or an event that may be advantageous to the player may occur in the progress process of the game. An effect that informs (suggests) that there is a definite or preliminary notice corresponds to a “predetermined alert effect”, for example, a definite effect or a promising jackpot that definitely announces (notifies) that it will be a big hit Directed announcement effect such as a certain change confirmation effect that announces (notifies) definitely, a promotion effect that directs whether or not the type of jackpot game is promoted, and whether or not the round game that can win a prize ball continues A rank-up effect such as a continuation effect is given.
  In this embodiment, the update timing of the frame for starting the execution of the notification effect (confirmation effect, probability change confirmation effect, promotion notification effect, continuation notification effect) is displayed on the image display device with a predetermined effect image (for example, 1 of change start). The update timing of the frame in which the image data corresponding to the first frame of the frame, the start of reach, etc.) is displayed, but the update timing of the frame for starting the execution of the notification effect is stored in the drawing frame buffer. The update timing of the drawn frame (that is, one frame before the image data corresponding to the first frame of the change start, the first frame of the reach start, etc.) is displayed on the image display device may be used.
  In the present embodiment, the image data (effect image) drawn in the frame buffer at the update timing of the next frame after the number of frames in which the predetermined operation (operation of the effect button 17) is detected is displayed on the image display device. Frame update timing (second frame update timing after detecting a predetermined operation) is “frame update timing corresponding to detection of a predetermined operation”, but is not limited to this. The rendering image (image data) drawn in the frame buffer at the time when the motion is detected is displayed in the frame buffer at the timing of updating the frame for displaying on the image display device, or one or more frames after the predetermined motion is detected. It is good also as the update timing of the frame which displays the effect image (image data) performed on an image display apparatus.
  Further, in the present embodiment, image data (effect image) drawn in the frame buffer at the update timing of the frame next to the number of frames for which the effective period has expired is displayed. The second frame update timing after completion) is “frame update timing corresponding to non-detection of a predetermined operation”, but is not limited to this, and the frame buffer is stored when the valid period ends. An image display of an effect image (image data) drawn in the frame buffer one or more frames after the end of the effective period or a frame update timing for displaying the rendered effect image (image data) on the image display device Update timing of the frame to be displayed on the device (the first or multiple frames after the validity period ends) Absence of update timing) may be used.
  In the present embodiment, the image data (effect image) drawn in the frame buffer at the update timing of the frame next to the number of frames for which the round designation command has been received from the main control board is updated in the frame displayed on the image display device. The timing (second frame update timing after receiving the round designation command) is “frame update timing corresponding to reception of a predetermined command transmitted from the main control means”, but is not limited to this. First, when the round designation command is received from the main control board, the frame update timing for displaying the effect image (image data) drawn in the frame buffer on the image display device or the round designation command is received from the main control board. Production image drawn in the frame buffer one or more frames after the time (Image data) may be a frame update timing to be displayed on the image display device (update timing of the first or multiple th frame after receiving the round specifying command).
  In the above embodiment, the notification effect is executed in accordance with the frame update timing. However, an error designation command for magnetic abnormality, an error designation command for radio wave abnormality, and an illegal prize transmitted from the main control board 110 are used. The presentation control board 130 displays a notification (error) image corresponding to the type of error on the image display device based on reception of an error specification command such as an error specification command for an error, an error specification command for abnormal winning, or a sound output An error (notification) image is displayed when an error sound is output from the device 9 to output a radio wave abnormality notification sound, a magnetic abnormality notification sound, an illegal winning notification sound, or an abnormal winning notification sound. The notification sound may be output in accordance with the frame update timing.
(Example of adjustment image display)
A display example of a guidance image for volume adjustment and a guidance image for luminance adjustment will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, FIG. 110A is a diagram showing a display example when the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is in the set range of 0 to 5, and FIG. FIG. 110C is a diagram showing a display example when the switch position (scale) of the switch 22 is in a setting range of 6 to A, and FIG. 110C is a diagram where the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is BF. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when it is in the setting range.
  In FIG. 110A, the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is “0” belonging to the setting range of 0 to 5, and volume adjustment and luminance adjustment are possible (variable). In addition, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a screen waiting for a customer waiting effect in a state where the effect symbol 70a is stopped.
  At this time, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are arranged side by side at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Are displayed so as not to overlap. Although not shown, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 that are effective for volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are in a light-emitting state.
  Therefore, the player who sees the guidance image OAG for adjusting the volume, the guidance image KAG for adjusting the luminance, and the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 recognizes that the volume and the luminance can be adjusted. be able to. In addition, also when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is 1-5, the same display as Fig.110 (a) is made.
  In FIG. 110B, the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is “6” belonging to the setting range of 6 to A, and the volume adjustment is possible (variable) while the brightness adjustment is impossible (fixed). Is set to The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a screen waiting for a customer waiting effect.
  At this time, only the volume adjustment guide image OAG is displayed on the lower portion of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) so as to overlap the background image but not the effect symbol 70a. Although not shown, the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 that are effective for adjusting the volume are in a light-emitting state.
  Therefore, the player who has seen the guidance image OAG for volume adjustment and the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 emitting light can recognize that the volume can be adjusted. Even when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is 7 to A, the same display as in FIG.
  In FIG. 110 (c), the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is “B” belonging to the setting range of B to F, and the volume adjustment is disabled (fixed) while the brightness adjustment is possible (variable). Is set to The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a screen waiting for a customer waiting effect.
  At this time, only the brightness adjustment guide image KAG is displayed on the lower portion of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) so as to overlap the background image but not the effect symbol 70a. Although not shown, the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 that are effective for brightness adjustment are in a light-emitting state.
  Therefore, a player who has seen the brightness adjustment guide image KAG and the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 emit light can recognize that the brightness adjustment is possible. Even when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is C to F, the same display as in FIG. 110C is made.
  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 belongs to the setting range of 0 to 5, it is displayed that the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 are possible ( When the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 belongs to the setting range of 6 to A, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible and the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 is impossible. If there is an indication (notification) and the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 belongs to the setting range of B to F, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is impossible and the cross key 19 is used. It is displayed (notified) that the brightness can be adjusted.
  In this way, the player can easily grasp whether the object that can be adjusted by the operation of the cross key 19 is the volume, the brightness, or both the volume and the brightness, and what kind of operation is performed. It will be easier to understand if adjustments can be made.
  When only one of the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the displayed adjustment guide image is displayed as the first image display device 70 ( You may make it center in the lower center of the screen of (main liquid crystal). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the adjustment guide image displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).
(Specific example when the adjustment mode is changed while waiting for a customer waiting effect)
A specific example in the case where the adjustment mode is changed while waiting for a customer waiting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112.
  Specifically, FIG. 111 is a timing chart in the case where the adjustment mode is changed while waiting for a customer waiting effect, and FIG. 112 (a) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T1 in FIG. FIG. 112 (b) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T2 in FIG. 111, and FIG. 112 (c) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T3 in FIG. (D) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T4 in FIG. 111, and FIG. 112 (e) is an operation example of the gaming machine at the timing T5 in FIG.
  At the timing T0 in FIG. 111, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, and the overall RAM 144 has adjustment mode information (mode 3) and reference information (mode 3) corresponding to the switch position “2”. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1-5, initial volume value 2, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1-5, luminance initial value 3) The power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.
  The volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this time, in the image display device in which the backlight emits light with a luminance of 80%, a variation effect is executed, and the sound effect of the variation effect is dependent on (corresponding to) the volume value “2” from the audio output device 9. The output is 40%.
  At the timing of T1 in FIG. 111, when the variation effect being executed on the image display device is finished, the variation output effect from the audio output device 9 is accompanied with the transition to the customer waiting state (waiting for the customer waiting effect). The sound output is stopped, and an effective period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is valid for the volume adjustment start operation and the brightness adjustment start operation is started.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 112A, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation becomes effective. Then, the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 are turned on.
  When the changeover switch 22 is operated and the switch position (scale) is changed to “3” at the timing of T2 in FIG. 111, the overall RAM 144 stores adjustment mode information (mode 4) corresponding to the switch position “3”. , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 3, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1 to 5, luminance Initial value 5), power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.
  The volume value is set (changed) to “3 (volume 60%)” which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (changed) to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, from the audio output device 9, the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 4) so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing is set to a fixed volume value (volume value “6”). It is output at the maximum volume (volume 120%) output from the gaming machine 1 depending (corresponding). In addition, the output of the production sound from the audio output device 9 is in a stopped state.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the brightness of the backlight becomes 100% and becomes brighter by two levels. The display of the guidance image KAG is continued. Further, the light emission of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is effective is continued. In addition, since the change of the volume value and the luminance value this time is due to the change of the adjustment mode, the notification image of the volume value and the notification image of the luminance value are not displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).
  When the changeover switch 22 is operated and the switch position (scale) is changed to “4” at the timing T3 in FIG. 111, the overall RAM 144 stores information on the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “4” (mode 5). , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1-5, initial volume value 4, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1-5, luminance value Initial value 5), power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.
  The volume value is set (changed) to “4 (volume 80%)” which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the initial value of the luminance. From the audio output device 9, the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the adjustment mode (mode 5) after the change depends on the fixed volume value (volume value 6) so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing ( Output) at a volume of 120%. In addition, the output of the production sound from the audio output device 9 is in a stopped state.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the backlight brightness is maintained at 100%, the volume adjustment guide image OAG, and the brightness adjustment guide image. Display of KAG is continued. Further, the light emission of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is effective is continued.
  When the changeover switch 22 is operated and the switch position (scale) is changed to “5” at the timing T4 in FIG. 111, the overall RAM 144 stores information on the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “5” (mode 6). , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1-5, initial volume value 5, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1-5, luminance Initial value 5), power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.
  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to “5 (volume 100%)” which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, from the audio output device 9, the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 6) so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing is set to a fixed volume value (volume value “6”). Depending on (corresponding), the output is 120%. In addition, the output of the production sound from the audio output device 9 is in a stopped state.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (d), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the backlight brightness is maintained at 100%, and the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image. Display of KAG is continued. Further, the light emission of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is effective is continued. In addition, since the change of the volume value and the luminance value this time is due to the change of the adjustment mode, the notification image of the volume value and the notification image of the luminance value are not displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).
  At the timing of T5 in FIG. 111, when 60 seconds, which is the waiting time of the customer waiting effect, has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting state (waiting for the customer waiting effect), the volume adjustment is performed to start the execution of the customer waiting effect. The operation and the brightness adjustment operation become impossible, and the operation of the cross key 19 becomes invalid.
  Then, a comparison between the current volume value and the initial value of the volume set in the general RAM 144 and a comparison between the current luminance value and the initial value of the luminance set in the general RAM 144 are performed. However, since the current volume value and the initial value of the volume, and the current luminance value and the initial value of the luminance are the same, neither the volume value nor the luminance value is reset.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (e), a predetermined customer waiting effect display is started on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the sound corresponding to the customer waiting effect is output from the audio output device 9 as a volume value. A customer waiting effect is executed by output depending on (corresponding to) “5”. In addition, the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is disabled are turned off.
  As described above, in this embodiment, when the adjustment mode (volume value, luminance value, etc.) is changed (switched) by operating the changeover switch 22 while waiting for the customer waiting effect, the image display device is changed. An adjustment image for notifying the adjustment mode after the change is not displayed without a notification image (for example, a notification image for a volume value, a notification image for a luminance value, a dedicated adjustment mode notification image) for notifying a later adjustment mode. Since the mode notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, even if the changeover switch 22 provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1 is operated, the adjustment mode set by the adjustment mode notification sound can be recognized. It becomes possible.
  In addition, when the changeover switch 22 is operated and the adjustment mode is changed (switched), a notification image (for example, for notifying the adjustment mode after the change to the image display device if waiting for a customer waiting effect) For example, a notification image of volume value, a notification image of luminance value, a dedicated adjustment mode notification image, etc.), and otherwise (during a changing effect or a jackpot effect), the image display device is notified of the changed adjustment mode. The notification image may not be displayed. In this way, the changed adjustment mode can be recognized instantly without listening to the notification sound of the adjustment mode to the end.
  In the present embodiment, the notification sound in the adjustment mode is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 120% that depends on (corresponds to) a fixed volume value (volume value “6”) instead of an adjustable volume value. For example, even when the production sound is output during the standby of the customer waiting production, the notification sound of the adjustment mode is not missed, and the set adjustment mode can be surely recognized.
  Further, in the present embodiment, when the last operation for changing the volume value or the brightness value is not the operation of the cross key 19 but the operation of the changeover switch 22, the cross key 19 has not been turned on while waiting for the customer waiting effect. Since the volume value and the brightness value are not reset (reset) immediately before the start of the customer waiting effect, which is executed when the operation state continues for the waiting time of the customer waiting effect (60 seconds), during the execution of the customer waiting effect It is possible to execute a waiting-for-customer effect with the appealing power (volume value, luminance value) intended by the game shop side that has set the adjustment mode.
  In the modification example of the volume value reset process shown in FIG. 83B, the current volume value is not compared with the initial volume value set in the general RAM 144 at the timing T5. The volume value is unconditionally reset (reset) to the initial value of the volume, and in the modification example of the brightness value reset process shown in FIG. The luminance value is unconditionally reset (reset) to the initial luminance value without comparing with the initial luminance value set in the overall RAM 144.
  Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting effect with the appealing power (volume value, luminance value) intended by the game shop side that has set the adjustment mode during the execution of the customer waiting effect. For example, the adjustment mode of the same model is the same. In this case, it is possible to prevent the appealing power for the player waiting for the effect of waiting for the customer from being sparse between the same models.
  In addition, when the customer waiting effect is started during the output of the adjustment mode notification sound from the sound output device 9, the adjustment mode notification sound is continuously output and the adjustment mode notification sound from the sound output device 9 is output. When a variation effect (special symbol variation display) is started based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 during the output of the output, the notification sound of the adjustment mode is output at that time May be stopped (terminated) in the middle or may be switched to a non-audible sound with a volume of 0% for output.
  This makes it possible to accurately notify the adjustment mode in a situation where the player is not likely to play a game, while in a situation where the player is likely to be playing a game. The notification sound in the adjustment mode does not hinder the game, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating.
  Further, when the changeover switch 22 is operated and the adjustment mode is changed while waiting for the customer waiting effect, the waiting time (60 seconds) of the customer waiting effect may be reset at that time. . In this way, the customer waiting effect is started while the adjustment mode notification sound is being output, and it becomes difficult to hear the adjustment mode notification sound due to the customer waiting effect effect sound, or the adjustment mode notification sound is the customer waiting effect. It will not interfere with the production sound.
  It should be noted that during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, the sound output device 9 may output an effect sound corresponding to the waiting for the customer waiting effect. If it does in this way, it will become possible to prevent that the interest of a game falls, when a player is playing a game in the state where the change production is not performed by the image display device.
(Specific example when the volume value and adjustment mode are changed while waiting for a customer waiting effect)
A specific example in which the volume value and the adjustment mode are changed while waiting for a customer waiting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114.
  Specifically, FIG. 113 is a timing chart in the case where the volume value is changed while waiting for the customer waiting effect, and FIG. 114 (a) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T1 in FIG. FIG. 114 (b) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T2 in FIG. 113, and FIG. 114 (c) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T4 in FIG. 113. (D) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T5 in FIG. 113, and FIG. 114 (e) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T6 in FIG.
  At the timing of T0 in FIG. 113, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, and the overall RAM 144 has adjustment mode information (mode 3) and reference information (mode 3) corresponding to the switch position “2”. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1-5, initial volume value 2, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1-5, luminance initial value 3) The power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.
  The volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this time, the customer is waiting (waiting for the customer waiting effect), and the operation of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 is effective for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation.
  At this time, the volume adjustment image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is enabled emit light. It has become a state.
  When the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected at the timing of T1 in FIG. 113, the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 become invalid and the volume can be adjusted (volume) Move to (during adjustment).
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is invalidated. The light emission of the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 is stopped, and the light emission of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is valid is continued.
  When the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on at the timing of T2 in FIG. 113 and the operation of the right button is detected, the volume value is incremented by 1 and becomes “3”. The notification sound “mi” having a volume corresponding to “3” is output at a volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “3”.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “3” after the change is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is performed. The left and right buttons of the cross key 19 that are enabled continue to emit light. The output of the sound volume notification sound “mi” is synchronized with (synchronized with) the update timing of the frame in which the sound volume notification image OG indicating the sound volume value “3” is displayed.
  If the changeover switch 22 is operated and the switch position (scale) is changed from “2” to “7” between the timing T3 and the timing T4 in FIG. 113, the switch position is finally stored in the overall RAM 144. Adjustment mode information (mode 8) corresponding to “7”, reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 4, luminance adjustment possibility: impossible ( (Fixed) luminance value adjustment range “−”, initial luminance value 5), and power saving mode setting (power saving mode ON) are set.
  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to “4 (volume 80%)” which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (changed) to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the initial value of the luminance. However, since the volume is currently being adjusted, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 4).
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the brightness of the backlight becomes 100% and becomes brighter by two levels. ) Of the volume value indicating the volume value “3” displayed at the lower part of the screen is changed to the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “4” which is the initial value of the volume in the adjustment mode after the change. Will not be updated. In addition, the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 for which the operation is valid continue to emit light.
  When the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected at the timing of T5 in FIG. 113, the volume value is incremented by 1 and becomes “5”. The notification sound “So” of the volume corresponding to “5” is output at a volume of 100% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “5”.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the volume value after the change in consideration of the change (switching) of the adjustment mode and the change in the current volume value is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A notification image OG having a volume value indicating “5” is displayed, and the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is enabled continue to emit light. Note that the output of the sound notification sound “So” is synchronized with (synchronized with) the update timing of the frame in which the sound notification image OG having the sound volume value “5” is displayed.
  When the operation interval monitoring time of 3 seconds elapses from the operation of the right button at the timing of T5 at the timing of T6 in FIG. 113, the period during which volume adjustment is possible (during volume adjustment) ends, and the volume adjustment operation or The operation of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 is effective for the brightness adjustment operation.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 114 (e), a volume adjustment image OAG and a brightness adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in place of the volume value notification image OG at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Then, the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is valid are in a light-emitting state.
  As described above, in this embodiment, the period during which the volume value notification image OG is displayed is set to a period during which the volume adjustment is possible, and the cross key 19 is displayed during the period during which the volume value notification image OG is displayed. Therefore, the player can set the desired volume value while confirming the current volume value by the notification image OG of the volume value, and the volume adjustment is kind to the player. It can be a function.
  The same applies to the brightness adjustment. The period during which the brightness value notification image KG is displayed is set to a period during which the brightness adjustment is possible, and the cross key 19 is displayed during the period during which the brightness value notification image KG is displayed. Therefore, the player can set the desired brightness value while checking the current brightness value by using the brightness value notification image KG, and the player can set the brightness value that is kind to the player. It can be a function.
  In the present embodiment, the setting of the adjustment mode, the reference information, and the power saving mode is changed when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed during the volume adjustment period, that is, during the volume adjustment. Since the displayed notification image of the volume value is not changed (updated) to the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value set according to the changed adjustment mode, the player adjusts the volume. Even if the switch position of the change-over switch 22 is changed during the course, the player can be prevented from feeling suspicious.
  The same applies to the luminance adjustment. When the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed during the luminance adjustment period, that is, during the luminance adjustment, the settings of the adjustment mode, the reference information, and the power saving mode are changed. Since the notification image of the luminance value displayed on the display device is not changed (updated) to the notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value set according to the changed adjustment mode, the player Even if the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed and the adjustment mode is changed during the brightness adjustment, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling suspicious.
  In the present embodiment, the volume value is changed by changing the switch position of the selector switch 22 during the volume adjustment in which the notification image of the volume value is displayed, and then the volume value is changed by operating the cross key 19. When the value is changed, the notification image of the unupdated volume value displayed on the image display device is updated to the notification image of the correct volume value corresponding to the changed volume value, so that the player recognizes It is possible to eliminate the difference between the volume value and the actually set volume value.
  Even during the luminance adjustment in which the notification image of the luminance value is displayed, the luminance value is changed by the operation of the cross key 19 after the luminance value is changed by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22. Since the notification image of the incorrect luminance value displayed on the image display device is changed to the notification image of the correct luminance value corresponding to the changed luminance value, the luminance value recognized by the player is actually It is possible to eliminate the deviation of the set luminance value.
  In the present embodiment, the volume value is changed by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22 during the volume adjustment in which the notification image of the volume value is displayed, and then the cross key 19 is operated. If the notification image of the volume value is not displayed, the notification image of the correct volume value corresponding to the changed volume value is displayed during the next volume adjustment start operation. It is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the recognized volume value and the actually set volume value.
  Even during the luminance adjustment in which the notification image of the luminance value is displayed, the volume value is changed by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22, and then the volume value is not operated without the operation of the cross key 19. When the next notification image is not displayed, the notification image of the correct volume value corresponding to the changed volume value is displayed at the time of the next volume adjustment start operation, and the player recognizes at this time It is possible to eliminate the difference between the volume value and the actually set volume value.
  In the present embodiment, every time the volume value is changed in the volume adjustment using the cross key 19, the volume depends on (corresponds to) the changed volume value and the pitch (scale) corresponds to the changed volume value. Since the notification sound of the volume is output from the sound output device 9, since the pitch of the notification sound of the volume gradually changes when the volume value is continuously increased or decreased, the change in the volume value can be immediately grasped. It becomes possible to make it a kind message to the player.
  In addition, during the output of the volume notification sound from the audio output device 9 when the customer waiting effect is set to start after a fixed time has elapsed from the transition to the customer waiting state. When the customer waiting effect is started, the output of the volume notification sound is continued, and when the changing effect is started during the output of the volume notification sound from the audio output device 9, the volume notification sound is output. The output may be stopped (finished) in the middle or output at a volume of 0%.
  In this way, it is possible to accurately notify the volume (value) in a situation where the player is not likely to play a game, while the player is likely to be playing a game. Below, the notification sound of the volume does not hinder the game, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating.
(Specific example when the volume value and adjustment mode are changed while waiting for a customer waiting effect)
With reference to FIGS. 115 and 116, a specific example in the case where the volume value and the adjustment mode are changed while waiting for the customer waiting effect in the modification of the mode switching process shown in FIG. 73 will be described.
  Specifically, FIG. 115 is a timing chart in the case where the volume value and the adjustment mode are changed during standby for the customer waiting effect, and FIG. 116 (a) shows the gaming machine 1 at the timing T1 in FIG. 116 (b) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T2 in FIG. 115, and FIG. 116 (c) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T3 in FIG. 115. 116 (d) shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T4 in FIG. 115, and FIG. 116 (e) shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T5 in FIG.
  115, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “9”, and the overall RAM 144 has adjustment mode information (mode 10) and reference information (reference information) corresponding to the switch position “9”. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, initial volume value 2, luminance adjustment possibility: impossible (fixed) luminance value adjustment range “−”, initial luminance value 5) The power saving mode setting (power saving mode ON) is set.
  The volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this point of time, the customer is waiting (waiting for a customer waiting effect), and the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 is valid for the volume adjustment operation.
  At this time, the volume adjustment guide image OAG is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but the brightness adjustment guide image KAG is not displayed, and the operation of the cross key 19 is enabled. The left and right buttons are lit (lit), and the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is disabled are turned off.
  When the left button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned ON and the operation of the left button is detected at the timing of T1 in FIG. 115, the period shifts to a period during which volume adjustment is possible (during volume adjustment).
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is effective. The light emission of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 is continued.
  115, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned ON and the operation of the right button is detected, the volume value is incremented by 1 to “3”, and the sound output device 9 receives the volume value. The notification sound “mi” having a volume corresponding to “3” is output at a volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “3”.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “3” after the change is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is performed. The left and right buttons of the cross key 19 that are enabled continue to emit light. The output of the sound volume notification sound “mi” is synchronized with (synchronized with) the update timing of the frame in which the sound volume notification image OG indicating the sound volume value “3” is displayed.
  When the changeover switch 22 is operated and the switch position (scale) is changed from “9” to “A” at the timing T3 in FIG. 115, the overall RAM 144 stores information on the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “A”. (Mode 11), reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume adjustment initial value 1, luminance adjustment possibility: impossible (fixed) luminance value adjustment range “− "Initial value of brightness 5) and power saving mode setting (power saving mode ON) are set.
  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to “1 (volume 20%)” which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the initial value of the luminance. However, since the volume is being adjusted, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 11).
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 116C, in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the luminance of the backlight is maintained at 100%, and the volume value “1” after the change is displayed at the bottom of the screen. A notification image OG having a volume value indicating is displayed. Further, the light emission of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is effective is continued.
  115, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected, the volume value is incremented by 1 and becomes “2”. The notification sound “R” of the volume corresponding to “2” is output at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “2”.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “2” after the change is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is performed. The left and right buttons of the cross key 19 that are enabled continue to emit light. Note that the output of the sound volume notification sound “Le” is started in synchronization (synchronization) with the update timing of the frame in which the sound volume notification image OG indicating the sound volume value “2” is displayed.
  When the changeover switch 22 is operated and the switch position (scale) is changed from “A” to “B” at the timing of T5 in FIG. 115, the overall RAM 144 stores information on the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “B”. (Mode 12), reference information (volume adjustment possibility: impossible (fixed) volume value adjustment range “−”, initial volume value 2, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1 to 5. Initial value of brightness 5) and power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) are set.
  Then, the volume value is set (maintained) to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the initial value of the luminance. This completes the period during which the volume can be adjusted (during volume adjustment). Note that the period during which volume adjustment is possible (during volume adjustment) ends, but since the previous state was volume adjustment, the audio output device 9 notifies the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 11). Sound is not output.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 116 (e), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the luminance of the backlight is maintained at 100%, and instead of the notification image OG of the volume value at the bottom of the screen. A brightness adjustment guide image KAG is displayed. In addition, the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 for which the operation is disabled are turned off, and the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 for which the operation is enabled are turned on (lighted).
  Note that when the volume adjustment is fixed by the operation of the changeover switch 22 and the volume adjustment in progress is canceled, the sound output device 9 may output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. Good.
  As described above, in this embodiment, even if the changeover switch 22 is operated during volume adjustment using the cross key 19 and the adjustment mode is changed, the adjustment mode notification sound is not output. It is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sound or being suspicious of having performed an unauthorized operation (remote operation or the like).
  The same applies to the brightness adjustment. Even when the changeover switch 22 is operated during the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 and the adjustment mode is changed, the adjustment mode notification sound is not output. It is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sound or being suspicious of an unauthorized operation.
  In the present embodiment, if the adjustment mode is changed by operating the changeover switch 22 during the volume adjustment using the cross key 19, the volume value is changed to the initial value of the volume corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. However, in this case, since the sound of the sound volume is not output, the sound of the sound volume is output even though the cross key 19 is not operated, and the player is surprised or illegal. It becomes possible to suppress the suspicion that there was an operation (remote control etc.).
  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the changeover switch 22 is performed during volume adjustment using the cross key 19, and the adjustment mode is changed, so that the volume value is changed to the initial value of the volume corresponding to the changed adjustment mode ( Reset), the notification image of the volume value displayed on the image display device changes to the one corresponding to the changed volume value, so that it is not known that the player has operated the changeover switch 22. However, it is possible to grasp the volume value that is actually set.
  The same applies to the brightness adjustment. When the changeover switch 22 is operated during the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 and the adjustment mode is changed, the brightness value is changed to the initial value of the brightness corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. In this case, the notification image of the luminance value displayed on the image display device changes to the one corresponding to the changed luminance value, so that the player operates the changeover switch 22. Even if the user does not know what has been done, the actually set luminance value can be grasped.
  Further, in the present embodiment, when the changeover switch 22 is operated during the volume adjustment in the adjustment mode in which the volume adjustment is variable, and the adjustment mode is changed (switched) to the adjustment mode in which the volume adjustment is impossible (fixed). Since the notification image of the volume value displayed on the image display device is not displayed, the player or game clerk can recognize (notify) that the volume adjustment is disabled. .
  The same applies to the luminance adjustment, and the changeover switch 22 is operated during the luminance adjustment in the adjustment mode in which the luminance adjustment is variable, so that the adjustment mode is changed to the adjustment mode in which the luminance adjustment is impossible (fixed). ), Since the notification image of the luminance value displayed on the image display device is not displayed, it is possible to make a player or a game clerk recognize (notify) that the luminance adjustment has been disabled. It becomes.
  If the adjustment mode is changed based on the operation of the changeover switch 22 and the volume value is changed while the notification sound of the volume corresponding to the volume value changed based on the operation of the cross key 19 is output, the volume is changed. The notification sound may be output halfway. If the volume value does not change even when the adjustment mode is changed, it is preferable not to end the output of the volume notification sound.
◇ (Specific example when the customer waiting effect is executed after the volume value is changed while waiting for the customer waiting effect)
117 and 118, a specific example in the case where the customer waiting effect is executed after the volume value is changed while waiting for the customer waiting effect will be described.
  Specifically, FIG. 117 is a timing chart when the customer waiting effect is executed after the volume value is changed during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, and FIG. 118 (a) is a timing at T1 in FIG. 118 (b) is an example of the operation of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T2 in FIG. 117, and FIG. 118 (c) is the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T3 in FIG. 117. 118 (d) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T4 in FIG. 117, and FIG. 118 (e) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T5 in FIG. 117. is there.
  At the timing T0 in FIG. 117, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “5”, and the overall RAM 144 has adjustment mode information (mode 6) and reference information (reference information) corresponding to the switch position “5”. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1-5, initial volume value 5, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1-5, initial luminance value 5) The power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.
  The volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)”. At this time, in the image display device in which the backlight emits light with a luminance of 80%, a variation effect is executed, and a sound effect of the variation effect is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 40%.
  117, at the timing of T1, when the variation effect that has been executed in the image display device is completed, the output of the effect sound from the audio output device 9 is performed in accordance with the transition to the customer waiting state (waiting for the customer waiting effect). Is stopped, and an effective period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is effective for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is started.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation becomes effective. Then, the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 are turned on.
  117, when the left button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the left button is detected, the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 become invalid and the volume can be adjusted (volume). Move to (during adjustment).
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), a notification image OG having a volume value indicating the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is invalid. The light emission of the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 is stopped, and the light emission of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is valid is continued.
  117, when the left button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned ON and the operation of the left button is detected at the timing T3 in FIG. 117, the volume value is decremented by 1 to “1”. The notification sound “do” of the volume corresponding to “1” is output at a volume of 20% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “1”.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “1” after the change is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is performed. The left and right buttons of the cross key 19 that are enabled continue to emit light. Note that the output of the sound volume notification sound “do” is synchronized (synchronized) with the update timing of the frame in which the sound volume notification image OG indicating the sound volume value “1” is displayed.
  117, when the operation interval monitoring time of 3 seconds elapses from the operation of the left button at the timing of T3 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 117, the period during which volume adjustment is possible (during volume adjustment) ends, and the volume adjustment operation or The operation of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 is effective for the brightness adjustment operation.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), in the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a volume adjustment guide image OAG and a brightness adjustment guide image KAG are used instead of the volume value notification image OG. Is displayed, and the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for which the operation is valid are in a light-emitting state.
  117, when 60 seconds, which is the waiting time for the customer waiting effect, elapses from the timing of T4, the volume adjusting operation and the brightness adjusting operation become impossible in order to start the customer waiting effect. Thus, the operation of the cross key 19 becomes invalid.
  Since the current volume value “1” is smaller than the initial volume value “5” set in the overall RAM 144, the volume value “1” set in the overall RAM 144 becomes the initial volume value “5”. Since the current luminance value “3” is reset and smaller than the initial luminance value “5” set in the general RAM 144, the luminance value “3” set in the general RAM 144 is the initial luminance value “5”. Is reset (reset).
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 118 (e), a predetermined customer waiting effect display is started on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the sound corresponding to the customer waiting effect is output from the audio output device 9 to the volume value. A customer waiting effect is executed by output depending on (corresponding to) “5”. In addition, the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is disabled are turned off.
  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operation that last changed the volume value is the operation of the cross key 19, the non-operated state of the cross key 19 during the waiting for the customer waiting effect is the customer waiting effect. If the current volume value is smaller than the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode immediately before the start of the customer waiting effect for 63 seconds, the volume value is reset (reset) to the initial value of the volume. If the current volume value is not smaller than the initial volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode, the volume value is not reset (reset) to the initial volume value.
  For this reason, during the customer waiting effect, an effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) of the customer waiting effect is output with a volume value that is equal to or higher than the volume value intended by the game store side that has set the adjustment mode. It is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to the player or improve the appealing power of the customer waiting effect based on the result of the player's volume adjustment.
  The same applies to the brightness adjustment. When the operation that last changed the brightness value is the operation of the cross key 19, the state in which the cross key 19 is not operated during the standby for the customer waiting effect is the customer waiting effect. If the current luminance value is smaller than the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode immediately before the start of the customer waiting effect for 60 seconds, the luminance value is reset (reset) to the initial luminance value. If the current luminance value is not smaller than the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode, the luminance value is not reset (reset) to the initial luminance value.
  For this reason, the backlight of the image display device and the lamps of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) are set according to the luminance value higher than the luminance value intended by the game shop side that has set the adjustment mode during the customer waiting effect. LED) emits light, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to a player waiting for a player or to improve appealing power of a customer waiting based on the result of the player's volume adjustment. It becomes possible.
  Note that a point in time before the waiting time of the customer waiting effect elapses (for example, 10 seconds before the customer waiting effect is started), or a point in time after the waiting time of the customer waiting effect elapses (for example, waiting for the customer). The sound volume value may be reset (reset) to the initial value of the sound volume 10 seconds after the start of the production, and the brightness value may be reset (reset) to the initial value of the brightness. Further, the timing for resetting the volume value to the initial value of the volume may be different from the timing for resetting the luminance value to the initial value of the luminance.
  Further, in the present embodiment, the customer waiting state in which the fluctuating effect is not executed is an adjustable period during which the volume value and the luminance value can be adjusted by operating the cross key 19 (while waiting for the customer waiting effect), and the cross key 19. The sound volume value and the brightness value are classified into the adjustment impossible period (during the customer waiting effect) in which the volume value and the brightness value cannot be adjusted by the operation of.
  For this reason, the volume adjustment and brightness adjustment during the waiting for a performance will not interfere with the waiting for the waiting effect, and the reduction in appealing power (appealing power) to the player for the waiting for the reception will be suppressed. Is possible.
  In addition, during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, the adjustment possible period and the adjustment impossible period may be set, or during the customer waiting effect, the adjustment possible period and the adjustment impossible period may be set. May be. For example, if you are waiting for a customer waiting effect, you can adjust the period during which the usual roulette effect that informs (suggests) the result of the normal map change display on the image display device is not executed. The period during which the ordinary roulette effect is being executed is the period during which adjustment is impossible, and the period during which no effect related to the manufacturer name or model name of the gaming machine 1 is being performed is the period during which adjustment is possible. For example, the period during which the production related to the manufacturer name or model name of the gaming machine 1 is performed is set as an adjustment impossible period.
  Further, when the switch mode of the changeover switch 22 is changed during the customer waiting effect and the adjustment mode is changed, it depends on (corresponds to) the volume value set (maintained / changed) according to the changed adjustment mode. The sound output device 9 produces an effect sound corresponding to the customer-waiting effect at a sound volume that is adjusted, and the image display device has a brightness that depends on (corresponds to) the brightness value that is set (maintained / changed) in accordance with the changed adjustment mode. The lamps (LEDs) of the backlight and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) come to emit light.
  In the modification example of the volume value reset process shown in FIG. 83B, the current volume value is not compared with the initial volume value set in the general RAM 144 at the timing T5. The volume value is unconditionally reset (reset) to the initial value of the volume, and in the modification example of the brightness value reset process shown in FIG. The luminance value is unconditionally reset (reset) to the initial luminance value without comparing with the initial luminance value set in the overall RAM 144.
  Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting effect with the appealing power (volume value, luminance value) intended by the game shop side that has set the adjustment mode during the execution of the customer waiting effect. For example, the adjustment mode of the same model is the same. In this case, it is possible to prevent the appealing power for the player waiting for the effect of waiting for the customer from being sparse between the same models.
◇ (Specific example when a power failure occurs after the volume value is changed while waiting for a customer waiting effect)
119 and 120, a specific example in the case where a power failure occurs after the volume value is changed while waiting for a customer waiting effect will be described.
  Specifically, FIG. 119 is a timing chart in the case where a power failure (power interruption) occurs after the volume value is changed during standby for the customer waiting effect, and FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram of T1 in FIG. FIG. 120B shows an example of the operation of the gaming machine 1 at the timing, FIG. 120B shows an example of the operation of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T2 in FIG. 119, and FIG. 120C shows the gaming machine at the timing T3 in FIG. 120 (d) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T5 in FIG. 119, and FIG. 120 (e) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T6 in FIG. 119. It is.
  At the timing T0 in FIG. 119, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, and the overall RAM 144 has adjustment mode information (mode 3) and reference information (reference information) corresponding to the switch position “2”. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1-5, initial volume value 2, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1-5, luminance initial value 3) The power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.
  The volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this time, the customer is waiting (waiting for the customer waiting effect), and the operation of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 is effective for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation.
  At this time, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is valid. Is emitting light.
  When the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected at the timing of T1 in FIG. 119, the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 become invalid and the volume can be adjusted (volume) Move to (during adjustment).
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 120A, a notification image OG having a volume value indicating the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is invalid. The light emission of the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 is stopped, and the light emission of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is valid is continued.
  When the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected at the timing T2 in FIG. The notification sound “mi” having a volume corresponding to “3” is output at a volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “3”.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the volume value “3” after the change is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is performed. The left and right buttons of the cross key 19 that are enabled continue to emit light. The output of the sound volume notification sound “mi” is synchronized with (synchronized with) the update timing of the frame in which the sound volume notification image OG indicating the sound volume value “3” is displayed.
  When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and a power failure occurs at the timing of T3 in FIG. 119, the general RAM 144 that is not supplied with the backup power from the power supply board 160 becomes unable to hold the stored contents, and the adjustment mode Information, reference information, power saving mode setting, volume value, luminance value, etc. are lost (cleared) (may be indefinite values).
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 120C, the backlight of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is turned off and nothing is displayed on the screen, and the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 are turned off. It becomes a state. Although not shown, the backlight of the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is turned off and nothing is displayed on the screen.
  When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and recovered from a power failure (power failure) at the timing T4 in FIG. 119, the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is referred to, and the overall RAM 144 has a switch position “ 2 ”adjustment mode information (mode 3), reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, initial volume value 2, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable) ), Brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness initial value 3), and power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) are set (reset).
  Further, the volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this time, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are in a state where a color bar, which is an initial screen when the power is turned on, is displayed.
  When the effect control unit 130m receives the power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing T5 in FIG. 119, the sound volume value temporarily changes to “0 (mute) during a period of notification of power supply restoration. ) ”And the luminance value is temporarily set to“ 5 (100%) ”, and the sound output notification sound is not (fixed) from the sound output device 9 (volume value“ 6 ”). ) Depending on (corresponding to)) and output at a volume of 120%. At this time, the production sound is not output, and the volume value need not be set to “0 (mute)”.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the backlight emits light with a luminance of 100%, and the notification image (gauge image G2, character image G3) of power restoration is displayed. The displayed state is reached, and the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 remain off.
  At the timing of T6 in FIG. 119, when the notification period of power recovery ends after the notification time of 30 seconds elapses from the start of notification of power recovery, the output of the power recovery notification sound from the audio output device 9 is stopped, The volume value returns to “2” before notification of power restoration, and the luminance value returns to “3” before notification of power restoration. A valid period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is valid for the operation is started.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 120 (e), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) becomes a screen waiting for a customer waiting effect, and a volume adjustment guide image OAG and a brightness adjustment guide image are displayed at the bottom of the screen. KAG is displayed, and the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for which the operation has been enabled are in a light-emitting state.
  As described above, in the present embodiment, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped after the volume value is changed from the initial value of the volume during the volume adjustment (the power is cut off, the power is cut off), and then the power to the gaming machine 1 is changed. When the supply is resumed, the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode set according to the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is set (reset) as the volume value. That is, when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is not changed before and after the power is turned off, the volume value is reset (reset) to the initial value of the volume before the power is turned off.
  Therefore, when the supply of power to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and the business day of the game store is changed, the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode (switch position of the changeover switch 22) set by the game store is restored. Thus, it is possible to reduce the work burden on the game shop staff by saving the trouble of changing the volume value to the volume value intended by the game shop every business day.
  When the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed before and after the power is turned off, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, the volume value is set according to the switch position of the changeover switch 22. Since the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode is newly set, the volume value set before and after the power is turned off changes.
  The same applies to the luminance value. After the luminance value is changed from the initial value of the luminance during the luminance adjustment, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped (power is cut off, the power is cut off), and then the power source to the gaming machine 1 is changed. When the supply is resumed, an initial value of luminance corresponding to the adjustment mode set according to the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is set as the luminance value. That is, when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is not changed before and after the power is turned off, the luminance value is reset (reset) to the initial value of the luminance before the power is turned off.
  Therefore, when the supply of power to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and the business day of the game store is changed, the brightness value corresponding to the adjustment mode (switch position of the changeover switch 22) set by the game store is restored. Thus, it is possible to reduce the work burden on the game shop staff by saving the trouble of changing the brightness value to the brightness value intended by the game shop every business day.
  In addition, when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed before and after the power is turned off, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, the luminance value is set according to the switch position of the changeover switch 22. Since the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode is newly set, the luminance value set before and after the power is turned off changes.
  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification sound of the occurrence event that notifies the occurrence of an important event when an important event such as power recovery occurs is not a volume value that can be adjusted by the player, but a fixed volume that is set in advance. Depending on the value (volume value “6”) and output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 120%, the game store clerk will generate an important event that may threaten the security of the gaming machine 1 for the game store. Can be reliably recognized.
  In addition, although the explanation about the power failure restoration after the volume adjustment is described here, the basic flow is the same when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c after the volume adjustment. Should be read as power-on.
  Further, in the present embodiment, during notification of important events such as power recovery notification and power-on notification, it is not possible to adjust the volume value and the brightness value, so the volume adjustment guidance image The OAG, the brightness adjustment guide image KAG, the volume value notification image OG, the brightness value notification image KG, etc. are not displayed, and the volume value and the brightness value cannot be changed using the cross key 19. .
  Therefore, a guidance image OAG for adjusting the volume, a guidance image KAG for adjusting the luminance, a notification image OG for the volume value, a notification image KG for the brightness value, and the like are displayed. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the visual recognition of the power-on notification image or the like is obstructed and the game store clerk cannot grasp the occurrence of an important event or the type of the important event.
◇ (Specific example when the adjustment mode is changed during fluctuating production)
A specific example in the case where the adjustment mode is changed during the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122.
  Specifically, FIG. 121 is a timing chart in the case where the adjustment mode is changed during the variation effect, and FIG. 122 (a) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T1 in FIG. 121. 122 (b) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T2 in FIG. 121, FIG. 122 (c) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T4 in FIG. 121, and FIG. 122 (d). FIG. 121 is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T5 in FIG. 121, and FIG. 122E is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T6 in FIG.
  121, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, and the overall RAM 144 has adjustment mode information (mode 3) and reference information (reference information) corresponding to the switch position “2”. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1-5, initial volume value 2, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1-5, luminance initial value 3) The power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.
  The volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this point of time, the waiting for the customer waiting effect is on, and the valid period during which the operation of the cross key 19 is effective for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation.
  At this time, in the image display device in which the backlight emits light with a luminance of 80%, a screen waiting for the customer waiting effect is displayed, and a guidance image OAG for volume adjustment and a guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for which the operation is valid are in a light emitting state.
  121, when the first start opening detection switch 45a is turned on and the special symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 60, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. The accompanying variation effect is started and the process proceeds to the acceleration variation of the effect symbol, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the effect sound of the variation effect at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “2”. In addition, the effective period during which the operation of the cross key 19 becomes valid ends with the period during which the adjustment of the effect symbol becomes impossible due to the transition to the acceleration variation of the effect symbol.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 122 (a), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG displayed at the bottom of the screen are not displayed. The symbol 70a starts the variable display in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. In addition, the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is disabled are turned off.
  When the changeover switch 22 is operated and the switch position (scale) is changed to “3” at the timing of T2 in FIG. 121, information on the adjustment mode (mode 4) corresponding to the switch position “3” is stored in the overall RAM 144. , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 3, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1 to 5, luminance Initial value 5), power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.
  The volume value is set (changed) to “3 (volume 60%)” which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (changed) to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, the sound output device 9 outputs the effect sound of the variation effect at a volume of 60% depending (corresponding) to the volume value “3” after the change. However, since the present time is a fluctuating effect, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 4).
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), since the change in the volume value and the luminance value this time is due to the change in the adjustment mode, the notification image of the volume value is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The notification image of the brightness value is not displayed, and the change display of the effect symbol 70a (during the effect symbol acceleration change) is continued. In addition, the top, bottom, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is invalid are continuously turned off.
  At the timing of T3 in FIG. 121, when the acceleration change of the effect symbol in which the change rate of the effect symbol 70a is accelerated ends, the effect symbol 70a shifts to the high-speed change of the effect symbol at which the change rate becomes a constant change speed. The adjustment period is an effective period in which the operation of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 is effective for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation.
  At this time, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are not displayed at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) because of the fluctuating effects, but the operation is effective. The up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 are in a light-emitting state.
  When the changeover switch 22 is operated and the switch position (scale) is changed to “4” at the timing of T4 in FIG. 121, the overall RAM 144 stores information on the adjustment mode (mode 5) corresponding to the switch position “4”. , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1-5, initial volume value 4, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1-5, luminance value Initial value 5), power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.
  The volume value is set (changed) to “4 (volume 80%)” which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, the sound output device 9 outputs the effect sound of the variation effect at a volume of 80% depending (corresponding) to the volume value “4” after the change. However, the sound output in the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 5) is not output from the audio output device 9 because the variation effect is being performed.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 122 (c), since the current change in the volume value and the luminance value is due to the change in the adjustment mode, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) has a volume value notification image. The notification image corresponding to the serif notice that suggests (predicts) the degree of expectation that is a big hit is continued, and the display of the effect symbol 70a is continuously displayed (during the effect symbol acceleration change). In addition to being displayed, a notice sound corresponding to the line notice is output. Further, the light emission of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is valid is continued.
  At the timing of T5 in FIG. 121, when the high-speed variation of the production symbol 70a at which the production symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed ends, the process proceeds to the low-speed fluctuation of the production symbol at which the fluctuation speed of the production symbol 70a becomes low. Accordingly, the period during which adjustment cannot be performed, and the valid period during which the operation of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation ends.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), the first notice display image displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is not displayed, and the variation rate of the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a becomes low. The type of effect design 70a can be recognized. In addition, the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is disabled are turned off.
  When the changeover switch 22 is operated and the switch position (scale) is changed to “5” at the timing of T6 in FIG. 121, information on the adjustment mode (mode 6) corresponding to the switch position “5” is stored in the overall RAM 144. , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1-5, initial volume value 5, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1-5, luminance Initial value 5), power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.
  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to “5 (volume 100%)” which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, the sound output device 9 outputs the effect sound of the fluctuating effect at a volume of 100% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “5” after the change. However, the sound output in the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 6) is not output from the audio output device 9 because the variation effect is being performed.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 122 (e), since the change in the volume value and the luminance value this time is due to the change in the adjustment mode, the notification image of the volume value is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Or the notification image of the brightness value is not displayed, and the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped on the active line. In addition, the top, bottom, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is invalid are continuously turned off.
  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the adjustment mode is changed by operating the changeover switch 22 during the fluctuating effect, the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the luminance corresponding to the adjustment mode after the change of the volume value and the luminance value. The effect sound of the fluctuating effect output from the audio output device 9 also has a volume that depends on (corresponds to) the volume value changed to the initial value of the volume, and the backlight of the image display device and various lighting devices (frames) The lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) also have luminance depending on (corresponding to) the luminance value changed to the initial luminance value.
  Therefore, it becomes possible to avoid the inconvenience that the volume value and the luminance value cannot be changed when the necessity of changing the volume value and the luminance value occurs during the fluctuating production due to the convenience of the game store or the player's request. This makes it possible to provide an adjustment function that is kind to a game store. Further, it is not necessary to suspend the game temporarily, and the operation of the gaming machine 1 can be improved.
  Further, in the present embodiment, when the changeover switch 22 is operated and the adjustment mode is changed (switched) in a situation where the customer waiting effect is not on standby (for example, during a fluctuating effect or a jackpot effect), the adjustment mode is changed. Is not output from the audio output device 9.
  Therefore, the production sounds (game sounds such as BGM and SE) that are output while the player is playing are not obstructed, and the notification sound of the adjustment mode is output, thereby reducing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress that. In addition, it is possible to suppress the player from being surprised by the output of the adjustment mode notification sound or being suspicious of an unauthorized operation.
  Note that when the adjustment mode is changed by operating the changeover switch 22 in a situation where the customer waiting effect is not waiting (for example, during a changing effect or a jackpot effect), the customer waiting effect is immediately waited. Even if there is, the notification sound of the adjustment mode is not output, but when the waiting for the customer waiting effect is waited within a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the change of the adjustment mode, the notification sound of the adjustment mode is output. You may do it.
  Further, in the present embodiment, the volume value and the brightness value are changed when the changeover switch 22 is operated and the adjustment mode is changed (switched) in a situation where the customer waiting effect is not being performed (for example, during a variable effect or a jackpot effect). Is changed (reset) to the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the luminance corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. At that timing, the notification image OG of the volume value and the notification image KG of the luminance value are newly added to the image display device. Since it is not displayed, the notification image OG of the volume value and the notification image KG of the luminance value are not displayed on the image display device at a timing not suitable for the player, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced. It becomes.
  Here, a case where the adjustment mode is changed by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22 during the jackpot game in which the production sound is output from the audio output device 9 as in the case of the variation production will be described.
  When the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed during the jackpot game and the adjustment mode is changed, the sound volume value and the brightness value are changed to the initial value of the sound volume and the initial value of the brightness corresponding to the adjusted mode after the change. The effect sound of the jackpot game output from the output device 9 also becomes a volume that depends on (corresponds to) the volume value after the change, and the backlight of the image display device and various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10, the panel illumination device 74). ) Lamp (LED) also has a luminance that depends (corresponds) to the luminance value after the change.
  Further, when the adjustment mode is changed during the jackpot game, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and the image display device corresponds to the changed adjustment mode. Since the notification image OG of the volume value and the notification image KG of the luminance value are not displayed, the same effect as described above can be obtained.
  More specifically, when the adjustment mode is changed during the opening of the jackpot game, the volume value and the luminance value are changed to the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the luminance corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and the audio output device 9 The effect sound during the opening that is output from is also a volume that depends (corresponds) to the volume value after the change, and the backlight of the image display device and the lamps of various illumination devices (frame illumination device 10, panel illumination device 74) (LED) also has a luminance that depends on (corresponds to) the luminance value after the change.
  Even in this case, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and the image display device has a volume value corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. The notification image OG and the luminance value notification image KG are not displayed.
  When the adjustment mode is changed during the big hit game round, the volume value and the luminance value are changed to the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the luminance corresponding to the adjusted mode after the change, and output from the audio output device 9 The effect sound during the round is also dependent on (corresponding to) the volume value after the change, and the lamps (LEDs) of the backlight of the image display device and various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74) ) Also depends on (corresponds to) the luminance value after the change.
  Even in this case, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and the image display device has a volume value corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. The notification image OG and the luminance value notification image KG are not displayed.
  In addition, when the adjustment mode is changed during the jackpot game interval, the volume value and the luminance value are changed to the initial volume value and the initial luminance value corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and output from the audio output device 9. The effect sound during the interval is also dependent on (corresponding to) the volume value after the change, and the lamps (LEDs) of the backlight of the image display device and various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74) ) Also depends on (corresponds to) the luminance value after the change.
  Even in this case, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and the image display device has a volume value corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. The notification image OG and the luminance value notification image KG are not displayed.
  In addition, when the adjustment mode is changed during the jackpot game ending, the volume value and the luminance value are changed to the initial volume value and the initial luminance value corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and output from the audio output device 9 The effect sound during the ending also becomes a volume dependent (corresponding) to the volume value after the change, and the lamp (LED of the backlight of the image display device and various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10, the panel illumination device 74) ) Also depends on (corresponds to) the luminance value after the change.
  Even in this case, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and the image display device has a volume value corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. The notification image OG and the luminance value notification image KG are not displayed.
◇ (Specific example when the volume value is changed during the adjustable period during fluctuating production)
A specific example in the case where the volume value is changed during the adjustable period during the changing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.
  Specifically, FIG. 123 is a timing chart in the case where the volume value is changed during the adjustable period during the variation effect, and FIG. 124 (a) shows the operation of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T0 in FIG. 124 (b) is an example of the operation of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T1 in FIG. 123, and FIG. 124 (c) is an example of the operation of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T3 in FIG. 124D is an example of the operation of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T4 in FIG. 123, and FIG. 124E is an example of the operation of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T6 in FIG.
  At the timing T0 in FIG. 123, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, and the overall RAM 144 has adjustment mode information (mode 3) and reference information (mode 3) corresponding to the switch position “2”. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1-5, initial volume value 2, luminance adjustment possibility: possible (variable), luminance value adjustment range 1-5, luminance initial value 3) The power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.
  The volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this point of time, the waiting for the customer waiting effect is on, and the valid period during which the operation of the cross key 19 is effective for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), in the image display device in which the backlight emits light with a luminance of 80%, a screen waiting for the customer waiting effect is displayed, and a volume adjustment guide image OAG is displayed at the bottom of the screen. In addition, the brightness adjustment guide image KAG is displayed, and the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for which the operation is valid are in a light-emitting state.
  123, when the first start opening detection switch 45a is turned ON and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, the image display device displays the variation of the effect symbol 70a. The accompanying variation effect is started and the process proceeds to the acceleration variation of the effect symbol, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the effect sound of the variation effect at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “2”. In addition, the effective period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is valid ends when the adjustment effect is disabled as the fluctuating effect starts.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG displayed at the bottom of the screen are not displayed. The symbol 70a starts the variable display in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. In addition, the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is disabled are turned off.
  At the timing of T2 in FIG. 123, when the effect symbol 70a changing speed of the effect symbol 70a is accelerating, the effect symbol 70a is shifted to the effect symbol 70a where the effect symbol 70a has a constant rate of change. The adjustment period is an effective period in which the operation of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 is effective for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation.
  At this time, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are not displayed at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) because of the fluctuating effects, but the operation is effective. The up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 are in a light-emitting state.
  123, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected, the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 are disabled and the volume can be adjusted (volume). Move to (during adjustment).
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 124C, a notification image OG having a volume value indicating the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is invalid. The light emission of the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 is stopped, and the light emission of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is valid is continued.
  123, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected, the sound volume value is incremented by 1 to “3”, and the sound output device 9 generates a sound volume of 40. The effect sound of the fluctuation effect output at% is output at a volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “3” after the change. However, since the present time is a fluctuating effect, the sound output device 9 does not output a notification sound having a volume corresponding to the changed volume value “3”.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 124 (d), a notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “3” after the change is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is performed. The left and right buttons of the cross key 19 that are enabled continue to emit light.
  At the timing of T5 in FIG. 123, when the high-speed variation of the production symbol 70a at which the production symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed ends, the process proceeds to the low-speed fluctuation of the production symbol at which the fluctuation speed of the production symbol 70a becomes low. Accordingly, the period during which adjustment cannot be performed, and the valid period during which the operation of the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation ends.
  At this time, in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “3” is not displayed, and the fluctuation speed of the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a becomes low, and the effect symbol 70a. Can be recognized. In addition, the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is disabled are turned off.
  At the timing of T6 in FIG. 123, the right button of the cross key 19 is operated. However, since the current adjustment period is disabled, the operation of the right button of the cross key 19 becomes invalid and the volume value is changed. There is nothing.
  At this time, as shown in FIG. 124 (e), the notification image of the volume value is not displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a is temporarily displayed on the effective line. Stop. In addition, the top, bottom, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is invalid are continuously turned off.
  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the adjustable period during which the volume value and the luminance value can be adjusted by operating the cross key 19 (during the high-speed effect symbol change). The volume value and the brightness value cannot be adjusted by the operation of the cross key 19, and the adjustment period is not possible (during the acceleration variation of the production symbol, during the low-speed variation of the production symbol, during the reach variation, etc.).
  Therefore, volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are not performed during the period in which the player wants the player to pay attention to the variation effect, and the effect of the effect of the variation effect is extremely reduced and the interest of the game is reduced. It becomes possible to prevent.
  The period during which the production symbol acceleration fluctuation is included may be included in the adjustable period, or the period during which the normal announcement effect or the pre-reading announcement effect is being executed even during the high-speed fluctuation of the production symbol is set as the adjustment impossible period. It may be set. In this way, it is possible to prevent